environmental impact assessment ... impact assessment for the proposed 4x300 mw coal based thermal...

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT For

THE PROPOSED 4X300 MW COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANT

AT BINJKOT, DARRAMURA, BADEJAMPALI AND GINDOLA VILLAGES

IN KHARSIA TEHSIL OF RAIGARH DISTRICT, CHHATTISGARH

REPORT FOR PUBLIC HEARING

Vimta Labs Ltd., 142, IDA, Cherlapally,

Hyderabad–500 051

www.vimta.com

Prepared by :

SKS POWER GENERATION (CHHATTISGARH) LIMITED

(a 100% subsidiary of)

SKS ISPAT AND POWER LTD.

December, 2008

Sponsor :

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 4x300 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola Villages in Kharsia Tehsil of Raigarh District, Chhattisgarh State

Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-I

Table of Contents

_______________________________________________________________

Chapter Title Page

_______________________________________________________________

Table of Contents TC-1

List of Figures TC-IV

List of Tables TC-V

1.0 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the Report C1-1

1.2 Identification of Project & Project Proponent C1-1

1.3 Brief Description of Project C1-2

1.4 Scope of the Study C1-2

1.5 Compliance to TOR Conditions C1-7

1.6 Methodology of the Study C1-7

1.7 Administrative and Legislative Background C1-8

1.8 Contents of the Report C1-8

2.0 Project Description

2.1 Type of the Project C2-1

2.2 Need for the Project C2-1

2.3 Project Location and Layout C2-1

2.4 Project Size/Magnitude of Operation Including Resources C2-2

2.5 Utilities for the Proposed Plant Operations C2-8

2.6 Other Plant Facilities C2-13

2.7 Sources of Pollution C2-17

2.8 Mitigation Measures Proposed C2-21

3.0 Baseline Environmental Status

3.1 Introduction C3-1

3.2 General Geology C3-1

3.3 Meteorology C3-2

3.4 Air Quality C3-14

3.5 Water Quality C3-23

3.6 Soil Characteristics C3-30

3.7 Noise Level Survey C3-34

3.8 Flora and Fauna Studies C3-39

3.9 Landuse Studies on Census C3-49

3.10 Demography and Socio-economics C3-55

4.0 Impact Assessment and Mitigation Measures


4.2 Impacts during Construction Phase C4-1

4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase C4-4

4.4 Environmental Management Plan during Construction C4-18

4.5 Environmental Management Plan during Operation C4-19

4.6 Greenbelt Development C4-27

4.7 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures C4-32


Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-II

Table of Contents (Contd.)

_______________________________________________________________

Chapter Title Page

_______________________________________________________________

5.0 Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Project Site

5.1 Analysis of Alternative Technology C5-1

5.2 Analysis of Alternative Sites for Location of Power Plant C5-2

6.0 Environmental Monitoring Program


6.2 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure C6-1

6.3 Monitoring Schedule C6-1

6.4 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis of

Environmental Monitoring C6-5

6.5 Reporting Schedules of the Monitoring Data C6-7

6.6 Infrastructure for Monitoring of Environmental

Protection Measures C6-7

7.0 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan


7.2 Approach of the Study C7-1

7.3 Hazard Identification C7-1

7.4 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation C7-3

7.5 Disaster Management Plan C7-14

7.6 Off-site Emergency Preparedness Plan C7-24

7.7 Occupational Health and Safety C7-28

8.0 Project Benefits

8.1 Availability of Quality Power C8-1

8.2 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure C8-1

8.3 Improvement in the Social Infrastructure C8-1

8.4 Employment Potential C8-2

9.0 Administrative Aspects

9.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection

and Conservation C9-1

10.0 Disclosure of Consultants C10-1


Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-III

Table of Contents (Contd.)

_______________________________________________________________

Chapter Title Page

_______________________________________________________________

List of Annexures

Annexure-I Terms of Reference Copy and Compliance AI-1 Annexure-II Administrative and Legislative Background AII-2 Annexure-III Copy of Water Allocation and Availability Letter AIII-1

Annexure-IV Emission Calculations AIV-1 Annexure-V Ambient Air Quality Levels AV-1 Annexure-VI Methodology for Sampling and Analysis AVI-1 Annexure-VII Details of Flora and Fauna AVII-1 Annexure-VIII Landuse Pattern AVIII-1 Annexure-IX Demographic Details AIX-1

Annexure-X R&R Plan AX-1


Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-IV

List of Figures

_______________________________________________________________

Figure Title Page

_______________________________________________________________ 1.1 Location Map of the Proposed Power Plant C1-3 1.2 Study Area Map C1-4 2.1 Plant Layout showing various Facilities C2-3

2.2 Water balance Diagram C2-7 2.3 Typical Process Flow scheme for Coal Handling Plant C2-10 3.3.1 Wind Rose – Pre Monsoon (IMD Raipur) C3-7 3.3.2 Wind Rose – Monsoon C3-8 3.3.3 Wind Rose – Post Monsoon C3-9 3.3.4 Wind Rose – Winter C3-10

3.3.5 Wind Rose – Annual C3-11 3.3.6 Site Specific Windrose – Pre Monsoon - 2008 – 2007-08 C3-12 3.4.1 Air Quality Sampling Locations C3-15 3.5.1 Water Sampling Locations C3-26 3.6.1 Soil Sampling Locations C3-32 3.7.1 Noise Monitoring Locations C3-37

3.8.1 Ecological Sampling Locations C3-43 3.9.1 Thematic Map of Study Area C3-53 3.9.2 Landuse Pattern based on Satellite Data C3-54 4.1 Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of SPM C4-8 4.2 Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of SO2 C4-9 4.3 Short Term 24 hourly Incremental GLCs of NOx C4-10

4.4 Predicted Noise Dispersion Contours C4-17 4.5 Rainwater Harvesting Structure C4-22 4.6 Greenbelt Development Plan C4-28 5.1 Alternative Sites Considered for the Proposed Power Plant C5-4 7.1 Damage Contour for LDO Tank on Fire C7-10 7.2 Damage Contour for HFO Tank on Fire C7-11

7.3 Onsite Emergency Organization Chart C7-23 9.1 Organization Structure for Environment Management C9-2


Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-V

List of Tables

Tables Title Page

1.1 Environmental Setting of the Site C1-5

1.2 Details of Monitoring C1-7 2.1 Details of Proposed Power Plant C2-2

2.2 Breakup of Landuse C2-4 2.3 Proximate Analysis of Coal Considered C2-5 2.4 Typical Characteristics of Heavy Fuel Oil C2-5 2.5 Water Requirement of Power Plant C2-6 2.6 Stack Details and Emission Rates C2-19 2.7 Water Balance of the Proposed Power Plant C2-19

2.8 Source Noise Levels in the Proposed Plant C2-20

3.3.1 Sensitivity of Meteorology Monitoring Equipment C3-2

3.3.2 Climatological Data C3-3

3.3.3 Summary of the Meteorological Data Monitored at Site C3-6

3.4.1 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations C3-16

3.4.2 Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling C3-16

3.4.3 Instruments used for Analysis of Samples C3-17

3.4.4 Techniques used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring C3-17

3.4.5 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results C3-21 3.5.1 Water Sampling Locations C3-24

3.5.2 Surface Water Quality C3-27 3.5.3 Ground Water Quality C3-28 3.6.1 Analytical techniques for Soil Analysis C3-30

3.6.2 Details of soil Sampling Locations C3-31

3.6.3 Soil Analysis Results C3-33

3.6.4 Standard Soil Classification C3-34

3.7.1 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations C3-35

3.7.2 Noise Levels in the Study Area C3-38

3.8.1 List of Forest Blocks in 10-km radius C3-41

3.8.2 Details of Terrestrial Ecological Sampling Locations C3-42

3.8.3 Class wise Distribution of Plant Species in the Study Area C3-44

3.8.4 Fauna and their Conservation Status in the Study Area C3-45

3.8.5 Details of Aquatic Sampling Locations C3-47

3.8.6 List of Observed Planktonic Flora and Fauna C3-48

3.9.1 Landuse Pattern of Study Area C3-49

3.9.2 Landuse / Land cover Classification System C3-50

3.9.3 Landuse breakup Based on IRS-P6 Data C3-52

3.10.1 Distribution of Population in the Study Area C3-55

3.10.2 Distribution of Population by Social Structure C3-56

3.10.3 Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates C3-56

3.10.4 Occupational Structure C3-57


Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-VI

List of Tables (contd...)

Tables Title Page

4.1 Proposed Stack Details C4-5

4.2 Predicted 24 Hourly Short Term Incremental Concentrations C4-6

4.3 Resultant Concentrations due to Incremental GLCs C4-6

4.4 NAAQ/CPCB Standards for Ambient Air Quality C4-6

4.5 Details of Incremental Concentration of pollutants on Forest

Blocks and Sensitive Locations C4-7

4.6 Types of Wastewater Generation and Treatment Details C4-12

4.7 Expected Quality of Wastewater C4-13

4.8 Expected Solid Waste from Power Plant C4-14

4.9 Major Noise Generating Sources C4-16

4.10 Predicted Noise Levels at the Plant Boundaries C4-16

4.11 Progressive Ash Utilization Plan C4-25

4.12 Greenbelt Development Schedule C4-27

4.13 Recommended Plants for Greenbelt C4-29

4.14 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures C4-33

6.1 Environmental Monitoring during Project Construction Stage C6-2

6.2 Environmental Monitoring during Operational Phase C6-4

7.1 Hazardous Materials Proposed to be stored/transported C7-2

7.2 Category-wise Schedule of Storage Tanks C7-2

7.3 Properties of Fuels/Chemicals used at the Plant C7-2

7.4 Applicability of GOI rules to Fuel/Chemical Storage C7-3

7.5 Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Process and Storage Areas C7-3

7.6 Preliminary Hazard Analysis for the Whole Plant in General C7-3

7.7 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index C7-4

7.8 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index C7-5

7.9 Damage Due to Incident Radiation Intensities C7-6

7.10 Radiation Exposure and Lethality C7-7

7.11 Scenarios Considered for MCA Analysis C7-7

7.12 Properties of Fuel Considered for Modeling C7-7

7.13 Occurrence of Various Radiation Intensities – Pool Fire C7-8

7.14 Hazard Analysis for Process in Power Plant C7-12

7.15 Hazardous Events Contributing to Risk at on-site Facility C7-13

7.16 Off-site Action Plan C7-27

Environmental Impact Assessment For The Proposed 4x300 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant At Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola Villages In Kharsia Tehsil of Raigarh District, Chhattisgarh State

Chapter-1 Introduction

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

M/s. SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited (SKSPGCL) is a 100% subsidiary of M/s. SKS Ispat and Power Ltd (SKSIPL) and is created as an Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV) for setting up of 1200 MW coal based power plant.

The proposed 4X300 MW (1200 MW) coal based thermal power plant will be located at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola villages in Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh district of Chhattisgarh state. This chapter describes the purpose of the report, identification of the proposed

project and project proponent, brief description of nature, size and location of the project and importance to the region and country. This chapter also describes the scope of the study and details of regulatory scoping carried out as per Terms of Reference (TOR) issued by Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi.

1.1 Purpose of the Report As per Environment Impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September, 2006, commissioning or operation of thermal power plants (≥500 MW) falls under category ‘A’ under project type 1(D) and requires Environmental Clearance (EC) to be obtained from MoEF before the commencement of ground activity.

Inline with the said Notification, a meeting was held in MoEF on 11th June 2008 for determining the TOR for the preparation of EIA/EMP report for the proposed coal based power project. MoEF issued TOR conditions vide letter No. J-13012/164/2007-IA.II(T) dated 9th July 2008 to SKS Ispat and Power Ltd. Later, at the request of SKSIPL and SKSPGCL, MoEF transferred the TOR conditions to

SKSPGCL vide letter no. J-13012/64/2008-IA.II(T) dated 15th September 2008. Based on the TOR conditions stipulated by MoEF vide letters mentioned above, draft EIA/EMP has been prepared. A copy of MoEF letter giving the details of TOR conditions is given in Annexure-I.

Accordingly, to obtain EC from MoEF and Consent for Establishment from Chhattisgarh Environment Conservation Board (CECB), this EIA report has been prepared for SKSPGCL assessing the environmental impacts due to the proposed power plant.

1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent

1.2.1 About the Project

The proposed project (4X300 MW coal based Power Plant) will be located at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola villages in Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh

district of Chhattisgarh state. This project is inline with the central government’s massive power capacity addition plan, which sets a target of adding 78,900 MW of power generation capacity in the country by the year 2012, by establishing the proposed power plant.




It is envisaged that coal for the power plant station would be from Fathepur coal block and linked to SECL coal mines. Coal from SECL coal mines will be transported by rail. Coal from Fatehpur coal block will be transported by road.

1.2.2 Project Proponent

The project is promoted by M/s. SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited, a

subsidiary of SKS ISPAT & Power Limited, which is one of the established and fast growing industry of steel and power sectors.

1.3 Brief Description of Project

The proposed project would require 960-acre (388.5-ha) of land including the ash

pond and colony. In the proposed power plant four (4) sub-critical boilers will be installed which will be fired on coal sourced from SECL coal fields. The total coal requirement for the project at 90% Plant Load Factor (PLF) will be 6.02 MTPA. The water requirement will be about 35-MCM/annum, which will be drawn from Mahanadi river which runs about 30-km south from the site. Two 275-m twin-flue stacks with ESP of 99.99% efficiency will be provided to control particulate matter

to less than 50 mg/Nm3.

1.3.1 Project Cost

The cost of the total project is about Rs.5100 crores, which includes Rs 450 crores for environmental protection measures. The project will be commissioned within 45 months from the zero date.

1.3.2 Description of the Site

The land identified for the proposed project 960 acres is mostly dry agriculture land of 60% and barren/waste land comprising of 40%. The land in the plant site is plain with a general elevation of about 230-m AMSL. The mean maximum and mean minimum ambient temperatures in the area as per IMD–Raigarh are recorded to be 42.6°C (May) and 13.2°C (January) respectively. The relative humidity varies from 38.0% to 86.0% at 0830 hr and from 20.0% to 78.0% at 1730 hr. The average annual total rainfall in the region is about 1602.3-mm. Seismically, the site falls under Seismic Zone-III.

1.3.3 Environmental Setting of the Site

The environmental setting of the proposed plant site is given in Table-1.1. The location map of the project and study area map of 10-km radius around the proposed site are given in Figure-1.1 and Figure-1.2 respectively. The co-ordinates of the plant site and ash pond site are marked on toposheet and

enclosed as Figure-1.2.

1.4 Scope of the Study

With a view to assess the environmental impacts due to the proposed coal based power plant of 4X300 MW at Raigarh district, SKS Power Generation (Chhasttisgarh) Limited availed the services of M/s. Vimta Labs Ltd, Hyderabad to prepare EIA report for various environmental components including air, noise, water, land and biological components along with parameters of human interest which may be affected and to prepare an EMP for mitigating adverse impacts.




FIGURE-1.1 LOCATION MAP OF THE PROPOSED POWER PLANT

CHHATTISGARH

PLANT SITE




PLANT

A : 22° 01’ 40” N, 83° 12’ 09” E

B : 22° 00’ 45” N, 83° 11’ 39” E

C : 21° 59’ 58” N, 83° 12’ 04” E

D : 22° 00’ 56” N, 83° 13’ 15” E

N

83° 10' 83° 15'

SCALE

1 0 1 2 KM

22°

0'

22°

5'

21°

55'

Topo Sheet No.s : 64 N/4, N/8, O/1, O/5

10 KM

83° 10' 83° 15'

22°

0'

22°

5'

21°

55'

Benjkote

DarramuraGindola

Jampali

Kurubhata

Sendripali

Jhitipali

Pamgarh

Nawagaon

Kharsiya

Dengurchua

Tilapali

Naharpali

Nawapara

ASH POND

1 : 22° 01’ 23” N, 83° 12’ 36” E

2 : 22° 01’ 17” N, 83° 12’ 23” E

3 : 21° 00’ 26” N, 83° 12’ 58” E

4 : 22° 00’ 32” N, 83° 13’ 10” E

A

B

C

D

1

2

3

4

Chhote Dumarpali

Note:-This Plant Boundary is Marked Based on Tentative Plant Area Given by

SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Ltd.

The Exact Plant Boundaries will be marked after the

Completion of the land acquisition by State Govt.

FIGURE-1.2 STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)




TABLE-1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE

Sr. No. Particulars Details

1 Plant location At Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola villages in Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh district of Chhattisgarh State

2 Plant site coordinates A : 22˚ 01’40”N to 83˚ 12’09”E

B : 22˚ 00’45”N to 83˚ 11’39”E

C : 21˚ 59’58”N to 83˚ 12’04”E

D : 22˚ 00’56”N to 83˚ 13’15”E

3 Ash pond coordinates 1 : 22˚ 01’23”N to 83˚ 12’36”E

2 : 22˚ 01’17”N to 83˚ 12’23”E

3 : 22˚ 00’26”N to 83˚ 12’58”E

4 : 22˚ 00’32”N to 83˚ 13’10”E

4 Climatic conditions (IMD, Raigarh)

a) Temperature Mean maximum Mean minimum

42.60C (May) 13.2 oC (January)

b) Mean annual rainfall (total) 1602.3 mm

c) Relative Humidity Maximum-41.0 minimum-20.0%

d) Predominant wind directions Pre-monsoon: NE and SE Annual: NE and SW

6

a) b) c)

Climatic conditions at site Temperature Relative humidity Predominant wind directions

From 1st March to 31st May 2008 Max: 42.0 oC and Min:21.3 oC Max:41.3% and Min: 20.3% NE, SW and NW

5 Plant site elevation above MSL 230-m above MSL

6 Plant site topography Generally flat

7 Present land use at the site Barren land & unused and partly agricultural land

8 Nearest highway NH-200 (15 -km, S), state high way Kharsia- Raigarh (1.7 km, SSE)

9 Nearest railway station Robertson RS (2.4 km) SW

10 Nearest Airport Raipur (190-km, SW)

11 Nearest major water bodies Mand river (0.5-km, W) Kurket River (4.2-km, N)

12 Water source for the project Mahanadi river (30-km,S)

13 Nearest town/City Kharsia (9.1-km, WSW)

14 Nearest village Binjkot (0.3 NE)

15 Hills/valleys No hills and valleys with in 10 km radius

16 Archaeologically important places

None in 15-km radius

17 Protected areas as per Wildlife Protection Act,1972 (Tiger reserve, Elephant reserve, Biospheres, National parks,

None in 15-km radius




Sr. No. Particulars Details

Wildlife sanctuaries, community reserves and conservation reserves)

18 Reserved / Protected Forests Forest blocks exist in 10-km radius: Sr.No. Name of the

Forest block Distance(km) Direction

1) Rabo RF 0.8 NNE 2) Taraimal RF 8.2 ENE 3) Lotan RF 6.6 NNW 4) Urdana RF 9.2 E 5) PF near

Bendajhariya village

4.1 SW

6) Burha pahar RF

4.9 SW

7) Bhalunara RF 5.4 W 8) PF (Daharidih

village) 9.3 NE

9) Bargarh RF 5.3 WNW 10) Endu RF 7.4 NW 11) Panikhet PF 8.1 NNE 12) Suhai RF 8.9 NNE

19 Seismicity Seismic Zone-III as per IS 1893 (Part I): 2002

20 Defence Installations None in 15-km radius area

21 Major industries in 15-km radius Monnet ISPAT & Power Limited (3-km, SE )

22 Socio-economic factors R&R issues are presented in Annexure-X Note: All distances mentioned are aerial distances; Source: EIA studies, Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad

The EIA report is prepared based on one season baseline environmental quality data as per the guidelines and requirements of MoEF, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and Chhattisgarh Environment Conservation Board (CECB). Environmental baseline monitoring has been carried out during pre-monsoon season (1st March 2008 to 31st May 2008) and used to identify potential significant impacts. Modelling exercises have been carried out to predict and

evaluate impacts due to proposed power plant. An Environment Management Plan is included in this report. The scope of the present study is inline with the TOR as recommended by MoEF vide letter No. J-13012/164/2007-IA.II (T) dated 9th July 2008.

1.4.1 Study Area for EIA

The study area for the Environment Impact Assessment is 10-km radius area around the periphery of proposed power plant, ash pond area and township. The study area is shown in Figure-1.2.

1.4.2 Scope of the Study The scope of the study broadly includes: • Field sampling of environmental attributes at various representative locations in

the study area to establish the baseline environmental status;




• Collate and compile secondary data including socio-economic data from published literature / government publications;

• Estimate pollution loads that would be generated by the proposed project; • Predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed

project;

• Evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes by using scientifically developed and widely accepted Environmental Impact Assessment Modelling Methodologies;

• Prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the predicted impacts; and

• Identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored during the

project execution and to suggest post project monitoring.

1.5 Compliance to TOR Conditions SKS Power Generation Limited has presented the project details to MoEF Expert Appraisal Committee on 11th June 2008 to seek the Terms of Reference (TOR) for

the preparation of EIA report. MoEF has examined the proposed TOR as submitted by SKS Energy Limited and recommended the TOR for preparation of EIA. Subsequently, the TOR has been transferred in the name of SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited. A copy of TOR letter along with compliance statement is given in Annexure-I.

1.6 Methodology of the Study Reconnaissance survey was conducted by Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad and officials of SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:

• Predominant wind direction, expected during the period of baseline monitoring in the study area as recorded by India Meteorological Department (IMD) at Raigarh;

• Topography and location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and rivers; • Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas; • Identified pollution pockets, if any, within the study area;

• Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment; • Areas which represent baseline conditions; and • Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental

attributes. The monitoring details are outlined in Table-1.2.




TABLE-1.2 DETAILS OF MONITORING

Sr.

No.

Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring

1 Ambient air quality SPM, RSPM, SO2, NOx and

CO

The monitoring was carried

out at 12 locations and 24

hourly samples collected at a frequency of twice a

week in Pre-monsoon

season (2008). CO samples were collected on 8-hour

basis.

2 Meteorology Wind Speed, Direction, Temperature, Relative

Humidity, Rainfall &

duration and other non instrumental observations

a] Continuous hourly recording through setting

up of site meteorological

station;

b] Data collected from

secondary sources like IMD

station, Raigarh. 3 Water quality Physical, Chemical and

Bacteriological Parameters

Once during the study

period at 11 locations (for

8 ground water and 3 surface water )

4 Ecology Existing terrestrial and aquatic flora and fauna

Once during study period through field visits

5 Noise levels Noise levels in dB(A) Once during the study period at 10 locations

6 Soil characteristics Soil profile, characteristics, soil type and texture,

heavy metal, NKP value etc

Once during the study period at 8 locations

7 Land use Land use for different

categories

Based on data published in

latest district census

handbooks and Satellite imagery

8 Socio-economic aspects Socio-economic characteristics, labour force

characteristics

Based on data published in latest district census

handbooks

9 Geology Geological history Based on data collected from secondary sources

10 Hydrology (Surface and Ground)

Drainage area and pattern, nature of streams, aquifer

characteristics, recharge

and discharge areas

Based on data collected from secondary sources

11 Risk assessment,

Disaster Management Plan and Occupational

Health and Safety

Identify areas where

disaster can occur and identify areas of

occupational hazards.

Based on assessment

1.7 Administrative and Legislative Background

The proposed power project is covered under several environmental legislations. Brief details of the applicable environmental standards are given in Annexure-II.




1.8 Contents of the Report

The report has been divided into ten chapters and presented as follows:

Chapter-1 - Introduction

The chapter provides the purpose of the report, background information of the proposed power project, brief description of nature, size and location of project, objectives of the project, estimated project cost, scope and organization of the study. The key environmental legislation and the standards relevant to the project and the methodology adopted in preparation of this report have also been described in this chapter.

Chapter-2 - Project Description

The chapter deals with the need of the project, location, environmental setting of the project, details of power project, other technical and design details and sources of pollution from the proposed activity and measures proposed to control pollution.

Chapter-3 –Baseline Environmental Status

The chapter presents the methodology and findings of field studies undertaken to establish the environmental baseline conditions, which is also supplemented by secondary published literature. Chapter-4 – Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The chapter details the inferences drawn from the environmental impact assessment of the proposed power project during various phases of project advancement, such as design, location of project, construction, and regular operations. It also describes the overall impacts of the proposed project activities and underscores the areas of concern, which need mitigation measures.

The chapter also provides recommendations/ Environment Management Plan (EMP) including mitigation measures for minimizing the negative environmental impacts of

the project.

Chapter-5 – Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Project Site

The technology and project site alternatives are discussed in the chapter.

Chapter-6 – Environmental Monitoring Program

Environmental monitoring requirements for effective implementation of mitigatory measures during operational phase have been delineated in this chapter.

Chapter-7 – Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan

The chapter describes various risks associated during operational stage of the project such as storage of furnace oil and coal. A disaster management plan to minimise the risks or to combat the associated risks is also discussed.




Chapter-8 – Project Benefits

The chapter describes various benefits of the project to the community in the vicinity and as well as to the region on the whole.

Chapter-9 –Administrative Aspects

The chapter describes the institutional arrangements for environment protection

and conservation during the operational stage of the Project. Chapter-10 – Disclosure of Consultants The list of various experts involved in preparation of the present EIA/EMP report is given along with brief introduction of the consultancy organisation involved in EIA

report.


Chapter-2 Project Description


2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

This chapter deals with the technical details of the proposed power plant, details of

infrastructure, various sources of pollution and the measures proposed to control

pollution.

2.1 Type of the Project

SKS Power Generation (Chhasttisgarh) Limited proposes to set-up a coal based

thermal power project of 4X300 MW capacity at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali,

Gindola villages in Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh district, Chhattisgarh state. Boilers of

the project shall be pulverized coal fired type and based on sub-critical

technology. It is envisaged that coal for the power plant from captive coal mine

Fathepur coal block would be linked to SECL coal mines.

2.2 Need for the Project

Electric energy is known to be the vital utility and prerequisite for stimulating the

industrial and commercial activities in economic development of the nation. In

post-independent era, the country has witnessed significant growth in power

sector especially in power generation. However, the demand has escalated so

high that in spite of the phenomenal increase in installed capacity of power

generation, there has been sustained deficit in power supply and is expected to

increase further in future. Thermal power has always remained major component

among different types of power generation in India.

In order to cope up with the ever increasing gap in power demand and supply,

Government of India has widened the scope of private sector participation in

electricity generation by passing a resolution in October 1991 and allowing them

to set-up power plants. Moreover, the measures initiated through the Electricity

Act 2003 have further enhanced the opportunities to private participation in

power sector, especially in thermal power generation.

With a view to harvest the current opportunity, SKS Power Generation

(Chhattisgarh) Limited initiated proceedings for setting up of thermal power plant

in the country.

Considering the existing and escalating demand of electricity in the northern grid,

SKS Power Generation (Chhasttisgarh) Limited proposes to develop a power

project of 1200 MW (4x300MW) capacity at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali,

Gindola villages in Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh district, Chhattisgarh state.

2.3 Project Location and Layout

Inline with the MoU signed with Govt. of Chhattisgarh state and on the basis of

the prerequisites for selecting a site for the proposed 4X300 MW power project,

the site selection was carried out through alternative site evaluation within

Raigarh district. Four (4) alternate sites were identified in Chhattisgarh state and

after evaluation, a site at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali, Gindola villages in




Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh district, having major favourable features along with

good environmental features, has been identified for the proposed project.

The proposed site is about 15.0-km away from the nearest national highway, NH-

200. The state capital city Raipur is about 190-km away from the site. The

nearest airport at Raipur is about 190-km. The proposed plant layout is

presented in Figure-2.1 respectively.

Layout of the power plant has been optimised considering the space requirements

for all the equipment, systems, buildings, structures, coal storage area including

railway and marshalling yard, ash silos, raw water storage tank, water treatment

plant, cooling water pump house etc. Necessary plant drainage system would be

provided at the proposed power plant site. In laying out various facilities,

following general aspects have been taken into consideration:

• Provision to install 4X300 MW;

• Coal storage yard for 15 days requirement at site for 1200 MW;

• Ash silos for fly ash;

• Predominant wind directions as shown in the wind rose to minimise pollution,

fire risk etc;

• Raw water supply and storage facilities; and

• Availability of adequate space for fabrication / construction equipment.

All facilities of the plant area will be laid out in close proximity to each other to

the extent practicable so as to minimize the land requirement. The layout

facilitates movement of men and materials between the various facilities both

during construction and operation.

2.4 Project Size or Magnitude of Operation including Resources

The capacity of total power plant will be 1200-MW. Four (4) sub-critical boilers

will be installed for power generation. The details of proposed power plant are

presented in Table-2.1.

TABLE-2.1

DETAILS OF PROPOSED POWER PLANT

Sr. No. Features Description

1 Capacity 1200MW

2 Configuration 4X300

3 Type of boilers Pulverized coal fired sub-critical boilers

4 Power evacuation Power will be evacuated into PGCIL’s grid and CSEB’s grid through 400 KV level

5 Fuel Coal

6 Source of Coal Coal for the plant would be linked to SECL coal mines

7 Coal Requirement 6.02 MTPA

8 Sulphur content 0.35%

9 Ash Content in Coal 41%

10

A B

Ash generation

Bottom Ash Fly Ash

2.47 MTPA

0.49 MTPA 1.98 MTPA

11 ESP efficiency 99.99%

12 Stack Two 275-m height multi- flue stacks

13 Water Requirement 4500 m3/hr at 90% PLF Source: M/s SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited, DPR




FIGURE-2.1

PLANT LAYOUT SHOWING VARIOUS FACILITIES

cc




2.4.1 Land Requirement

The total land required for the proposed power plant is 960 acres is mostly dry

agriculture land of 60% and barren/waste land comprising of 40%. The break-up

of the landuse for the proposed power plant is given in Table-2.2. The general

layout plan of the plant is presented in Figure-2.2.

• Optimization of Land Breakup

About 960 acres of land had been considered for the project. Land requirement of

a power project as per the Norms of Central Electricity Authority (CEA) is 1 acre

per MW of power generation including 100 acres for Residential Township.

TABLE-2.2

BREAK-UP OF LANDUSE

Sr.No Particulars Area

(Acres)

Basis / Workings

1 Main Power Block 72 As per requirement

2 Raw Water Storage 100 Water Storage for 7 days requirement

with water reservoir of 3m depth.

3 400 kv switch yard 24 As per CEA Guidelines

4 Plant water system incl of cooling

towers

50 As per CEA Guidelines

5

Coal & fuel oil Storage and

Handling

42.5 Coal Stock Storage for 30 days

requirement with Pile length of 650m.

6 Railways Marshalling Area 66 For Considered 2 wagon Tipplers and

one Fuel oil unloading lines.

7 Misc Area 58 As per requirement.

8 Greenbelt 137.5 Green Belt = 1/3 of

(1+2+3+4+5+6+7+8+9)

Total Main Plant Area 550

9 Ash Disposal Area incl. of

Greenbelt

310 For considered, 25 years of Bottom

Ash & 3 years of Fly Ash storage.

10 Colony incl. of Greenbelt 100

TOTAL AREA 960

2.4.2 Fuel Requirement, Source, Quality and Transportation

2.4.2.1 Fuel Source

The main fuel for this power plant is domestic coal which will be sourced partly

from the captive mine of Fathepur coal block of SKS and partly from SECL mines.

It is proposed to draw a rail line for transporting coal to plant site and also

transported by road.

Support fuel Light Diesel Oil (LDO) will be used only for cold start and Heavy Fuel

Oil (HFO) will be used as support fuel at low loads and for flame stabilization.




2.4.2.2 Fuel Quantity

Maximum total annual coal consumption for the 4X300 MW power plant will be

about 6.02 MTPA. This quantity has been arrived based on consumption of

proposed coal consumption of design Gross Calorific Value (GCV) of 3850 kcal/kg.

Apart from coal, HFO/LDO will be used as auxiliary fuel. The estimated annual

requirement of HFO/LDO is about 8000 KL.

2.4.2.3 Fuel Quality

The percentage by weight proximate analysis of coal considered for the project is

given in Table-2.3. Similarly, the characteristics of HFO and LDO to be used in

the project are given in Table-2.4.

TABLE-2.3

PROXIMATE ANALYSIS OF COAL CONSIDERED

Sr.

No.

Parameter Design Quality Worst Quality

1 GCV, Kcal/kg 3850 3200

2 Ash, % 41.0 46.5

3 Volatile matter, % 22.5 20.0

4 Fixed carbon, % 25.5 20.5

5 Moisture, % 11.0 13.0

6 Carbon,% 25.5 20.5

7 Hydrogen,% 2.6 2.2

8 Nitrogen,% 4.9 4.0

9 Sulphur, % 0.35 0.4

TABLE-2.4

TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF HEAVY FUEL OIL (HFO)

Sr. No. Parameter Characteristics

(IS–1953, Grade HV)

1 Total Sulphur content 4.5% (Max)

2 Gross Calorific Value About 11,000

3 Flash Point (Min) 66 Deg C

4 Ash Content by weight (Max) 0.1%

5 Pour Point (Max) 24 oC (Max)

6 Specific heat (kCal/kg. oC) 0.5

TABLE-2.4 (A)

TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LIGHT DIESEL OIL (LDO)

Sr. No. Parameter Characteristics

1 Pour point 12oC & 18 oC for summer

and Winter

2 Kinematic viscosity 38 oC 2.5 to 15.7

3 Water content, % by volume 0.25

4 Total sulfur by mass (max) 1.8

5 Ash (%by mass) Max 0.02

6 Flash point (min) 66 oC




2.4.2.4 Fuel Transportation

The coal from SECL mines will be delivered by rail network up to Robertson

railway station which is about 2.4-km from the project site and Bhupdeopur

railway station is about 5.9-km. Further movement of coal from this railway

station up to the plant site will be by dedicated railway line for a 5-km distance.

Coal from captive mines of SKS will be transported by road to the plant site.

2.4.3 Water Requirement

The total water requirement of entire project will be 4500 m3/hr. This water shall

be made available from Mahanadi river at about 30-km from site. The water

requirement of the project is given in Table-2.5 and water balance is shown in

Figure-2.2.

TABLE-2.5

WATER REQUIREMENT OF POWER PLANT

All Values are given in m3/hr Sr. No. Units Water

Requirement

1 Condenser cooling water make-up 3185

2 a. Heat cycle make-up

b. Make-up requirement for closed circuit cooling system

c. TG stator cooling

d. Chemical feed system e. Condensate polishing unit

120

8 8

8

8

(Condensing Design margin & contingency of 5%) 152+8=160

3 a. Portable water Requirement

b. Filtration plant Back-wash

300

10

4 a. Air conditioning system make-up

b. Plant washing

c. Service water d. Seal water for ash handling system

e. IBD quenching

f. CW for clinker grinder

150

55

40 75

200

75

5 Clarifier blow down 177

Total 4427

Evaporation losses 41

Total consumptive water requirement 4468

approximately

(4500 )

Source: M/s SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited

Mahanadi river is a perennial river with a huge catchment area. The state

government has already given permission to draw 35 Million Cubic Meters (35-

MCM) per annum of water to meet the requirement of 1200 MW from the

Mahanadi river. Adequate water is available throughout the year for the total

water requirement to meet the consumptive needs. Copy of Government order on

water allotment is enclosed as Annexure-III.




C.S.T

2 Nos.

CAP.EACH1000 m3

(2X100% SG FILL)

3X50% (TYP.FOR EACH UNIT)

H/W M/W UNIT#1

H/W M/W UNIT#2

2X100% (TYP)

POTABLE WATER PUMPS

F.W OH

75m3 PLANT(20 Cu. M/Hr)

COLONY (280 Cu.M/Hr)180

60

11280470

3x50%D.M.F A.C.F

3x50% 3x50%D.M.P

11100462.5

60384

3840160

3840160

3x50%

EACH:50 M3/Hr.2X100%

TO REGENERATION

D.M.W

S.T2X1000m3

NEUTRALISING PIT

2 COMPARTMENTSTOTAL:750 Cu.M

180

3x50%SUPPLY PUMPS

SSF DRAINS

ETP CLARIFIER SLUDGE

SP/THICKNER/

CENTRIFUGE

4250

4427106240

CLARIFIER2 Nos.

2400 m3/Hr.(EACH)

PLANT MAKE-UPWATER PUMPS3 nos.(2W+1SB)RAW WATER

STORAGERESERVIOR

1.0Milion Cu.m

4468107240

1000

4250101990

47011280CLARIFIED WATER STORAGE TANK

16500 Cu.M(WITH A DEAD STORAGE

OF 3095 m3 FOR FPS)

D.M.CLARIFIED

WATER STORAGE TANK

1500 Cu.M

FROM UNIT # 4

FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

FROM UNIT # 1

E+D=654E+D=654E+D=654E+D=654

NDCT-4 NDCT-3 NDCT-2 NDCT-1

CW M/U

316576430

CONDENSER36100

38800

CWPHCCW PUMPS

2 X 100%2700 m3/hrPER UNIT

TOTAL 8 Nos.

TOTAL 10 Nos.2X50% COMMON S/B

2X50% PER UNITCW PUMPS

+

2700

UNIT #138800

FOR UNIT#2

FOR UNIT#3

FOR UNIT#4

38800

38800

UNIT #1PHE

2 X 50%

FOR UNIT#2

FOR UNIT#3

FOR UNIT#4

IBD QUENCHING

HVAC M/U

CW FOR CLINKER

GRINDERS

PLANT WASHING& GRINDING

SEAL WATER FOR BA & FA

DISPOSAL SLURRY PUMPS

OTHER SERVICES

BACKWASH WASTES TOSLUDGE PIT

14280595

4800200

3600150

180075

132055

180075

96040

1550

S.S.F10X150m3/Hr

S.WO.HTANK

CAP:750m3

S.W PUMPS2X100%

EACH:200m3/Hr.

INTAKE PUMP HOUSE INTAKE WATER PUMPS

3 X 50% (Electric driven pumps)1 x 25% (diesel driven pump)

REF.NOT 4

2X100%EACH: 50 Cu.M/Hr. REF.NOT 2

TO ASH DISPOSAL AREA 2X100%PUMPS

GARDENING

SERVICE WATER,

GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

RECOVERED WATER FROMCENRIFUGE

C.M.BCAP:Min.2500 Cu.M

TO ASHPOND

S.G B/D FROM

2 UNITS

REF.NOT 2

TO ASH DISPOSAL AREA

2X100%SUPPLY PUMPS

E.T.P

CLARIFIER+

O.W.S

TOSLUDGE PIT

COLLECTION

SUMP

EXCESS

B/D TANKB/D #1

126

CHS AHS

PLANT WASH

TRANSFORMERYARD DRAINS

COAL PILERUN OFF

RECOVEREDASH WATER

SG AUXILIARIES

TG AUXILIARIES

AIR COMPRESSORS

ASH HANDLING

STSTEM

CEP DISCHARGE,

HOTWELL &

BFP PUMPS

ACW OHT1 No.

CAP.,EACH:

15 m3

3 X50%

ACW BOOSTER PUMPS

TO C.M.B

m3/hr

m3/day

NOTE

1.ALL FLOW CAPACITIES INDICATED ON FLOW LINES IN m3/hr.

2.THIS OPTION SHALL BE ADOPTED IN CASE QUALITY IS UNSUITABLE FOR REUSE.

3.CLARIFIED WATER TANK SHALL BE ABOVE GROUND,SO THAT CW MAKE-UP

FLOW IS BY GRAVITY.

4.ZERO DISCHARGE CONCEPT WITH SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT SHALL BE ADOPTED.

E

DE MINERALISEDCLARIFIERWATER STORAGE TANK

DUAL MEDIA FILTER

FILTER WATER OVERHEAD TANK ACTIVATED CARBON FILTERDEMINERALISATION PLANTDE MINERALISED WATER

CONDENSATE STORAGE TANKSTEAM GENERATORHOT WELLMAKE UPSIDE STREAM FILTERATIONEFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANTSLUDGE PITSERVICE WATEROVER HEADCLARIFIED WATERNATURAL DRAFT COOLING TOWERBLOW DOWNFIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMCOAL HANDLING SYSTEMASH HANDLING SYSTEMOILY WATER SEPRERATORAUXILLARY COOLING WATERTURBINE GENERATORPLATE HEAT EXCHANGERHEATING VENTILATION & AIR

BOTTOM ASH

STORAGE TANK

CONDITIONING

D.MCLRW.S.

D.M.F

F.W.O.HA.C.FD.M.PD.M.W.S.T

C.S.TS.GH/W M/U SSFETP S.P S.W O.H C.W NDCT B/D FPS CHS AHS OWS ACW T.G P.H.E HAVE

BA

LEGEND

MAHANADI RIVER

FIGURE-2.2

WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM




2.4.4 Manpower

The proposed power plant will require 400 skilled and semi-skilled personnel

during operation, maintenance and administration of the proposed plant of 4X300

MW. People from neighbouring villages, if found suitable, shall be employed

during construction and operational phases. The total manpower of power plant

during operational period is estimated to be about 400 persons.

2.4.5 Township

It is estimated that about 70% of the total employees would be provided with

residential accommodation in the township of the station. It is therefore, proposed

to build residential quarters for a total of 400 employees. The township will

include the residential quarters (type A,B,C,D), one project hostel, guest house,

recreation facilities, health centre, shopping facilities, open air theatre, bank and

post office.

2.4.6 Transport Facilities

The nearest State Highway is at a distance of 1.7-km distance by road and the

nearest railway station (Robertson RS) is at about 2.4-km and Bhupdeopur

railway station is about 5.9-km from the site. Coal will be received at the site by

belt conveyor/dedicated railway line.

2.4.7 Health and Sanitation

To ensure optimum hygienic conditions in the plant area, proper drainage

network will be provided to avoid water logging and outflow. Adequate health

related measures and a well equipped safety and environment department will be

provided to ensure clean and healthy environment.

2.5 Utilities for the Proposed Plant Operations

In the proposed plant, various utilities will be provided for the smooth and

efficient functioning of the plant. The proposed utilities are discussed in

subsequent sections. The process flow of the plant is given in Figure-2.3.

2.5.1 Coal Handling System

It is proposed that coal handling plant may be designed for single unit i.e. 4 X

300 MW requirements. Coal may be received from the railway transportation, and

unloaded using track hoppers. Captive coal will be stored in the coal storage yard

for 15 days requirement. The coal handling plant capacity is envisaged as 1900

TPH considering the worst coal.

2.5.2 Fuel Oil System

The Fuel oil system will be provided for:




a) Boiler start-up; and

b) Flame stabilization during low load operation with or without coal firing.

Two types of fuel oils are envisaged for use in the proposed power plant: (a) Light

Diesel Oil (LDO) and (b) Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO) for low load operation and flame

stabilization, as necessary.

Two tanks (2X1000 KL) are envisaged to receive and store the unloaded HFO in

the plant site. Similarly for LDO storage, two storage tanks (1X500 KL) will be

installed. For each phase, there would be 2x100% numbers of HFO and LDO

unloading, transfer and forwarding pumps. Pressurizing and heating units for

supplying both HFO and LDO tanks will be provided.

2.5.3 Steam Generator Units

The steam generators (SG) will be designed for firing 100% coal and shall be

natural circulation drum type. The SG shall be tangentially fired, sub-critical,

balanced draft, single drum, single reheat, controlled circulation dry bottom, top

supported, and of two pass design. The main fuel is domestic coal with Light

Diesel oil (LDO) and Heavy Furnace oil (HFO) as start-up and oil support for low

load operation. The steam generator shall be suitable for continuous operation

with entire range of coal firing without oil support down to 40% of Boiler

Maximum Continuous Rating (BMCR). The steam generator shall also be capable

of firing Indian coal blended with 20-30% of imported coal. The furnace design

and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of internationally

accepted ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel codes and in conformity with Indian

Boiler Regulation (IBR) requirement.

2.5.4 Steam Turbine Unit

The steam turbine will be multi-stage, multi cylinder, tandem compound, single

reheat, and condensing design directly coupled with the generator and suitable

for indoor installation. The plant would be designed to operate as a base load

station. The turbine design will cover adequate provision for quick start-up and

loading for the units to full load at a fast rate. Apart from constant pressure

operation, the turbine will also have the facility for sliding pressure operation.

The steam turbine will consist of three cylinders, high pressure turbine (HP),

Intermediate pressure turbine (IP) and double flow low pressure turbine (LP).

2.5.5 Condenser

The supply would be complete with divided flow, double –pass, horizontal, surface

type, water cooled condenser with closed cycle circulating clarified water system.

Condenser unit would be transverse mounted and would condense exhaust

steam by circulation of cooling water (inlet design temperature of 32 oC) in a

recirculating cooling water system using cooling towers. Necessary air evacuation

system will be provided. The condenser would be provided with 2 X 100%

capacity vacuum pumps or steam jet air ejectors to remove non-condensable

gases and maintain vacuum in the condenser at the desired level.




2.5.6 Boiler Feed Pumps

3X50% capacity electric motor driven boiler feed pumps of centrifugal, multi-

stage, horizontal, barrel type construction. Each boiler feed pump will have one

(1) matching capacity single stage booster pump driven by the feed pump motor.

The booster pump will take suction from feed water storage tank and discharge

into the suction of the corresponding main feed pump, which in turn, will supply

feed water to respective boiler, through the high pressure heaters and the feed

water control station.

2.5.7 Condenser Feed Pumps

2x100% capacity pumps shall be provided for each unit. The pumps would be

vertical condensate extraction pumps of CAN-type construction. The pumps will

discharge through check valves and motor operated stop valves into a common

discharge header.

2.5.8 De-aerator and Regenerative Feed Heating System

The regenerative feed heating system would comprise vertical or horizontal shell

and tube type high pressure feed water heaters with by pass arrangement. Three

(3) or four (4) stage low pressure heaters equipped with drain cooling and

condensing zones and individual bypass system is envisaged. Besides these,

separate drain cooler, gland steam condenser, horizontal spray or spray-cum-tray

type deaerator with integral vent condenser to limit oxygen of 0.005 ppm at all

operating conditions with minimum loss of steam are envisaged. The storage tank

should be adequately sized to accommodate at least 7 min water requirement to

provide feed water to respective boiler at the BMCR condition. All steel

construction of condensate/ feed water wetted surfaces is desired to facilitate

uniform chemical conditioning of steam- condensate-feed water system.

2.5.9 Electrostatic Precipitators and Stack

The steam generating units will be provided with an electrostatic precipitator

(ESP). ESP would have two parallel flue gas paths, any of which can be isolated

for maintenance when required, keeping the other paths in operation. Each path

will comprise the required number of fields in series for collection of fly ash. The

overall efficiency of ESP would be 99.8% to 99.9%. ESP would be provided with

adequate umber of ash hoppers provided with electric heaters. The control of ESP

would be based on microprocessor using semi-pulse device. The design of ESP

will be such that the outlet dust burden does not exceed 50 mg/Nm3 at 100%

MCR with worst coal.

The plant will construct 275-m high multi-flue stack which is expected to bring

down the ground level concentration of SO2 based on 24-hourly average to a

minimum. Concrete twin flue stacks for the steam generating units have been

proposed. Chimney height has been considered following the guidelines of MoEF

and Central Pollution Control Board.




FIGURE 2.3

TYPICAL PROCESS FLOW SCHEME FOR PROPOSED THERMAL POWER PLANT

ID FAN

FD FAN

HP HEATERS

MAKE-

UP

WATER

CHEMICAL DOSING

CONDENSER

ELECTRICITY

AIR

TURBINE

LP

HEATERS

COOLING TOWER

GENERATOR

DEAERATOR

OIL

Coal

Compressed

Air

WATER

TREATMENT

PLANT

ACW SYSTEM

WATER FROM

BOILER

STACK

HOT WELL

FILTER

BACKWASH




2.5.10 Ash Handling System

The ash handling system will be designed to collect, transport and dispose bottom

ash, economizer ash, air pre heater and fly ash from ESP hoppers.

The quantum of ash generation would depend on the plant load factor and the

quality of coal being fed. Considering average ash content of 41% in the ash

received coal the four units will generate about 300 TPH of ash at MCR condition.

Out of this, ash 80% would be fly ash and 20% would be Bottom ash. The Bottom

ash and fly ash handling plant will be designed accordingly.

Fly ash shall be handled only in dry form. The bottom ash will be handled in wet

form and disposed off as slurry in ash disposal area.

Fly Ash System

Fly ash collected in the ESP hoppers will be extracted in dry form by vacuum

system to buffer hoppers. Suitable number of streams with adequate capacity will

be provided. For conveying ash from buffer hoppers to silos, pressurized

conveying system using compressors will be adopted. Dust separator will be

provided on each buffer hopper. A vent filter will be mounted on the silo to

reduce the environmental pollution.

Ash silos to store the fly ash expected to be generated in a period of 24 hours will

be provided. From these silos, ash would be dispatched to users through closed

road tankers. In case of exigencies, the ash will be conditioned and transported

by trucks to the ash disposal area for dumping.

Bottom Ash System

The Bottom ash will be collected in the water impounded, refractory lined furnace

hopper as bottom ash. The bottom ash hopper will have a capacity to store about

eight hour’s collection of bottom ash. The hopper will be of ‘W’ shape. Each ‘V’

shape compartment will have two (2) out let opening at the bottom. One (1)

opening of each compartment will be normally used for removing ash and other

will be standby. At each opening one (1) feed gate along with single/double roll

type clinker grinder and jet pump will be mounted to crush the ash clinkers(-)

25mm size and convey the same to the slurry sump. Fly ash from economizer

hoppers are also conveyed to bottom ash hopper and same will be handled as a

part of this system.

Ash slurry will be pumped from the ash slurry sump to the ash pond in each shift.

Horizontal centrifugal pumps will be provided for this purpose.

The water from the ash pond will be clarified, and pumped to the ash water tank

in the plant area for further utilization in the ash handling plant and secondary

usage.




2.5.11 Ash Disposal System

Two (2) numbers of ash silos and four (4) number of fly ash silos have been

considered for the 4X300 MW power plant unit. Each silo of bottom ash and fly

ash will be provided with two unloaders for truck, one feeder to mixing tank and

will have 24 hours ash storage capacity. Ash from silos will be transported to

mixing tank, which will be further transported to ash disposal area by Lean Slurry

Disposal system.

Considering height of 15m, area required for ash disposal for 10 years is around

310-acres ash management plan in ash dump area will be drawn to ensure proper

disposal after providing necessary precaution.

Fly ash being a product of high temperature has pozzolonic property and forms

cementous material when mixed with lime and water. Fly ash may be used for:

� Building blocks;

� Light weight aggregates;

� Partial cement replacement;

� Road sub-base;

� Grouting material;

� Filler in asphalt mix for roads;

� Partial replacement of lime aggregate in concrete work;

� Road embankment; and

� Land filling material.

2.6 Other Plant Facilities

2.6.1 Raw Water System

The consumptive water requirement of the plant will be made available from

Mahanadi river. Intake water pumps will be installed in the Mahanadi river for

meeting plant water requirement. This intake water will be clarified and used for

make-up water for the DM water for power cycle (Boiler water make up), cooling

water for steam condenser, cooling water for electrical and mechanical main and

auxiliary equipment such as generators, transformers, large motors, compressors

and other heat exchangers through a closed circuit auxiliary cooling water

system, hydrogen cooler, BFP, ash disposal plant, fire fighting, air conditioning,

ventilation and portable water for plant.

The raw water make-up requirement for the proposed power plant would be

about 108000-m3/day (35 Million Cu.M per annum). The requirement of water

shall be made available from Mahanadi river at about 30-km from site. Intake

water pumps will be installed in the Mahanadi river meeting plant requirement.

Raw water storage will be provided inside the plant area. This reservoir will be

lined, having a storage capacity of 30 days of final water requirement for the

power station.




2.6.2 Raw Water Treatment

Raw water received from the river will be duly clarified in raw water clarifier of

suitable capacity. Aerators will be installed upstream of each clarifier to remove

dissolved gasses in the raw water.

Plant water treatment would essentially consists of:

� Clarifier;

� Pre-treatment plant (filtration plant); and

� Demineralisation plant.

DM Plant Feed Pumps and Potable Water Supply Pumps will supply the water

through their respective pressure filtration system for further use. The potable

water will be pumped to the over head tanks and from these tanks potable water

will be distributed by gravity to the consumer points. Water will be chlorinated

before storing in the tanks.

2.6.3 Cooling System for Water

Natural draft cooling towers have been proposed for thermal power plant. The

towers shall be suitably located away from electrical installations and major

structures and are laid along prevailing wind direction to ensure minimum

recirculation and ingress of drift to other areas. The cooling water will have

multiple cells with film type fill material.

2.6.4 Equipment Cooling Water (ECW) System

The ECW system meets the cooling water requirements of all the auxiliary

equipment of the TG and SG units such as turbine lube oil coolers, seal oil

coolers, stator water coolers, BFP auxiliaries such as lube and working oil

coolers, seal water coolers, drive motors and sample coolers.

A closed loop system using passivated DM water is proposed for the ECW system

as defined in the scheme. The hot water from these auxiliaries is cooled in the

plate type heat exchangers by clarified water. Clarified water for this purpose

shall be supplied by Auxilary Cooling Water (ACW) pumps.

2.6.5 Water Treatment Plant

The water treatment plant broadly consists of pre-treatment plant, filtration and

followed by a DM (Demineralisation) plant with mixed bed units which will provide

DM water to meet steam generator make-up and ECW system make-up.

2.6.6 Demineralisation Plant & Heat Cycle Make-up System

Assuming average 3% make-up for the heat cycle and accounting for six hours

regeneration time, three (3) demineralising chains of about 160 m3/hr capacity.

In the DM plant, the water would be first filtered through pressure filters and

activated carbon filter units, all installed within the DM plant building. Filtered




water will pass through cation resin beds, demineralised water, anion resin beds

and mixed bed exchangers and the demineralised water will be stored in DM

water storage tanks. The acid and alkali handling system will be suitably provided

for the proposed new DM plant.

2.6.7 Chemical Feed System & Chemical Dosing system

Chemical feed system will be provided for feeding with tri sodium phosphate in

the boiler drum and neutralizing amines and/or hydrazine. In the condenser

pump discharge/ boiler feed suction line to maintain the chemical concentration in

the drum water and feed water within permissible limits for trouble-free operation

of the plant.

In circulating cooling water system shock chlorination alternatively sodium

hypochlorite dosing would be provided to contain algae growth. Dosing of proven

corrosion and scale inhibitor chemicals, acid dosing system shall also be provided

for cooling water treatment. Continuous chlorination will be required for the

potable water system.

The low pressure chemical dosing system will consist of:

� A mixing tank provided with stirrer and a metering tank;

� Two (2) full capacity, variable volume metering pumps, complete with suction

filters and other accessories and fittings as necessary. These L.P. Pumps will

inject hydrazine or other chemicals into the condensate pump discharge/boiler

feed suction continuously at an automatically regulated rate. Normally, one

pump will be running and the other will be on standby duty; and

� Necessary piping, valves, fittings and instruments and controls.

The high pressure chemical Dosing System will consist of:

� A mixing tank provided with stirrer and metering tank; and

� Two (2) full capacity metering pumps will be provided for injecting tri sodium

phosphate to the boiler. One pump will be in operation, while the other will be

a standby.

2.6.8 Compressed Air System

Five (5) instrument air compressors are envisaged for 4X300 MW unit to take

care of continuous and intermittent demand. The capacity of each instrument air

compressor is 30 Nm3/min, at 8.0 Kg/cm2 (g) pressure. The instrument air

compressors will be oil free screw type, and will be provided with individual air

compressors with oil free screw type, and will be provided with individual air

receivers to absorb pressure pulsations and for acting as reserve supply of

compressed air to permit continued operation following failure of the operating

compressor until the standby one is put into service. A desiccant type dryer unit

with 100% standby dryers, automatic regeneration facility will be provided for

supply of clean, dry air to instrument and control system.




2.6.9 Air Conditioning System

It is proposed to be air-conditioned for control room, control equipment room/

UPS room, ESP control rooms, coal handling system control room, DM plant

control room, office area, laboratory, lecture room, service building, and switch

yard control room.

2.6.10 Ventilation System

2.6.10.1 Power House Building

Supply/exhaust ventilation system with evaporative cooling has been

recommended for the powerhouse building.

2.6.10.2 ESP Control Building (Expect Control Room) & HP Control Room

For ventilation of these buildings, ambient air will be drawn through unitary air

filtration unit comprising fresh air intake louver, dry type filter and spry nozzle

and supplied to the space by means of centrifugal fans through ducting, grills etc.

2.6.10.3 Other Buildings

Other buildings like air compressor room, A/C plant room, CW pump house, coal

handling plant, DM plant etc will be ventilated by means of dry system comprising

axial flow fans, dry filter wherever required, cowls, ducting etc. Inside dry bulb

temperature is expected to be higher than ambient by about 50C. Fire dampers

will be provided as per code wherever there is electrical installation.

2.6.11 Fire Protection System

For protection of the plant against fire, all yards and plant will be protected by

any one or a combination of the following systems:

• Hydrant System;

• Automatic high velocity and medium velocity sprinkler system;

• Water spray (emulsifier system);

• Foam system;

• Portable and mobile chemical extinguishers; and

• Auto modular CO2 system.

The system will be designed as per the recommendation of Tariff Advisory

Committee (TAC) of the Insurance Association of India. Applicable codes and

standards of National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA), USA would also be

followed.

Fire detection & alarm system complete would be provided for efficient, safe and

trouble free operation of plant. Areas for fire Alarm detection will include main

control room, local control rooms, control equipment room, electrical equipment

rooms, cable cellar room, oil tank room, coal conveyers and coal stockpiles.




2.6.12 Power Evacuation System

Considering the station size, it is preferable to evacuate power at 400 kV level.

For evacuation of power generated from the station, it is envisaged to use the

PGCIL’s grid and CSEB’s grid. Two numbers of outgoing lines have been

considered from 400 kV switchyard to evacuate 30 % of power to state electricity

board. Balance power will be evacuated by two no.of outgoing lines to PGCIL’s

400 kV nearest substation. Four (4) numbers of outgoing lines have been

considered from the 400kV plant switchyard taking into view adequate

redundancy in number of line feeders to take care of an exigency conditions.

Power generated from the proposed TPP shall be sold to utilities/ customers on

short term basis. Interaction with PGCIL as well as State Grid authority shall be

necessary for finalizing the interconnection requirements and the evacuation

considered.

2.6.13 Instrumentation and Control System

The proposed plant instrumentation and control system for 4 X 300 MW Thermal

power plant has been envisaged for control and monitoring of all equipments of

the main plant, auxiliaries and offsite plants from the unit control room. The C & I

system shall provide control and monitoring of all major system and equipments

and related subsystems so that the status of all parameters of the plant is made

available to the Unit Control Room (UCR). The implementation of C&I system

shall be based on the state of the art Instrumentation and Distributed Control

System (DCS) with functional distribution and geographical distribution of inputs

and outputs for some sections of the plant at different locations for optimization

of the scope of cabling from the field of Electronic Equipment Room. Integration

of all major systems has been envisaged through software link.

The design of the control and monitoring system envisaged shall be based on the

following basic requirements.

� Complete operation and monitoring facility of the main plant, auxiliary

systems, offsite plants and electrical systems from unit control room with the

help of DCS and Human Machine Interface (HMI) through VDU and key board/

mouse based operator’s console;

� Software integration of different Control System of the plant with DCS;

� Energy Management for electrical systems;

� Online optimization, display and report generation of all relevant parameters

of the power plant in operator’s guidance mode. The system shall facility for

efficiency, performance evaluation of all major equipment of the power plant;

and

� Back up operation and Indications are envisaged for essential trip operations

of the power and electrical system from control desk, which will be located on

one side of operator’s control desk. Direct indications such as Boiler Drum




level etc. and any other emergency operation facility have been envisaged

from control desk.

2.7 Sources of Pollution

The various types of pollution from the proposed power plant are categorized

under the following types:

• Air pollution;

• Water pollution;

• Solid waste; and

• Noise pollution.

The major type of pollution from the power plant is gaseous emissions. In

addition, wastewater and solid waste will also be generated. The quantities and

the composition of the gaseous, liquid and solid waste that are likely to be

generated in the plant will be managed and treated such that their final disposal

into the environment meets all the statutory requirements and thus the

environmental impacts are minimized.

2.7.1 Air Emissions

The major pollutants emitted from the power plant stack will be SO2, NOx and

particulate matter. Proper control measures as described below will be installed to

minimize the stack emissions within the stipulated/permissible limits prescribed

by National Ambient Air Quality Standards.

• Suspended Particulate Matter

Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) is one of the important pollutants from the

proposed power plant. High efficiency (>99.9%) electrostatic precipitators are

proposed to be installed to limit the particulate matter emissions to below 50

mg/Nm3.

• Sulphur dioxide

The sulphur content in coal is about 0.4%. Two stacks multi flue of 275-m height

will be provided, as per CPCB/MoEF Norms, to disperse the gaseous emissions.

• Oxides of Nitrogen

To reduce the NOx emissions from the steam generator, all provisions in the

steam generator design and fuel firing system will be made. Necessary

confirmation from the boiler manufacturers regarding concentration from stack

will be less than 350 mg/Nm3 generation of NOx would be taken as a measure to

control production of this pollutant right at the source. The details of stacks and

emission rates are presented in Table-2.6. The emission rate calculations are

given in Annexure-IV.




• Thermal Pollution

Heat loss through the stack represents only about 8% to 10% of the total heat

input to the furnace. The quantum of heat so lost to the atmosphere is not

significant. It may further be noted that the area is subjected to moderate wind

speed and good rainfall.

The effect of tall chimneys, which are being installed primarily to take care of the

gaseous discharges, would also indirectly help in diffusing the thermal pollution.

Due to the high kinetic energy gained by the flue gases issuing from the stack,

the effective rise of the plume would ensure discharge of flue gas at a

considerably higher stratum ensuring dilution of the gas dispersed leaving the

local environment virtually unaffected.

TABLE-2.6

STACK DETAILS AND EMISSION RATES

Sr. No. Parameters Units Stack-I Stack-II

1 Stack Height m 275 275

2 No. of flues No. 2 2

3 Top diameter of each flue m. 7.0 7.0

4 Flue gas velocity in each flue m/s 25.0 25.0

5 Flue gas temperature oK 413 413

6 Flow rate of gas in each flue Nm3/s 694.3 694.3

7 Coal Consumption TPH 760.1 760.1

a Sulphur dioxide (SO2) emission rate (Based on 0.4 of Sulphur) in each flue

g/s/flue 422.3 422.3

b

Particulate matter (SPM) emission rate in

each flue

mg/Nm3 50 50

g/s/flue 34.7 34.7

c Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) g/s/flue 243.0 243.0

mg/Nm3 350 350

2.7.2 Liquid Waste Generation

Effluents will be generated from cooling tower blow down, wash water and

wastewater from sanitary facilities. Sanitary effluent will be treated in sewage

treatment plant. The cooling water blow down will be treated and reused in ash

conduction and disposal system and dust suppression system. Blow down from

cooling towers will be the main sources of the wastewater. Besides this, DM plant

waste, domestic waste from canteen and toilets will be the other wastes

generated. The cooling tower blowdown will be reused in dust suppression,

ash/coal handling, fly ash conditioning, ash disposal and service water. The

treated wastewater from Sewage & Effluent Treatment Plant will be used in

greenbelt development. The wastewater generated in the proposed project is

given in Table-2.7.




TABLE-2.7

WATER BALANCE OF THE PROPOSED POWER PLANT

All Values are given in m

3/hr

Sr. No

Units Requirement Loses/use Wastewater Generation

1 Cooling tower makeup 3185 3059 126

2 Domestic consumption -

colony

280 56 224

Domestic consumption - Plant

20 4 16

3 Service water/HVAC 190 150 40

4 Boiler make up 160 120 40

5 DM plant Regeneration 10 0 10

6 Contingency water 405 350 55

7 Loss in pre treatment / evaporation

218 41 177

Total 4468 3780 688

The generated wastewater to a maximum extent will be used for ash handling

plant, coal handling plant and green belt and the remaining net treated

wastewater will be sent for disposal. The disposal water will meet the general

standards of wastewater discharge.

Adequate storm drains will be constructed along the boundary of the plant area

and within the plant area to drain off the storm water during monsoon period.

2.7.3 Solid Waste Generation in Power Plant

Ash is the main solid waste generated in the coal based thermal power plant. The

primary fuel for the proposed power project would be coal from SECL fields,

having an ash content of about 41%. Considering this, about 2.47 MTPA and 1.98

MTPA of fly ash and bottom ash will be generated.

Major portion of the ash will be utilized by supplying to potential users. Efforts will

be made to utilize 100% fly ash as per the Fly Ash Notification, 1999 and as

amended later.

The ash which is not lifted by the potential user will be disposed off in the ash

dyke using dry system of fly ash collection. The fleet of bulkers/trucks will dump

the ash in the ash dyke. Water sprinklers will be provided at the ash dyke to

sprinkle water for suppression of dust generated. We are also envisaging for fly

ash fine grinding system to fine grind it and send to oversees market- ready mix

to cement.

2.7.4 Noise Pollution

The noise levels expected from various noise generating sources in the proposed

plant are given in Table-2.8.




TABLE-2.8

SOURCE NOISE LEVELS IN THE PROPOSED PLANT

Sr. No. Unit Expected Noise Level dB(A) [1m

away]

1 Turbine unit 80-85

2 Cooling tower 65-70

3 Air compressors 80-85

4 Transformer 70-75

5 Boilers 80-85

� Noise Control

Acoustic enclosures will be provided wherever required to control the noise level

below 85 dB(A). Anywhere not possible technically to meet the required noise

levels, personal protection equipment will be provided to the workers. The wide

greenbelt around the plant will work as green mufflers to attenuate the noise

level dissemination outside the plant boundary.

2.8 Mitigation Measures Proposed

2.8.1 Air Pollution Management

Fugitive and stack emissions from the power plant will contribute to increase in

concentrations of SPM, SO2 and NOx pollutants. The mitigative measures proposed

in the plant are:

• Installation of ESPs of >99.9% efficiency to limit the SPM concentrations below

50 mg/Nm3;

• Installation of Dry Low NOx (DLN) Burners to minimize the NOx generation from

the units with steam injection;

• Provision of 275-m high bi-flue stack for wider dispersion of gaseous emissions;

• Dust extraction/suppression system will be provided at transfer points of

conveyor system;

• Conveyor belt will be enclosed to prevent dust generation;

• Provision of water sprinkling system at material handling and storage yard;

• Asphalting of the roads within the plant area; and

• Developing of greenbelt around the plant to arrest the fugitive emissions.

2.8.2 Water Pollution Management

Wastewater generated from the power plant shall be sent to neutralisation pits, oil

water separators followed by guard ponds to neutralise and remove oil & grease to

limits prescribed by CPCB. Part of treated wastewater shall be reused for various

secondary usages and greenbelt development.

2.8.3 Noise Pollution Management

Provision of acoustic enclosures for noise generating equipments. Equipment will

conform to noise levels prescribed by regulatory authorities. Thick greenbelt to




attenuate the noise levels and provision of earplugs to the workers working in high

noise level area is proposed.

2.8.4 Solid Waste Management

Bottom ash would be collected and dumped in ash pond area in slurry form.

Unutilized fly ash will also be disposed off in designated ash disposal area in Lean

slurry disposal mode. Ash pond will also be provided with HDPE liner to prevent

leaching of contaminants to groundwater.

The used oil will be given to authorized recyclers approved by CECB/CPCB. The

organic portion of sludge generated in the Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) will be

used as manure in greenbelt development.


Chapter-3 Baseline Environmental Status


3.0 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS 3.1 Introduction

A regional background to the baseline data is being presented at the very outset, which will help in better appreciation of micro-level field data generated on several environmental and ecological attributes of the study. The physical environment consisting of geology, hydrogeology and water resources form the first section of this baseline chapter. The second part contains micro-meteorology, ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality and noise levels and field investigations of aquatic and terrestrial ecology in the study area generated from 1st March to 31st May 2008 representing pre-monsoon season. The third section is on land use pattern and socio-economic profile of the project site.

3.2 General Geology

The proposed power plant is located at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola villages in Kharsia tehsil of Raigarh district of Chhattisgarh state. General topography of the area around the plant site is plain with a general elevation of about 230-m aMSL.

The basin is an integral part of Gondwana super group (Mesozoic and Paleozoic) and Archaean group. The geological succession is presented below:

GEOLOGICAL SUCCESSION

Age Group Formation Alluvium/ Colluvium

Mesozoic Supra Barakars Sandstone & Shale Barakars Sandstone Shale

Clay stone & Coal Paleozoic

Gondwana Super Group

Talchir Sandstone, Shale, Pebbles & Boulder

3.2.1 Drainage Pattern and Surface Hydro-Geology

Mand river, is passing through 0.5-km away from the proposed plant site. The rivers of the region come under two distinct drainage systems; the Mahanadi and the Mand. Of these, it is the Mahanadi that really commands the drainage of this area, except the two rivers the Geor and the Kanhar which rising in the tablelands in the north flow northwards to join the Son river. The important rivers of the region are Mahanadi, Mand, Kelo, IB, Kanhar and Geor.

Mand river, is passing through the 0.5-km radius study area with respect to the plant site.Mahanadi river is at a distance of 30-km with respect to the plant site.




3.3 Meteorology

The meteorological data recorded during the study period is very useful for proper interpretation of the baseline information regarding proposed plant area and surrounding area for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters will also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of the region.

The year may broadly be divided into four seasons:

• Winter season : December to February • Pre-Monsoon season : March to May • Monsoon season : June to September • Post-Monsoon season : October to November

3.3.1 Methodology

The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS : 8829) and India Meteorological Department (IMD). On-site monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables in order to generate the site-specific data. Data was collected every hour continuously from 1st March to 31st May 2008 representing pre-monsoon season.

3.3.1.1Methodology of Data Generation

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring equipment was installed on top of a residential building at a height of 3.0 m above ground level to record wind speed, direction, relative humidity and temperature. The meteorological monitoring station was located in such a way that it is free from any obstructions and as per the guidelines specified under IS: 8829. Cloud cover was recorded by visual observation. Rainfall was monitored by rain gauge.

The continuous recording meteorological instrument of Dynalab, Pune (Model No.WDL1002) has been used for recording the met data. The sensitivity of the equipment is given in Table-3.3.1.

TABLE-3.3.1 SENSITIVITY OF METEOROLOGY MONITORING EQUIPMENT

Sr. No. Sensor Sensitivity

1 Wind Speed Sensor ± 0.02 m/s

2 Wind Direction Sensor ± 3 degrees

3 Temperature Sensor ± 0.2oC

3.3.1.2Sources of Information

Secondary information on meteorological conditions has been collected from the nearest IMD station at Raigarh. The available meteorological data of IMD, Raigarh has been collected for the period 1986-2001 and analyzed.




IMD data from Raigarh has been collected for pressure, temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind speed and direction. The data at IMD is usually measured twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hr.

3.3.2 Presentation of Data 3.3.2.1Meteorological Data Recorded at IMD, Raigarh

The data collected from IMD includes wind speed, wind direction (recorded in sixteen directions), temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure; rainfall and cloud cover over a period of 15 years from the year 1986-2001. The monthly maximum, minimum and average values are collected for all the parameters except wind speed and direction. All these parameters are recorded twice a day viz at 0830 and 1730 hours. The collected data is tabulated in Table-3.3.2.

1] Temperature The winter season starts from December and continues till the end of February. December and January are the coolest month with the mean daily maximum temperature in winter season is 31.60C (in the month of February) and the mean daily minimum temperature at 13.20C (in the month of January). Both the night and day temperatures increase rapidly during the onset of the pre-monsoon season from March to May. During pre-monsoon season, the mean maximum temperature (May) was observed to be 42.60C with the mean minimum temperature (March) at 20.40C. The mean maximum temperature in the monsoon season was observed to be 38.00C in the month of June whereas the mean minimum temperature was observed to be 24.50C in the month of September. By the end of August, the day temperatures increase slightly, with the mean maximum temperature at 32.40C in the month of October and the night temperature decreases with the mean minimum temperature at 17.10C in the month of November. The monthly variations of temperature are presented in Table-3.3.2.

2] Relative Humidity

The air is generally humid in this region during the monsoon season when the relative humidity at 0830 hr was observed to be 86.0%. Similarly, at 1730 hr, the relative humidity was observed to be of 78.0%. Generally, the weather during other seasons was observed to be dry. The monthly variations in the relative humidity are presented in Table-3.3.2.

TABLE-3.3.2 CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA

STATION: IMD, RAIGARH (1986-2001)

Atmospheric Pressure (mb)

Temperature (0C)

Relative Humidity (%)

Month

8:30 hr 17:30 hr Max Min 8:30 hr 17:30 hr

Rainfall (mm)

January 991.6 987.6 28.3 13.2 61 40 11.2

February 989.6 985.5 31.6 16.0 53 30 15.7

March 987.3 982.7 36.0 20.4 41 23 22.4




Atmospheric Pressure (mb)

Temperature (0C)

Relative Humidity (%)

Month

8:30 hr 17:30 hr Max Min 8:30 hr 17:30 hr

Rainfall (mm)

April 983.9 978.7 40.3 25.1 38 20 13.8

May 979.5 974.4 42.6 28.0 40 21 17.5

June 976.2 972.2 38.0 27.1 63 50 199.0

July 976.2 973.2 31.6 24.7 85 76 453.8

August 977.2 974.2 31.1 24.7 86 78 494.5

September 980.8 977.3 32.2 24.5 81 73 287.2

October 986.4 982.8 32.4 22.0 71 59 49.1

November 990.4 986.7 30.3 17.1 61 47 3.7

December 992.2 988.3 28.2 13.3 62 44 4.1

Total Rain fall 1602.3

3] Atmospheric Pressure

The maximum pressure observed were 992.2 mb at 0830 hr and 988.3 mb at 1730 hr, with the maximum pressure occurring during the winter season, in the month of December. The minimum pressure observed were 976.2 mb at 0830 and 972.2 mb at 1730, with the minimum pressure occurring during the month of June and July in the monsoon season. The average pressure level was found to be 984.3 mb at 0830 hr and 980.3 mb at 1730 hr. It can be seen from the data that not many variations are observed in the average atmospheric pressure levels. The pressure levels are found to be fairly consistent over the region. The monthly variations in the pressure levels are presented in Table-3.3.2.

4] Rainfall

The average annual rainfall based on the 15 year IMD data, was observed to be 1602.3 mm. The monsoon sets in the month of June and continues till September and sometime extends up to mid October. The maximum amount of rainfall (494.5mm) occurs in the month of August. The maximum number of rainy days was observed in the month of July. Monthly variations in the rainfall are given in Table-3.3.2.

5] Cloud Cover During the winter and the pre-monsoon seasons, it was observed that the skies were generally very clear. In the post-monsoon season, generally light clouds were observed in the evenings, with clear mornings. During the monsoon season, both in the mornings and evenings, the skies were found to be generally clouded.

6] Wind Speed/Direction

Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light and moderate particularly during the morning hours, while during the afternoon hours the winds were stronger. The season wise discussion of the respective wind pattern is given as below:




A) Wind Pattern during Pre-Monsoon Season 8:30 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE and SE directions followed by SW and NW directions (Figure-3.3.1).

17:30 Hours: A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NW and SW directions followed by NE and SE directions (Figure-3.3.1)

B) Wind Pattern during Monsoon Season

830 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from SW, SE and NE directions (Figure-3.3.2). 1730 Hours: A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from SW and SE and NW directions (Figure-3.3.2). C) Wind Pattern during Post-Monsoon Season 830 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE and SE directions (Figure-3.3.3).

1730 Hours: A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE and NW directions (Figure-3.3.3). D) Wind Pattern during Winter Season

830 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE and SE directions (Figure-3.3.4).

1730 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE and NW directions (Figure-3.3.4).




E) Annual Wind Pattern

0830 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE, SW and SE directions (Figure-3.3.5).

1730 Hours:

A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NW, SW and NE directions (Figure-3.3.5).

3.3.2.2 Meteorological Data Generated at Site The meteorological parameters have been recorded and are as follows:

TABLE-3.3.3 SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA MONITORED AT SITE

Temperature (0C) Relative Humidity (%) Month

Max Min Max Min

Rainfall (mm)

March-2008 37.6 21.3 41.3 29.9 Nil

April-2008 40.2 24.1 39.1 20.3 Nil

May-2008 42.0 28.5 40.3 24.6 Nil

1] Temperature

Maximum temperature of 42.0oC and minimum temperature of 21.30C was recorded during the study period. Maximum temperature was observed during May and the minimum temperature was observed during March of the study period.

2] Relative Humidity

During the period of observation, the Relative Humidity recorded ranged from 20.3% to 41.3%. Maximum humidity was observed during the month of March.

3] Rainfall

No rainfall was observed during the study period.

4] Cloud Cover

The clear skies were observed mostly during the study period.

5] Wind Speed/Direction

The wind rose for the study period representing pre-monsoon season is shown in Figure-3.3.6. A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds are mostly from NE (20.6%) followed by SW (18.6%) and NW (17.4%) direction. The winds in other directions are NNW (1.6%), N (1.8%), NNE (0.7%),ENE (2.8%),E (5.1%),ESE (2.0%),SE (6.3%),SSE (1.7%),S (4.6%),SSW (1.4%),WSW (2.9%),W (4.6%),WNW (1.7%) and Calm condition prevailed for 6.2% of the total time.




FIGURE-3.3.1 WIND ROSE-PRE-MONSOON (IMD- RAIGARH)




FIGURE-3.3.2 WIND ROSE-MONSOON (IMD- RAIGARH)




FIGURE-3.3.3 WIND ROSE-POST-MONSOON (IMD- RAIGARH)




FIGURE-3.3.4 WIND ROSE-WINTER (IMD- RAIGARH)




FIGURE-3.3.5

WIND ROSE-ANNUAL (IMD- RAIGARH)




FIGURE-3.3.6 SITE SPECIFIC WIND ROSE (PRE-MONSOON SEASON, 2008)




3.3.2.3 Comments

The India Meteorological Department (IMD) records the data at two times a day viz. 0830 hr and 1730 hr while the site specific data has been recorded at an hourly interval. On comparison of site specific data generated for study period vis-à-vis the IMD data, slight variations were found. The following observations are brought out:

• The temperature recorded on site when compared vis-à-vis the IMD data, slight

variations were found. The maximum and minimum temperatures recorded at site during study period were 42.0oC and 21.3 oC, whereas the maximum and minimum temperature recorded at IMD, Raigarh for the same season are 42.6oC and 20.3oC respectively;

• The relative humidity was observed to range from 20.3% to 41.3% during the study period whereas according to IMD Raigarh data the relative humidity was observed to range from 20.4% to 41%. The variation could be because of the fact that the RH values considered for the site are actual values while the range of IMD, Raigarh data represents the average values for 30 year period.

The data generated at continuous monitoring station at project site when compared with the data recorded at IMD, it can be observed that the data generated at the site is broadly compatible with regional meteorology, except minor variations as descried above.




3.4 Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10-km radius around the proposed plant site forms the baseline information. The various sources of air pollution in the region are industrial, traffic, urban and rural activities. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality during the plant operation. The study area represents mostly rural environment.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. The results of monitoring carried out during study period are presented in Annexure-V.

3.4.1 Methodology Adopted for Air Quality Survey 3.4.1.1 Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance programme has been based on the following considerations:

• Meteorological conditions on synoptic basis; • Topography of the study area; • Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;

and • Representatives of likely impact areas.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set-up at Twelve locations with due consideration to the above mentioned points. Table-3.4.1 gives the details of environmental setting around each monitoring station. The location of the selected stations with reference to the plant boundary is given in the same table and shown in Figure-3.4.1.

3.4.1.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per week at each location representing pre-monsoon season. The baseline data of air environment was generated for the following parameters:

• Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM); • Respirable Particulate Matter (RPM); • Sulphur dioxide (SO2); • Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx); • Carbon Monoxide (CO);and • Ozone (O3)




FIGURE-3.4.1 AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS




TABLE-3.4.1 DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS

Station Code

Name of the Station Distance from Plant Boundary (km)

Direction w.r.t. Plant Boundary

Environmental Setting

Remarks

AAQ1 Plant site - - Residential -

AAQ2 Near forest boundary (near Gindola village)

1.3 NE Residential Up wind

AAQ3 Gindola village 0.9 E Residential Cross wind

AAQ4 Naharpali village 2.2 SE Residential Down wind

AAQ5 Kurabhata village 1.9 SSE Residential Cross wind

AAQ6 Bade Jampali village 0.7 S Residential Down wind

AAQ7 Daramurra village 0.4 SW Residential Down wind

AAQ8 Near Chotta Dumarpali village

2.6 SW Residential Down wind

AAQ9 Pamgarh village 1.8 W Residential Cross wind

AAQ10 Jhintipalli village 0.7 NW Residential Up wind

AAQ11 Binjkot village 0.4 N Residential Up wind

AAQ12 Dengurchua village 3.7 NE Residential Up wind

3.4.1.3 Duration of Sampling

The duration of sampling of Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM), SO2,NOx and O3 was each twenty four hourly continuous sampling per day and CO was sampled for 8 hours continuous thrice in 24 hour duration monitoring. The monitoring was conducted for two days in a week for three months. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) (May 20, 1994).

The ambient air quality parameters along with their frequency of sampling are given in Table-3.4.2.

TABLE-3.4.2 MONITORED PARAMETERS AND FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING

Parameters Sampling Frequency

Suspended Particulate Matter 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months Respirable Particulate Matter 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24 hourly samples twice a week for Three months Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) 24 hourly samples twice a week for Three months Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hourly samples for 24 hour twice a week for Three

months Ozone ( O3) 24 hourly sample twice a week for Three months

3.4.1.4 Method of Analysis

The air samples were analyzed as per standard methods specified by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), IS: 5184 and American Public Health Association (APHA).

3.4.2 Instruments used for Sampling

Respirable Dust Samplers (APM-460 model) have been used for monitoring Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM), Respirable fraction (<10 microns) and




gaseous pollutants like SO2 and NOx. Pulse pump and mylar bags were used for collection of carbon monoxide. Gas Chromatography techniques have been used for the estimation of CO.

3.4.3 Instruments used for Analysis

The make and model of the instruments used for analysis of the samples collected during the field monitoring are given in Table-3.4.3.

TABLE-3.4.3 INSTRUMENTS USED FOR ANALYSIS OF SAMPLES

Sr. No. Instrument Name Parameters

1 Spectrophotometer SO2, NOx, O3

2 Electronic Balance TSPM, RPM 3 Gas Chromatograph

With FID, pFPD, ECD CO

3.4.4 Sampling and Analytical Techniques

The techniques used for ambient air quality monitoring and minimum detectable levels are given in Table-3.4.4.

TABLE-3.4.4 TECHNIQUES USED FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Sr. No.

Parameter Technique Technical Protocol Minimum Detectable

Limit (µµµµg/m3)

1 Total Suspended Particulate Matter

Respirable Dust Sampler (Gravimetric Method)

IS-5182 (Part-IV) 5.0

2 Respirable Particulate Matter

Respirable Dust Sampler (Gravimetric Method)

IS-5182 (Part-IV) 5.0

3 Sulphur dioxide Modified West and Gaeke Method

IS-5182 (Part-II) 4.0

4 Oxide of Nitrogen Jacob & Hochheiser Method IS-5182 (Part-VI) 4.0 5 Carbon Monoxide Gas Chromatography

Method IS-5182 (Part-X) 12.5

6 Ozone (O3) Spectro photo meter ASTM-D 5011-92 1.0

3.4.5 Details of the Sampling Locations

AAQ-1: Plant site The sampler was placed on top of building at about 3.0 m height from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents rural and residential area. AAQ-2: Near Forest boundary (near Gindola Village) The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 3.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location




represents up wind to the plant site and residential and rural activities prevail in the surroundings of monitoring location. AAQ-3: Gindola Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 4.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location falls in down wind direction and represents rural and residential area. AAQ-4: Naharpali Village

The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 4.5 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location falls in the down wind direction to the plant site, the location also represents rural and residential area. AAQ-5: Kurabhata Village

The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 3.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions, and the location falls in the cross wind direction to the plant site and representing rural and residential area. AAQ-6: Bade Jampali Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 2.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location is falls in the down wind direction, residential activities were observed surrounding the location. AAQ-7: Daramurra Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 3.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents cross wind direction to the proposed plant site. Residential activities prevail in the surrounding area. AAQ-8: Near Chotta Dumarpali Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 4.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents down wind direction to the proposed plant site. Residential and rural activities prevail in the surrounding area.

AAQ-9: Pamgarh Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 3.5 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents cross wind direction to the proposed plant site. Residential and rural activities prevail in the surrounding area.




AAQ-10: Jhintipali Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 3.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents up wind direction to the proposed plant site. Residential and rural activities prevail in the surrounding area. AAQ-11: Binjkot Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 4.0 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents up wind direction to the proposed plant site. Residential and rural activities prevail in the surrounding area. AAQ-12: Dengurchua Village The sampler was placed on top of a residential building at a height of about 3.5 m from the ground level and was free from any obstructions. This location represents up wind direction to the proposed plant site. Residential and rural activities prevail in the surrounding area.

3.4.6 Presentation of Primary Data

The summary of the results for the three months study period are presented in Table 3.4.5. Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, maximum and minimum values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring stations. The summary of these results for each location representing pre-monsoon season are presented in Table-3.4.5. These are compared with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for industrial and rural /residential zone.

3.4.6.1Observations of Primary Data The maximum and minimum concentrations for TSPM were recorded as 139.6µg/m3

and 44.4µg/m3 respectively. The maximum concentration was recorded at Kurabhata village (AAQ5) and the minimum concentration was recorded at Near forest boundary (AAQ2). The average concentrations were ranged between 66.4 to 111.9 µg/m3.

The maximum and minimum concentrations for RPM were recorded as 48.6 µg/m3 and 14.2 µg/m3 respectively. The maximum concentration was recorded at Kurabhata village (AAQ5) and the minimum concentration was recorded at Near forest boundary (AAQ2). The average values were observed to be in the range of 17.0 to 38.4 µg/m3. The maximum and minimum SO2 concentrations were recorded as 13.4µg/m3 and 5.0µg/m3. The maximum concentration was recorded at Kurubhata village (AAQ5) and the minimum concentration was recorded at proposed plant site (AAQ1). The average values were observed to be in the range of 7.1 to 11.1 µg/m3.




The maximum concentration of 15.6µg/m3 for NOx was recorded at Kurubhata village (AAQ5) and minimum of 6.1µg/m3 observed at proposed plant site (AAQ1). The average concentrations were ranged 8.7 to 12.0 µg/m3.

The maximum and minimum CO concentrations were recorded as 395µg/m3 and 171µg/m3. The average concentrations were ranged between 186.1 to 350.3 µg/m3.

The maximum and minimum Ozone concentrations were recorded as 3.6 µg/m3 and 1.2 µg/m3. The average concentrations were ranged between 1.9 to 2.6 µg/m3.




TABLE-3.4.5 SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS – PRE-MONSOON SEASON 2008

TSPM RPM SO2 Sr.No Location

Max Min Avg 98%tile Max Min Avg 98% tile

Max Min Avg 98% tile

AAQ1 Plant site 91.2 55.3 75.3 89.3 27.4 16.4 23.4 27.1 9.5 5.0 8.7 9.5


76.5 44.4 66.4 76.1 27.8 14.2 17.5 24.1 8.2 5.8 7.1 8.2

AAQ3 Gindola village 116.5 59.8 96.5 116.5 36.4 18.3 29.0 36.0 11.6 5.9 9.4 11.4

AAQ4 Naharpali village 129.8 75.6 106.1 129.2 42.3 35.6 38.4 41.8 12.2 8.6 10.2 12.2

AAQ5 Kurabhata village 139.6 81.4 111.9 134.4 48.6 21.3 29.0 40.7 13.4 6.5 8.5 13.0

AAQ6 Bade Jampali village 126.3 60.2 96.6 125.0 38.8 18.5 29.5 37.7 10.9 5.3 7.8 10.5

AAQ7 Daramurra village 92.4 51.3 80.4 91.3 29.5 15.4 23.4 29.0 9.3 5.4 7.5 9.2


120.0 59.7 99.5 119.9 37.9 16.7 28.5 36.7 10.9 6.6 8.3 10.9

AAQ9 Pamgarh village 113.5 72.6 95.4 112.0 33.3 20.1 27.5 32.8 9.3 5.2 7.8 9.3

AAQ10 Jhintipalli village 106.1 59.9 92.5 106.0 34.9 17.4 28.0 34.2 9.8 5.6 8.2 9.6

AAQ11 Binjkot village 105.6 54.5 83.5 103.8 33.6 17.7 25.3 32.0 8.1 5.8 7.3 8.1

AAQ12 Dengurchua village 103.5 60.4 83.4 99.4 29.8 16.6 22.9 28.1 8.9 5.1 6.4 8.6

Study Area Range 44.4-139.6 14.2-42.3 5.0-13.4




TABLE-3.4.5 (A) SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS – PRE-MONSOON SEASON 2008

NOx CO Sr. No. Location

Max Min Avg 98%tile Max Min Avg 98%tile

AAQ1 Plant site 12.6 6.1 11.0 12.5 319 210 290.7 317.0


9.9 6.4 8.7 9.8 255 171 186.1 240.8

AAQ3 Gindola village 14.9 7.2 12.0 14.7 302 263 282.9 298.5 AAQ4 Naharpali village 14.3 9.9 12.4 14.3 375 288 324.2 358.2 AAQ5 Kurabhata village 15.6 8.7 11.1 15.1 395 314 350.3 392.9 AAQ6 Bade Jampali village 13.8 6.9 9.8 13.2 345 275 305.3 337.8 AAQ7 Daramurra village 11.3 7.6 9.8 11.3 322 262 293.9 320.6


12.5 6.6 9.6 12.4 330 243 279.2 313.2

AAQ9 Pamgarh village 10.6 6.5 9.0 10.5 314 249 267.8 399.1 AAQ10 Jhintipalli village 12.4 6.5 9.6 12.0 332 215 261.7 322.4 AAQ11 Binjkot village 10.8 7.2 9.2 10.6 310 233 271.2 308.9 AAQ12 Dengurchua village 11.2 7.4 9.0 10.9 310 224 276.3 309.5 Study Area Range 6.1-15.6 171-395




3.5 Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of surface and ground water resources within 10 km radius of the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment and evaluate anticipated impact of the project. Understanding the water quality is essential in preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment and to identify critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for implementation.

The purpose of this study is to:

• Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters; • Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions,

recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and • Predict impact on water quality by this project and related activities.

The information required has been collected through primary surveys and secondary sources.

3.5.1 Methodology

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized based on:

• Drainage pattern; • Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact areas;

and • Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions. Three surface water and eight ground water sources covering 10-km radial distance were examined for physico-chemical, heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in order to assess the effect of industrial and other activities on surface and ground water. The samples were analyzed as per the procedures specified in 'Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater' published by American Public Health Association (APHA). Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO3. Samples for bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physico-chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for projecting the existing water quality status in the study area. Parameters like temperature, Dissolved Oxygen (DO) and pH were analyzed at the time of sample collection.

The methodology for sample collection and preservation techniques was followed as per the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) mentioned in Annexure-VI.




3.5.2 Water Sampling Locations

Water samples were collected from eleven locations. These samples were taken as grab samples and were analyzed for various parameters to compare with the standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500 for ground water sources and IS: 2296 (Class-C) for surface water sources. The water sampling locations are identified in Table-3.5.1 and shown in Figure-3.5.1.

TABLE-3.5.1

WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Sr. No.

Code Location Distance from Plant Boundary (km)


Surface Water 1 SW1 Mand river down stream

(near Kurubhata village) 2.3 SSE

2 SW2 Mand river up stream (near Sendripalee)

0.9 WNW

3 SW3 Kurket river (near Tendumuri village)

5.3 NNW

Ground Water

1 GW1 Kurubhata village 2.7 S 2 GW2 Sendripalee village 2.2 S 3 GW3 Jintipali village 0.7 NNW 4 GW4 Bade jampalee village 0.7 S 5 GW5 Gindola village 0.8 ESE 6 GW6 Nahardipa village 1.8 NW 7 GW7 Darra murra village 0.4 SW 8 GW8 Binjkot village 0.4 NE

3.5.3 Presentation of Results

The results of the water quality monitored during the study period representing pre-monsoon season are given in Table 3.5.2 to Table-3.5.3.

3.5.3.1Surface Water Quality

� The analysis results indicate that the pH values in the range of 7.4 to 7.6, the maximum value was observed at SW3, minimum value was observed at SW1 and which is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5.

� The TDS was observed in the range of 105 mg/l to 115 mg/l, the maximum

TDS value was observed at SW1, and where as minimum value was observed at SW3.

� DO was observed to be in the range of 5.2 to 5.8 mg/l respectively.

� The chlorides and Sulphates were found to be in the range of 18.4 to 35.5 mg/l

and 4.3 to 4.8 mg/l respectively. It is observed that chlorides and Sulphates are well within the permissible limits. It is evident from the above values that all the parameters are found to comply with the requirements of IS: 2296 specification of surface water. The surface water quality does not indicate any industrial contamination.




3.5.3.2 Ground Water Quality Most of the villages in the project area have hand pumps and wells, as most of the residents of these villages make use of this water for drinking and other domestic uses. Therefore 5 bore well samples and 3 open well water samples have been considered for sampling. � The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 7.3 to 7.7, which is

well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The maximum pH of 7.7 was observed at GW6 and the minimum pH of 7.3 was observed at GW1 and GW8.

� Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 163.3 to 364.8 mg/l. The

maximum hardness (364.8 mg/l) was recorded at GW5 and the minimum (163.3 mg/l) was recorded at GW3. The hardness was found to be above the prescribed limit of 300 mg/l at GW4 (327.7 mg/l), GW5 (364.8 mg/l) and GW7 (344.7 mg/l) respectively.

� Chlorides were found to be in the range of 28.4 mg/l to 127.6 mg/l, the

maximum concentration of chlorides (127.6 mg/l) was observed at GW1, and where as the minimum value of 28.4 mg/l was observed at GW3, respectively.

� Sulphates were found to be in the range of 14.5 mg/l to 254.2 mg/l. The

maximum value observed at GW7 (254.2 mg/l) where as the minimum value observed at GW3 (14.5 mg/l). The sulphates was found to be above the prescribed limits of IS:10500 at GW4 (217.7 mg/l),GW5(274.1 mg/l) and GW7 (254.2)

� The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) concentrations were found to be ranging in

between 276 to 1010 mg/l, the maximum TDS observed at GW5 (1010 mg/l) and minimum concentration of TDS observed at GW3 (276 mg/l). The TDS values were observed to be above the prescribed limits of IS:10500 at GW1 (623 mg/l),GW4 (713 mg/l),GW5 (1010 mg/l),GW6 (601 mg/l),GW7 (926 mg/l) and GW8 (613 mg/l).

The ground water quality in the study area does not indicate any industrial contamination.




FIGURE-3.5.1 WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS




TABLE-3.5.2 SURFACE WATER QUALITY

Sr. No

Parameters Unit IS: 2296 Class ‘C’ Limits

SW1 SW2 SW3

1 pH - 6.5 – 8.5 7.5 7.4 7.6 2 Colour Hazen 300 14 11 16 3 Conductivity µS/cm $ 163 160 170

4 TDS mg/l 1500 115 110 105 5 DO mg/l 4 min 5.2 5.6 5.8 6 BOD mg/l 3 <3 <3 <3 7 COD mg/l $ 5 5 10 8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l $ 59.6 60.6 62 9 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l $ 50 30 52 10 Calcium as Ca mg/l $ 15.6 15.6 16.8 11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l $ 4.7 5.0 4.8 12 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 600 21.3 35.5 18.4 13 Residual free Chlorine mg/l $ <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

14 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l $ 0.01 0.01 0.02 15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 400 4.3 4.8 4.5 16 Fluorides as F mg/l 1.5 0.2 0.2 0.2 17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 50 0.8 0.7 0.3 18 Sodium as Na mg/l $ 8.0 8.3 9.8 19 Potassium as K mg/l $ 4.1 4.2 3.9 20 Total Boron as B mg/l $ 0.04 0.05 0.03 21 Cyanides mg/l 0.05 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 22 Phenolic Compounds mg/l 0.005 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 23 Oil and Grease mg/l 0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 25 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 26 Copper as Cu mg/l 1.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 27 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 28 Iron as Fe mg/l 50 0.02 0.01 0.04 29 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l 0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 30 Selenium as Se mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 31 Zinc as Zn mg/l 15 0.08 0.04 0.02 32 Aluminium as Al mg/l $ <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 33 Mercury as Hg mg/l $ <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 34 SAR - - 0.46 0.47 0.54 35 Insecticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent 36 Anionic detergents as

MBAS mg/l 1 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

*Onsite results, $ Limits not specified, U O: Unobjectionable

SW1-Mand River down stream (near Kurubhata village) SW2-Mand River up stream (near Sendripalee)

SW3-Kurket River (near Tendumuri village)




TABLE-3.5.3 GROUND WATER QUALITY

Sr. No

Parameters Units IS: 10500 Limits

GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5

1 pH - 6.5 – 8.5 7.3 7.4 7.6 7.4 7.5 2 Colour Hazen 5 (25) 2 1 3 2 1 3 Taste - Agreeable A A A A A

4 Odour - U.O UO UO UO UO UO

5 Conductivity µS/cm $ 767 520 393 885 1140

6 Turbidity NTU 5 (10) 3 2 4 3 2 7 TDS mg/l 500 (2000) 623 411 276 713 1010 8 Total Hardness

as CaCO3 mg/l 300 (600) 299.1 190.5 163.3 327.7 364.8

9 Total Alkalnity mg/l 200 (600 ) 125 120 128 136 160 10 Calcium as Ca mg/l 75 (200) 84 63 44.8 92.3 110.8 11 Magnesium as

Mg mg/l 30 (100) 20.5 7.6 11.8 22.3 20.2

12 Residual Chlorine

mg/l 0.2 Min <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

13 Boron mg/l 1 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 14 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 250 (1000) 127.6 49.6 28.4 56.7 70.9 15 Sulphates as

SO4 mg/l 200 (400) 76.8 21.6 14.5 217.7 274.1

16 Fluorides as F mg/l 1.0 (1.5) 0.2 0.1 0.5 0.3 0.4 17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 45 (NR) 11.7 31.0 1.7 1.1 1.9 18 Sodium as Na mg/l $ 30.2 21.5 7.7 42.5 83.3 19 Potassium as K mg/l $ 25 0.2 0.1 4.5 11.2 20 Phenolic

Compounds mg/l 0.001 (0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

21 Cyanides mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02

22 Anionic Detergents

mg/l 0.2 (0.1) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2

23 Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01 (0.03) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

25 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

26 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05(1.5) <0.01 0.12 0.06 0.10 0.10 27 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.01 0.02 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 28 Manganese as

Mn mg/l 0.1(0.3) 0.21 0.01 0.02 <0.01 0.01

29 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3(1.0) 0.01 0.02 0.08 0.03 0.03 30 Chromium as

Cr+6 mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

31 Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 32 Zinc as Zn mg/l 5(15) 0.02 2.1 0.03 0.01 0.03 33 Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.03(0.2) 0.03 0.01 0.01 0.04 0.08

34 Mercury asHg mg/l 0.001(NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

35 Pesticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent 36 E.Coli - Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent 37 Total Coliforms MPN/10

0 ml 10 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2

*Onsite results, $ Limits not specified, U O: Unobjectionable GW1-Kurubhata village (bore well) GW5-Gindola village (bore well) GW2-Sendripalee village (bore well) GW6-Nahardipa village (bore well) GW3-Jintipali village (bore well) GW7-Darra murra village ( bore well) GW4-Bade jampali village (bore well) GW8-Binjkot village (bore well)




TABLE-3.5.3(A) GROUND WATER QUALITY

Sr. No

Parameters Units IS: 10500 Limits

GW6 GW7 GW8

1 pH - 6.5 – 8.5 7.7 7.6 7.3 2 Color Hazen 5 (25) 3 2 2 3 Taste - Agreeable A A A 4 Odor - U.O UO UO UO 5 Conductivity µS/cm $ 770 1028 720

6 Turbidity NTU 5 (10) 4 3 2 7 TDS mg/l 500 (2000) 601 926 613 8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 300 (600) 289.3 344.7 290.9 9 Total Alkalinity mg/l 200 (600 ) 130 130 192 10 Calcium as Ca mg/l 75 (200) 88.6 93 86.3 11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 30 (100) 15.6 25.8 17.3 12 Residual Chlorine mg/l 0.2 Min <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

13 Boron mg/l 1 0.02 0.01 0.03 14 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 250 (1000) 85.1 106.4 56.7 15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 200 (400) 97.1 254.2 88.3 16 Fluorides as F mg/l 1.0 (1.5) 0.3 0.4 0.4 17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 45 (NR) 5.3 1.6 0.3 18 Sodium as Na mg/l $ 42.1 76 45.3 19 Potassium as K mg/l $ 0.6 5.4 0.07 20 Phenolic Compounds mg/l 0.001 (0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 21 Cyanides mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 22 Anionic Detergents mg/l 0.2 (0.1) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 23 Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01 (0.03) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 24 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 25 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 26 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05(1.5) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 27 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 28 Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.1(0.3) 0.01 0.02 0.01 29 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3(1.0) 0.03 0.02 0.01 30 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 31 Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 32 Zinc as Zn mg/l 5(15) 0.02 0.05 0.01 33 Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.03(0.2) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 34 Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.001(NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 35 Pesticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent 36 E.Coli - Absent Absent Absent Absent 37 Total Coli forms MPN/10

0 ml 10 <2 <2 <2




3.6 Soil Characteristics

It is essential to determine the potential of soil in the area and identify the current impacts of urbanization and industrialization on soil quality and also predict impacts, which may arise due to the plant operations. Accordingly, a study of assessment of the baseline soil quality has been carried out.

3.6.1 Data Generation

For studying soil profile of the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the existing soil conditions in and around the project area representing various land use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were determined. The samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil up to a depth of 90 cm. The present study of the soil profile establishes the baseline characteristics and this will help in future in identifying the incremental concentrations if any, due to the operation of the plant. The sampling locations have been identified with the following objectives:

• To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area; • To determine the impact of industrialization on soil characteristics; and • To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural

productivity point of view.

Eight locations within 10-km radius of the proposed plant boundary were selected for soil sampling. At each location, soil samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below the surface and are homogenized. This is in line with IS: 2720 and Methods of Soil Analysis, Part-1, 2nd edition, 1986 of (American Society for Agronomy and Soil Science Society of America). The homogenized samples were analyzed for physical and chemical characteristics. The soil samples were collected during pre-monsoon season. The samples have been analyzed as per the established scientific methods for physico-chemical parameters. The heavy metals have been analyzed by using Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer and Inductive Coupled Plasma Analyzer.

The methodology adopted for each parameter is described in Table-3.6.1.

TABLE-3.6.1 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR SOIL ANALYSIS

Parameter Method (ASTM Number)

Grain size distribution Sieve analysis (D 422 – 63) Textural classification Chart developed by Public Roads Administration Bulk density Sand replacement, core cutter Sodium absorption ratio Flame colorimetric (D 1428-82) pH pH meter (D 1293-84) Electrical conductivity Conductivity meter (D 1125-82) Nitrogen Kjeldahl distillation (D 3590-84) Phosphorus Molybdenum blue, colorimetric (D 515-82) Potassium Flame photometric (D 1428-82) Copper AAS (D 1688-84) Iron AAS (D 1068-84) Zinc AAS (D 1691-84) Boron Surcumin, colorimetric (D 3082-79) Chlorides Argentometric (D 512-81 Rev 85)




The details of the sampling locations are given in Table-3.6.2 and are shown in Figure-3.6.1. The soil quality at all the locations during the study period is tabulated in Table-3.6.3. The results are compared with standard classification given in Table-3.6.4.

TABLE-3.6.2 DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Sr. No.

Location Present Land Use

Distance from Plant Boundary

(km)

Direction w.r.t Plant Boundary

S1 Sendripalee village Barren Land 2.2 S

S2 Jhintipali village Barren Land 0.7 NNW

S3 Gindola village Agriculture Land 0.9 E

S4 Plant site Barren Land - -

S5 Naharpali village Agriculture Land 2.2 SSE

S6 Kurubhata village Agriculture Land 1.9 SSE

S7 Bade jampale village Agriculture Land 0.7 S

S8 Darramurra village Barren Land 0.4 SW

3.6.2 Baseline Soil Status

� It has been observed that the pH of the soil in the study area ranged from 5.2 to 7.5 the maximum pH value of 7.5 was observed at Naharpali village (S5), where as the minimum value of 5.2 was observed at Jintipali Village (S2).

� The electrical conductivity was observed to be in the range of 72 µmhos/cm to

230 µmhos/cm, with the maximum observed at Kurubhata village (S6) with the minimum observed in Darramurra village (S8).

� The nitrogen values range between 49.3-191.4 kg/ha. The nitrogen content in

the study area falls in less to better category. � The phosphorus values range between 65.5 to 113.8 kg/ha, indicating that

the phosphorus content in the study area falls in average sufficient to more than Sufficient.

� The potassium values range between 164.4 – 386.8 kg/ha. The potassium

content in the study area falls in less to more than sufficient category.

� The chlorides were found to be in the range of 105.6– 174.4 mg/kg of soil.




FIGURE-3.6.1

SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS




TABLE-3.6.3 SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

Sr. No. Parameter UOM S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

1 pH (1:5 Aq.Extract) ---- 6.8 5.2 5.9 7.1 7.5 7.3 7.4 6.7

2 Condutivity (1:5Aq.Extract) µS/cm 80 90 135 150 145 230 75 72

3 Texture ---- Sandy clay Sandy clay Clay Clay Clay Sandy Clay Clay Sandy clay

4 Sand % 54 52 29 38 42 45 27 51

5 Silt % 11 10 15 10 11 15 18 14

6 Clay % 35 38 56 52 47 40 55 35

7 Bulk Density mg/cc 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.1

8 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca mg/kg 2716 1781 2433 3473 1435 2632 2283 2168

9 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg mg/kg 383 376 167 288 542 119 526 423

10 Exchangeable Sodium as Na mg/kg 82.7 88.1 54.9 79.9 105.7 71.7 93.0 63.4

11 Available Potassium as K Kg/ha 164.4 276.3 335.8 226.3 325.8 386.8 238.8 171.6

12 Available Phosphorous as P Kg/ha 86.2 94 106.0 65.5 88.5 81.6 113.8 96.6

13 Available Nitrogen as N Kg/ha 49.3 60.5 186.7 163.0 154.5 123.7 191.4 64.6

14 Organic Matter % 0.46 0.57 1.61 1.53 1.45 1.16 1.65 0.61

15 Organic Carbon % 0.27 0.33 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.67 0.95 0.35

16 Water Soluble Chloride as Cl mg/kg 140.5 137.4 174.4 141.0 141.3 138.9 105.6 140.3

17 Water Soluble Sulphate as SO4 mg/kg 138.7 101.9 53.6 57.7 112.2 206.6 166.5 72.2

18 Sodium Absorption Ratio ---- 0.18 0.22 0.13 0.16 0.27 0.17 0.21 0.15

19 Aluminum % 2.06 1.84 1.92 1.70 1.78 1.68 1.49 1.98

20 Total Iron % 0.92 0.75 1.02 0.69 0.88 0.75 1.02 0.82

21 Manganese mg/kg 136.8 142.6 128.4 119.6 162.4 192.8 146.3 162.4

22 Zinc mg/kg 142.9 116.4 102.6 112.6 126.8 121.6 142.8 112.4

23 Boron mg/kg 38.6 49.4 36.8 44.9 52.8 48.6 39.4 52.8




TABLE-3.6.4 STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Sr. No. Soil Test Classification

1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic 4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic 5.51-6.00 moderately acidic 6.01-6.50 slightly acidic 6.51-7.30 Neutral 7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline 7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline 8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline 9.01 very strongly alkaline

2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity (mmhos/cm) (1ppm = 640 mmho/cm)

Upto 1.00 Average 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination 2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts)

3 Organic Carbon (%) Upto 0.2: very less 0.21-0.4: less 0.41-0.5 medium, 0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient 0.81-1.00: sufficient >1.0 more than sufficient

4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Upto 50 very less 51-100 less 101-150 good 151-300 Better >300 sufficient

5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 15 very less 16-30 less 31-50 medium, 51-65 on an average sufficient 66-80 sufficient >80 more than sufficient

6 Potash (Kg/ha) 0 -120 very less 120-180 less 181-240 medium 241-300 average 301-360 better >360 more than sufficient

Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, ICAR, New Delhi 3.7 Noise Level Survey

The environmental assessment of noise from the industrial activity, construction activity and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and general community responses.

The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:

• Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is continuously varying in loudness;

• The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in

residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and




• The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which determines the loudness and period of exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The environmental impact assessment of noise from the plant operations and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and general community responses.

The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline noise levels, and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated by the construction and operation of the proposed plant facilities around it.

3.7.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major noise generating sources in the area. Noise at different noise generating sources has been identified based on the activities in the village area and ambient noise due to traffic. The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of ambient noise levels in the study area. The noise levels at each location were recorded for 24 hours. The environment setting of noise monitoring locations is given in Table-3.7.1 and shown in Figure-3.7.1.

3.7.2 Method of Monitoring

Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the locations covered in 10-km radius of the study area.

TABLE- 3.7.1

DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Location Code

Noise Sampling Location

Distance from Plant Boundary

(km)


Environmental Setting

N1 Proposed plant site - - -

N2 Binjkot village 0.4 NE Residential

N3 Bade Jampali village 0.7 S Residential

N4 Darramura village 0.4 SW Residential

N5 Gindola village 0.9 E Residential

N6 Kurubhata village 1.9 SSE Residential

N7 Nawapara village 2.2 SE Commercial

N8 Jhintipali village 0.7 NNW Residential

N9 Pamgarh village 1.8 WSW Residential

N10 Bhagoradih village

0.5 W Residential




3.7.3 Methodology of Data Generation 3.7.3.1 Instrument Used for Monitoring

Noise levels were measured using integrated sound level meter manufactured by Quest Technologies, USA (Model No.2900). The integrating sound level meter is an integrating/ logging type with Octave filter attachment (model OB-100) with frequency range of 31.5 to 16000 Hz. This instrument is capable of measuring the Sound Pressure Level (SPL), Leq and octave band frequency analysis.

3.7.3.2 Method of Monitoring

Noise level monitoring was carried out continuously for 24-hours with one hour interval starting at 6.00 hrs to 6.00 hrs next day. The noise levels were monitored on working days only and Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays were not monitored. During each hour, Leq were directly computed by the instrument based on the sound pressure levels. Lday (Ld), Lnight (Ln) and Ldn values were computed using corresponding hourly Leq of day and night respectively. Monitoring was carried out at ‘A’ response and fast mode.

3.7.3.3 Parameters Measured During Monitoring

For noise levels measured over a given period of time, it is possible to describe important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated using the percent of the time certain noise levels are exceeding the time interval. The notation for the statistical quantities of noise levels are described below: • L10 is the noise level exceeded 10 per cent of the time; • L50 is the noise level exceeded 50 per cent of the time; and • L90 is the noise level exceeded 90 per cent of the time.

Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (Leq):

The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same sound energy as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This is necessary because sound from noise source often fluctuates widely during a given period of time. This is calculated from the following equation:

60

)_LL(LL

29010

50eq +=

Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during day (6 am to 10 pm). Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during night (10 pm to 6 am). A noise rating developed by E P A for specification of community noise from all the sources is the Day-Night Sound Level, (Ldn).




FIGURE-3.7.1

NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS




Day-Night Sound Level (Ldn):

The noise rating developed for community noise from all sources is the Day-Night Sound Level (Ldn). It is similar to a 24-hr equivalent sound level except that during night time period (10 pm to 6 am) a 10 dB (A) weighting penalty is added to the instantaneous sound level before computing the 24-hr average. This night time penalty is added to account for the fact that the noise during night, when people are usually in sleep, is judged as more annoying than the same noise during the day time. The Ldn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly Leq’s, by the following equation.

)]}10(8+)10(16[24/1log{10=L 10/)10+L(10/Ldn

nd

Where Ld is the equivalent sound level during the day time (6 am to 10 pm) and Ln is the equivalent sound level during the night time (10 pm to 6 am).

3.7.4 Presentation of Results

The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at ten locations. The parameters are analyzed for L10, L50, L90, Leq, Lday, Lnight, and Ldn. The statistical analysis results are given in Table- 3.7.2.

3.7.5 Observations

Day time Noise Levels (Lday)

The day time noise levels at all the locations were ranged in between 42.3 to dB(A) to 54.7. The maximum value (54.7 dB (A)) was recorded at Nawapara village (N7), and the minimum value (42.3 dB (A)) was recorded at Plant site (N1). Night time Noise Levels (Lnight)

The night time noise levels were ranged in between 38.5 dB (A) to 49.0 dB (A). The maximum value (49.0 dB (A)) was recorded at Gindola village (N5) and the minimum value (38.5 dB (A)) was recorded at Plant site (N1).

TABLE-3.7.2

NOISE LEVELS dB (A) IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Location L10 L50 L90 Leq Lday Lnight Ldn

1 Proposed plant site 44.1 40.5 36.7 41.4 42.3 38.5 45.7 2 Binjkot village 48.2 43.7 40.3 44.7 46.7 41.8 49.3 3 Bade Jampali village 49.1 45.2 41.5 46.2 47.0 43.4 50.5 4 Darramura village 47.8 44.0 40.2 45.0 46.2 42.3 49.5 5 Gindola village 55.5 51.3 47.4 52.4 53.4 49.0 56.4 6 Kurubhata village 49.8 46.0 42.2 47.0 48.6 44.3 51.6 7 Nawapara village 56.2 51.4 47.8 52.6 54.7 48.9 56.8 8 Jhintipali village 46.6 42.7 38.8 43.7 44.6 40.0 47.4 9 Pamgarh village 50.4 46.6 43.4 47.4 48.8 45.3 52.4 10 Bhagoradhi village 47.6 44.1 40.6 44.9 45.8 41.8 49.1




3.8 Flora and Fauna Studies 3.8.1 Introduction

An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to the listing of species and assessment of the existing baseline ecological (Terrestrial and Aquatic ecosystem) conditions in the study area.

3.8.2 Objectives of Ecological Studies

The present study was undertaken with the following objectives: • To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project

site; • To assess the distribution of animal life spectra; and • To ascertain migratory routes of fauna and possibility of breeding grounds.

3.8.3 Methodology Adopted for the Survey

To achieve the above objectives, a detailed study of the area was undertaken in 10-km radius area with the proposed project site as its center. The different methods adopted were as follows:

• Compilation of secondary data with respect to the study area from published

literature and Government agencies; • Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the

area; • Discussion with local people so as to elicit information about local plants,

animals and their uses; and • Gathering data for ethno biology. The present report gives the review of published secondary data and the results of field sampling conducted during summer season-2008.

3.8.4 Review of Secondary Published Data

From Records of Botanical Survey of India � Floral structure

The Chhattisgarh Plains has long been cultivation and at present only small patches of degraded tropical dry deciduous forests have been left, if at all. It is rather more characterized by scattered stunted and crooked trees and shrubs of Butea monosperma, Lagerstroemia parviflora, Albizia spp., Acacia leucophloea, A.nilotica spp. Indica. Mangifera indica. Terminalia spp., Ficus racemosa. F.benghalensis. F.religiosa, Azadirachta indica, Pithecellobium dulce, Syzygium cumini, Mitragyna parvifolia, Aegle marmelos, diospyros melanoxylon, Bauhinia spp., Calotropis spp., Caesalpinia bonduc, Ipomoea carnea and Mimosa himalayana, with several climbers like ziziphus oenoplia, Celastrus patina, Ipomoea spp., Atylosia scarabaeoides and Cissampelos pareira. Particular mention may be made of the Mahua trees, Madhuca longifolia var. latifolia, which are




considered sacred and stay unlopped. In addition, Albizia spp., Dalbergia sissoo, Delonix regia, Cassia fistula, Peltophorum pterocarpum, Pongamia pinnata, Eucalyptus hybrids, and Pterocarpus marsupium are frequently planted on the roadsides. The ground flora, during rainy and post rainy season, consists of several annual or perennial species of grasses, sedges and other herbs and creepers, but by the middle of winter it is completely grazed and presents a bare desolate spectre. Mention may be made of two epiphytic orchids, Vanda tessellate and V.testacea which grow freely on Mangifera Indica, Butea monosperma, Madhuca longifolia var latifolia, Diospyros melanoxylon and Terminalia spp. The former with large brown banded flowers immediately catches the eye.

� Tropical Moist Deciduous Forests

A good development of these forests with a fair amount of sal can be observed in the reserved forests around Chilpi, Rangakhar, Borai, sitanadi, Khallari and Taurenga. It has tall trees of Shorea, robusta, Terminalia spp. Pterocarpus marsupium, Dalbergia panigulata, Adina ccordifolia, Stereospermum chelonoides, Schleichera oleosa, Garuga pinnata, Lannea coromandelica, Bombax ceiba, Soymida febrifuga and Boswellia serrata, and smaller trees like Lagerstroemia parviflora, Briedelia squamosa, Mallotus philippensis, Diospyros melonoxylon, Anogeissus latifolia, Buchanania lanzan, Gmelina arborea, Antidesma ghaesembilla, Ficus spp., Grewia tiliifolia and Cassia fistula and shursb like Breynia vitisidaea, Embelia tsjeriam – cottam, Chloroxylon swietenia, Holarrhena antidysenterica, Casearia graveolens, helicteris isora, Semecarpus anacardium, Ochna obtusata, Indigofera cassioides, Woodfordia fruticosa and species of Leela and Desmodium. The common in Chhatisgarh bamboo, Dendrocalamum strictus, forms dense thickets. The conspicuous climbers and ramblers in these forests are Millettia extensa, Smilax zeylanica, Bauhinia vahlii, Olax scandens, combretum roxburghii, Ventilago denticulate, Ichnocarpus frutescens, Dioscorea pentaphylla, D.puber, D.oppositifolia and D.bulbifera.

The undergrowth in dense forests is often sparse, and not much varied. The common species are Eranthemum purpurascens, Perilepta edgeworthiana, Nelsonia canescens, Phoenix acaulis, Chlorophytum tuberosum, globba racemosa, G.bulbifera, Curcuma spp., Zingiber spp., Tacca leontopetaloides, Carex speciosa, and a few ground orchids like eulophia spp. Habenaria spp., Geodorum densiflorum, and peristylus spp. The edges of the forests have a very luxurious growth of numerous annual and perennial species of Cleome, Desmodium, Alysicarpus, Tephrosia, Crotalaria, Blumea, Cynoglossum, Barleria, leucas, Phyllanthus, Euphorbia, Pupalia, Aerva, Commelina, Cyanotis and sedges and grasses. The species diversity and undergrowth in forests with high proportion of Shorea robusta is comparatively poorer than in the mixed forests. Sal is generally absent on hill slopes. � Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests

These are found in comparatively drier areas, genrally in and around the Chhattisgarh Plains. Though not always conspicuously different from the moist deciduous forests, since transitionary stages are not uncommon, dry deciduous forests are dominated by Legerstroemia parviflora, Butea monosperma, Diospyros melanoxylon, Albizia spp., Anogeissus latifolia, Terminalia spp., Aegle marmelos,




Acacia catechu A. torta, A.pennata, Cordia oblique, Emblica officinalis, Madhuca longifolia var. latifoia, Bauhinia spp., Nyctanthes arbor trists, ziziphus mauritiana, Z.xylopyrus, Helicteres isora, Lannea coromandelica and Boswella serrata. The shrubby layer is usually formed of Holarrhena antidysenterica, Grewia hirsute, Mimosa himalayana, Flaccurtia indica, Capparis zeylanica, Kirganelia reticulate, Securinega virosa, Casearia elliptica, Woodfordia fruitocs, Clerodendrum serratum and Solanum anguivi. The common climbers are ziziphus oenoplia, Smilax zeylanica, Celastrus paniculatus, Ampelocissus latifolius, A. tomentosa, Asparagus racemosus, Hemidesmus indicus and ichnocarpus frutescens. A few other climbers like Rhynchosia minima, Atylosia scarabaeoides, Ipomoea spp, Mukia maderaspatana, Diplocyclus palmatus, Cryptolepis buchananii and Pergularia daemia become more cmmon in open forest pockets or its margins. Hyptis suaveolens, anisomeles indica, alysicarpus spp., Tephrosia purpurea, Plectranthus mollis, Cassia tora, Pavetta tomentosa, species of Indigofera, Crotalaria, Leucas, Euphorbia and a large variety of grasses and sedges are common along forest margins.

Terminalia arjuna and Syzygium heynaenum are commonly found along banks of the rivers and streams. While the former is also found elsewhere, the latter is very specific in its habitat. Bushes of Tamarix ericoides and Rotula aquatica are frequent in river beds.

The rock boulders in the dry uplands bear in their crevices only a few species like polycarpaea aurea, P.corymbosa, Indigofera astragalina, I.glabra, Cassia absus, Anisochilus carnosus, Trichurus monsoniae, Arthraxon prinodes, Chrysopogon verticillatus, Digitaria stricta, Dimeria ornithopoda, Perotis indica and Pogonatherum crinitum. � Forest Blocks in Study Area

There are around 12 forest blocks which includes Protected, Reserved and Open Mixed forest blocks in 10-km radius from project. The list of forest blocks and their distances from plant site are presented in Table 3.8.1. The forest blocks mainly consists of Salai, Tendu, Bija, Saja, Char Ganja, Dhauwra, Harra and Dhobin.

TABLE-3.8.1

LIST OF FOREST BLOCKS WITHIN 10 KM RADIUS

Sr. No.

Forest Block Distance from the Proposed Project Site(km)

Direction

1 Rabo RF 0.8 NNE 2 Taraimal RF 8.2 ENE 3 Lotan RF 6.6 NNW 4 Urdana RF 9.2 E 5 PF near Bendajhariya village 4.1 SW 6 Burha pahar RF 4.9 SW 7 Bhalunara RF 5.4 W 8 PF (Daharidih village) 9.3 NE 9 Bargarh RF 5.3 WNW 10 Endu RF 7.4 NW 11 Panikhet PF 8.1 NNE 12 Suhai RF 8.9 NNE




3.8.5 Terrestrial Ecological Status: Primary Survey

A preliminary survey was made and six locations were selected for detailed study within 10-km radius of the proposed plant. The selected locations are given in Table-3.8.2 and shown in Figure-3.8.1.

TABLE-3.8.2 DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Name of the Area Distance Direction

TE-1 Plant Site - -

TE-2 Gindola village 0.8 ESE

TE-3 Nawapara village 2.5 SE

TE-4 Kurabhata village 2.7 S

TE-5 Bade Jampali village 2.1 SSW

TE-6 Daramurra village 1.8 SW

The primary data was generated through:

1. Preparing a general checklist of all plants encountered in the study area. This would indicate the biodiversity for wild and cultivated plants. The plants so encountered were classified into life form spectrum according to the classification of Raunkiaer's classification of life form spectrum.

2. Phytosociological studies by using list count quadrate method for woody and

herbaceous flora in forest areas and only herbaceous flora in ambient air quality monitoring locations. Sufficient number of quadrates of 100-m2 size was adopted for study, which is based on the area species curve. The number of quadrates depended on actual field requirements.

3. Herbaceous and woody flora was studied by taking 10 and 20 quadrates at each

location having 100 m2; 4. Determining the bird population of migratory and local birds by taking 10

random readings at every location; 5. Observing mammals, amphibians and reptiles, noting their calls, droppings,

burrows, pugmarks and other signs; and

6. Local inhabitants were interviewed for uses of plants and animals and to get ethnobiological data.




FIGURE-3.8.1

ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS




3.8.5.1 Floristic Composition- Primary Survey

� Floristic Richness

• Cryptogamic Vegetation

The area shows many algae, fungi, bryophytes and ferns. Algae are present in aquatic bodies or in marshy places. Fungi, particularly from ascomycetes and basidiomycetes are located on ground or epiphytically. Lichens of crustose, foliose and fruticose types are present on different substrates (Lichens, Ascomycetes and Basidiomycetes could be observed near hilly terrain). Bryophytes occur in wet areas and occasionally on barks of trees and old walls of houses. The commonly observed bryophtes in this area are Funaria sp and Polypodium sp. Fern flora of the study area is insignificant. The aquatic weeds Hydrilla sp, Chara sp, Salvinia, Nymphea were predominant in small ponds in agricultural fields. • Life Form Spectrum

Raunkiaer defined life forms as the sum of adaptations of plants to climate. Braun-

Blanquet (1951), whose system is adapted in this study, modified the Raunkiaer's system. During field survey, maximum 251 plant species (except algae, fungi and bryophytes) were recorded from the study area. Table-1 of Annexure-VII lists all species recorded in the study area. Classwise distribution of lifeforms in the study area is presented in Table-3.8.3.

TABLE-3.8.3 CLASS WISE DISTRIBUTION OF PLANT SPECIES IN THE STUDY AREA

Study Period Type of species No %

Phanerophytes (P) 106 42.23

Therophytes (T) 95 37.85

Hydrophytes (H) 04 1.60

Hemicryptophytes (He) 35 13.94

Geophytes (G) 09 3.58

Epiphyte(E) 02 0.80

Total 251 100

• Comments on the Life Form Spectrum

Life form spectrum is a reflection of plant community. A plant community is governed by several factors like climatic, edaphic, topographic and biotic. Even local variations in environment affect components of plant community.

In the study area, maximum number of species are phanerophytes (42.23%) followed by therophytes (37.85%). These classes are followed by hemicryptophytes (13.94%) and hydrophytes. Geophytes were found in very few numbers.




Presence of large number of phanerophytes (shrubs and trees) and therophytes (annuals or herbaceous vegetation) indicates semiarid to tropical vegetation structure. Hemicryptophytes (predominantly grasses and sedges) were found to be significant in the area. These indicate fertile and wet soil in upper layer of soil profile. Hydrophytes were present in both the seasonal and perennial water bodies.

3.8.5.3 Endangered Plants

The study area did not record the presence of any critically threatened species. The records of Botanical Survey of India and Forest department also did not indicate presence of any endangered or rare and vulnerable plant species in this area.

3.8.6 Terrestrial Fauna and Ornithology • National Park/Sanctuary As per forest records of Bilaspur review of literature, there are no sanctuaries or national park, Tiger reserves, Elephant reserves, Biospheres, Conservation reserves, and community reserves in 15- km radius from proposed power plant site.

3.8.6.1Primary Survey

Primary field studies were conducted collected secondary data through interaction with local forest officials and details are presented in Table-3.8.5.

TABLE-3.8.5

FAUNA AND THEIR CONSERVATION STATUS IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No Technical Name English Name/ Local Name

Conservation status as per Wildlife

Protection Act(1972)

Aves

1 Targos calvus King vulture* Sch-IV

2 Milyus migrans Common Kite Sch-IV

3 Corvus corvus Jungle crow Sch-IV

4 Corvus splendens House crow Sch-V

5 Turdoides striatus White headed babler Sch-IV

6 Aegithina tiphia Iora* Sch-IV

7 Pycnonotus cafer Red vented bulbul Sch-IV

8 Pycnonotus jokokus White browed Bulbul Sch-IV

9 Saxicoloides fulicata Indian robin* Sch-IV

10 Gallus gallus Red Jungle fowl Sch-IV

11 Columbus livibus Rock Pigeon Sch-IV

12 Bubo bubo Indian great horned Owl* Sch-IV

13 Copsychus saularis Magpie Robin Sch-IV

14 Oriolus oriolus Indian Oriole Sch-IV

15 Oriolus xanthornus Black Headed Oriole Sch-IV

16 Temenuchus pagodarum Brahmny Myna Sch-IV

17 Acridotheres tristicus Common myna Sch-IV

18 Ploceus philippines Weaver bird Sch-IV

19 Uroloncha striata Spotted munia Sch-IV







20 Passer domisticus House Sparrow Sch-IV

21 Cinnyris lotensis Loten's sunbird Sch-IV

22 Cinnyris asiatica Purple Sunbird Sch-IV

23 Brachypternus bengalensis Malabar Golden acked wood Sch-IV

24 Megalaima merulinus Indian Cuckoo Sch-IV

25 Eudynamis scolopaceus Koel Sch-V

26 Centropus sinensis Crow Pheasant Sch-IV

27 Psittacula Krammeri Rose ringed parakeet Sch-IV

28 Coryllis vaeralis Lorikeet Sch-V

29 Coracias benghalensis Indian Roller Sch-IV

30 Merops orinetalis Common Bee Eater Sch-IV

31 Merops leschenaulti Chestnut headed Bee Eater Sch-IV

32 Alcedo atthis Common Kingfisher Sch-IV

33 Microfus affinis House swift Sch-IV

34 Caprimulgus asiaticus Common Indian jar Sch-IV

35 Tylo alba Barn Owl Sch-IV

36 Haliastur Indus Brahmny kite Sch-IV

37 Milvus migrans Pariah kite Sch-IV

38 Anhinga melanogaster Darter Sch-V

39 Egretta garzetta Little Egret Sch-IV

40 Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret Sch-IV

41 Ardeola grayii Pond Heron Sch-IV

42 Anas acuta Common Teal Sch-IV

43 Aythya feroma White eyed Pochard Sch-IV

44 Pavo cristatus Peacock Part-III of Sch-I

Reptiles

45 Calotes versicolor Common garden lizard Sch-IV

46 Chamaleon zeylanicus (Laurenti)

Indian chamaeleon Sch-IV

47 Varanus benegalensis Monitor lizard Part-II of Sch-II

48 Lycodon spp. Wolf snake Part-II of Sch-II

49 Boiga spp. Cat snake Sch-IV

50 Bangarus spp. Krait Sch-IV

51 Naja naja Indian cobra Part-IV

52 Vipera spp. Viper* Part-II of Sch-II

Butterflies

53 Pachliopta hector Lin. Crimson rose Sch-IV

54 Papilio demoleus Lin. Lime butterfly Sch-IV

55 Junoria almana Lin. Peacock pansy Sch-IV

56 Hypolimnas bolina Lin. Great eggfly Sch-IV

57 Euploea core Cramer Common crow Sch-IV

58 Neptis hylas Moore Common sailor Sch-IV

59 Eurema hecabe Lin. Common grass yellow Sch-IV

60 Catopsilia sp. Emigrant Sch-IV

61 Leptosia nina (Fabricius) Psyche Sch-IV

Amphibians

62 Rana tigrina Bull frog Sch-IV

63 Hyla goeldii Tree frog Sch-IV

64 Bufo malanosticus Bufo Sch-IV

Mammals

65 Bandicota bengalensis Bandicoot Sch-IV

66 Rhinolopus spp. Bat Sch-IV

67 Hipposiderus spp. Bat Sch-IV

68 Axix axis Cheetal SCH-III

69 Herpestes edwardii Common mongoose Part-II of Sch-II

70 Rattus norvegicus Field mouse Sch-V

71 Lepus nigricollis Hare Sch-IV







72 Rattus rattus House rat Sch-V

73 Hyaena hyaena Hyaena* Sch-III

74 Canis auries Jackal Part-II of Sch-II

75 Presbytis entellus Langur Part-I of sch-II

76 Mucaca mulata Monkey Part-I of Sch-II

77 Rattus sp. Rat Sch-V

78 Funambulus spp. Squirrel Sch-IV

79 Funambulus palmarum Squirrel Sch-IV

80 Sus sucrofa Wild pig* Sch-III

81 Felis chaus Jungle cat* Part-I of Sch-I

82 Elephas maximus Indian elephant* Part-I of Sch-I

*not observed during field studies On comparison of the check list given in the Schedule-I of the Act and the list of wildlife recorded in the study area. 82 animal species were recorded/reported from study area during study period, out of which 3 species belongs to Sch-I, 7 species belong to Sch-II, 3 species belongs to Sch-III and rest of the species belongs to Sch-IV and Sch-V as per Wildlife Protection Act, 1972.

3.8.7 Aquatic Ecosystems

Protecting the environment and making efficient use of natural resources are two of the most pressing demands in the present stage of social development. The task of preserving the purity of the atmosphere and water basins is of both national and global significance since there are no boundaries to the propagation of anthropogenic contaminants in the water. An essential pre requisite for the successful solution to these problems is to evaluate ecological impacts from the baseline information and undertake effective management plan. So the objective of aquatic ecological study may be outlined as follows:

• To characterize water bodies like fresh waters; • To understand their present biological status; • To characterize water bodies with the help of biota; • To understand the impact of proposed industrial and urbanization activities; and • To suggest recommendations to counter adverse impacts, if any on the

ecosystem. In order to get a clear picture and to assess the various parameters of water, two sampling locations were identified for sampling. Samples were collected during study period. The sampling locations are presented in Table-3.8.6 and shown in Figure-3.8.1.

TABLE-3.8.6 DETAILS OF AQUATIC SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Sr. No. Code Locations Remarks

1 AE-1 Upstream of River Mand near sendripale Fresh water

2 AE-2 Downstream of River Mand near Kurubhata Fresh water




3.8.7.1 Methodology Adopted for Aquatic Studies Two water samples for plankton study were collected in summer season to know the planktonic flora and fauna. The samples were collected at a depth of 0.30 m from surface of the water. The samples were collected in one-liter capacity polyethylene cans and the samples were fixed with 4% buffered formaline solution. For the measurement of frequencies of various forms of phyto-plankton and zoo-plankton, one drop of the sedimented plankton was mounted on a micro slide and as many as 10 different microscope fields situated at more or less even distances from each other were examined and the number of Importance organisms counted (Lackey method, 17th edition, APHA, AWWA 1992). The plankton forms were identified upto species level and Shannon Weaver’s index was calculated. The observed planktonic flora and fauna are presented in Table-3.8.7.

TABLE-3.8.7 LIST OF OBSERVED PLANKTONIC FLORA AND FAUNA

Phytoplankton Zooplankton

Anabaena sp Arcella

Oscillatoria sp Keratella sp

Microcystis sp Asplancha sp

Chrococcus sp Brachionus sp

Scenedesmus sp Daphnia sp

Scenedesmus bijuga Cerodaphnia sp

Pediastrum sp Cyclops sp

Ankistrodesmus sp Mesocyclops sp

Oocystis sp Cypris sp

Crucigenia sp

Euglena sp

Phacus sp Cosmarium sp Clostrium sp Navicula sphaerophora Synedra ulna Navicula rhyncocephala Gomphonema sp

3.8.7.3 Conclusions on Aquatic Ecology

Surface water samples were collected from two surface water sources for analysis of biological parameters. Basillariophycean, Chlorophyceaen, Myxophyceaen, Rotifers and Cladocerans are predominant in the studied water bodies. Plankton diversity Index for phytoplankton and zooplankton varies from 2.85 to 2.56 and 2.52 to 2.16. Physico-chemical, biological parameters and diversity index reveals that the studied water bodies do not indicate any industrial contamination.

3.8.8 Summary Ecological studies were conducted in and around existing industrial and assess to know the biological resources. 251 plant species were identified which are mainly composed of phanerophytes and therophytes, hemicryptophytes. Phytosociological studies were conducted during study at various locations such as forest areas and




near villages areas to assess phytosociological structure in the study. Dominance of Shorea robusta,Madhuca latifolia, Terminalia tomentosa, Adina cordifolia, Pterocarpus marsupium, Ceiba pentandra, Cassia tora, Eupatorium odarattum, Parthinium hystreophorus, Blumea for woody and herbal populations in the plant site. The wide variety of herbaceous members and presence of wide variety of woody members reflects that the study area is a un-distrurbed ecosystem. Marginal differences were observed in the dominant species in the forest and in non-forest areas. The dominance of herbaceous flora is due to southwest monsoon rains and fertility of soil. 83 animal species were recorded/ observed during study period. It can be concluded that there are about 3 animals species which belong to Sch-I, 7 species which belong to Sch-II and rest of species belong to Sch-III, Sch-IV and Sch-V of Wildlife Protection Act, 1972.

3.9 Land-Use Based on Census Data – 2001

As per the Census records, the study area admeasure to about 31215.0 ha falling. The Land-Use details based on census data are presented in Table-3.9.1. This includes forests, cultivated area, Cultivable waste and the area not available for cultivation. The village wise land use pattern in the study area is given in Annexure-VIII.

TABLE-3.9.1 LAND USE PATTERN OF STUDY AREA

All values given in the table are in Ha

Sr. No.

Particulars of Land use 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km % Area

1 Forest Land 124.0 558.0 1021.0 1703.0 5.5 Land under Cultivation

a) Irrigated Land 124.0 142.0 985.0 1251.0 4.0

2

b) Un irrigated Land 3025.0 5497.0 8988.0 17510 56.1 3 Cultivable Waste Land 731.0 2354.0 1728.0 4813.0 15.4 4 Area not available for

cultivation 833.0 1570.0 3535.0 5938.0 19.0 Total Area 4837.0 10121.0 16257.0 31215.0 100.0

Source: District Census Hand Book – 2001

3.9.1 Forest Land

The forest is spreading over 1703.0 ha and works out to about 5.5 %of the total study area.

3.9.2 Land under Cultivation Altogether 18761 ha cultivable land (irrigated and un- irrigated) was observed in the study area. The irrigated land admeasures to about 1251.0 ha in the study area which works out to be 4.0% of total study area. The un- irrigated land admeasures about 17510 ha and works out to about 56.1% of the total study area. 3.9.3 Cultivable Waste Land

Cultivable waste category of land includes the land which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant during the past 5 years in succession. These lands




may either be fallows or covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. The study area comprises of 4813.0 ha cultivable wastelands, which works out to about 16.4% of the total area. This percentage of land in this category indicates that almost all the cultivable lands are used for cultivation as well as various other purposes, while leaving a very less extent of land un-cultivated.

3.9.4 Land not available for Cultivation All the lands not included in the above categories of land uses are considered in the category of land not available for cultivation. This category of land use mainly consists of the hilly and barren lands, human settlements, roads, water-bodies, etc. About 5938.0 ha area working out to about 19.0% of the total study area falls in this category.

3.9.5 Land Use Pattern based on Remote Sensing Data Remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and interpreted for the 10-km radius study area for analyzing the land use pattern of the study area. Based on the satellite data land use/ land cover maps have been prepared.

3.9.5.1Land use/Land Cover Classification System

The present land use / land cover maps were prepared based on the classification system of National standards. For explanation for each of the land use category the details as given in Table-3.9.2 were considered.

TABLE-3.9.2 LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Sr. No. Level-1 Level-2

Town/cities

Villages

Institution/Industry/Godown etc

1 Built-up Land

Plotted Area/Layout

Crop Land

Plantations

2 Agriculture Land

Fallow

Evergreen/Semi evergreen

Deciduous

3 Forest

Forest Plantation

Rocky/Stony Waste

Land with /without scrubs

4 Wastelands

Saline/sandy & Marshy/swampy

River/Stream 5 Water Bodies

Lake/Reservoir/Tanks

Orchard/Other Plantation

Shifting cultivation

Salt Pans, Snow covered/Glacial

6 Others

Barren/Vacant Land




3.9.5.2 Data Requirements

IRS-P6 Geo-Coded FCC on 1:1,45,000 scale of LISS-III was acquired for 27th December, 2007 and was used for the mapping and interpretation. Besides, other collateral data as available in the form of maps, charts, census records, other reports and especially topographical survey of India maps are used. In addition to this, ground truth survey was also conducted to verify and confirm the ground features.

3.9.5.3 Methodology

The methodology adopted for preparation of land use/ land cover thematic map is monoscopic visual interpretation of geocoded scenes of IRS-P6 satellite LISS-III and field observations are taken. The various steps involved in the study are preparatory field work, field survey and post field work.

3.9.5.4 Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data

The False Color Composite (FCC) of IRS-P6 satellite data at 1:1,45,000 scale are used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo-sheets, geology, geomorphology and by using the image elements the features are identified and delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature is identified on image by their image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use, physiography and erosion was formulated. The sample areas for field check are selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum image characteristics.

• Ground Truth Collection

Both topo-sheets and imagery were taken for field verification and a transverse plan using existing road network was made to cover as many representative sample areas as possible to observe the broad land use features and to adjust the sample areas according to field conditions. Detailed field observations and investigations were carried out and noted the land use features on the imagery.

• Post Field Work

The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the help of Survey of India Topo-sheets on 1:1,45,000 scale. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features boundaries from IRS-P6 False Colour Composite were modified in light of field information and the final thematic details were transferred onto the base maps. The final interpreted and classified thematic map was catrographed. The cartographic map was colored with standard colour coding and detailed description of feature with standard symbols. All the classes noted and marked by the standard legend on the map.

3.9.5.5 Final Output

The final output would be the land use/land cover map on 1:1,45,000 scale, numerals were given different colour code for each category as shown in map. Area estimation of all features of Land use/Land cover categories was noted.

3.9.5.6 Observations




The following are the main interpreted land use/land cover classes of the study area and their respective areas are given in hectares in Table-3.9.3 for the year 2007. The thematic map and land use pattern within 10-km radius based on IRS-P6 for 27th December 2007 are shown in Figure-3.9.1 and 3.9.2 respectively.

TABLE-3.9.3

LANDUSE BREAKUP BASED ON IRS-P6 DATA – 27th DECEMBER 2007

Sr. No.

Land Use Area (sq.m)

Area (Hectares)

Area (%)

1 Built-up Area 8473300 847.33 2.2 2 Industry/Institutional Area 1377555 137.76 0.4 3 Degraded/Reserved/Protected Forest 83451595 8345.16 21.9 4 Dense/Mixed Jungle 25709259 2570.93 6.8 5 Plantation 881165 88.12 0.2 6 Double Crop/Irrigated Area 29475262 2947.53 7.7 7 Other Agriculture Area 141818837 14181.88 37.3 8 Land without Scrub 59361342 5936.13 15.6 9 Stony/rocky/Barren Area 10541266 1054.13 2.8 10 Water Body 19293341 1929.33 5.1

Total 380382922

38038.29

100

Source: IRS-P6:LISS3 data, 27th December 2007




FIGURE-3.9.1

THEMATIC MAP OF STUDY AREA (IRS-P6:LISS3)




FIGURE-3.9.2

LAND USE PATTERN BASED ON SATELLITE DATA




3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics

In this section, the prevailing socio-economic aspects of people in the study area around the proposed plant boundary, which would form the basis for making planning efforts for the socio-economic development of people in the study area, have been described.

3.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes review of published secondary data, such as the District Census Statistics of 2001, Raigarh district for the parameters of demography, occupational structure of people within the study area of 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed plant site. The village wise demographic data as per 2001 Census is presented in Annexure-IX. The salient features of the demographic and socio-economic aspects are described in the following sections.

3.10.2 Demographic Aspects

3.10.2.1 Distribution of Population

As per 2001 census the study area consists of 98494 persons inhabited in the study area of 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed plant. The distribution of population in the study area is given in Table-3.10.1.

TABLE-3.10.1

DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr.No Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km

1 No. of Households 2674 5125 12493 20292

2 Male Population 6487 12193 30630 49310

3 Female Population 6624 12276 30284 49184

4 Total Population 13111 24469 60914 98494

5 Male Population (0-6 years) 1094 2084 4918 8096

6 Female Population (0-6 years)

1081 2018 4560 7749

7 Total Population (0-6 years) 2175 4102 9568 15845

8 Average Household Size 4.9 4.8 4.9 4.9

9 % of males to the total population

49.5 49.8 50.3 50.1

10 % of females to the total population

50.5 50.2 49.7 49.9

11 Sex Ratio (no of females per 1000 males)

1021.1 1006.8 988.7 997.4

12 Density of Population/Km2 271.2 241.8 374.7 315.5 Source: District Primary Census Statistics of Raigarh District- 2001

The males and females constitute about 49.9% and 50.1% in the study area respectively.




3.10.2.2 Average Household Size The study area had an average family size of 4.9 persons per household in 2001. This is moderate family size and is in comparison with the other parts of the district.

3.10.2.3 Population Density

The density of population of the study area works out to about 315 persons per km2.

3.10.2.4 Sex Ratio

The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about 49.9% and 50.1% females to of the total population. The sex ratio i.e. the number of females per 1000 males indirectly reveals certain sociological aspects in relation with female births, infant mortality among female children and single person family structure, a resultant of migration of industrial workers. The study area on an average has 997 females per 1000 males.

3.10.3 Social Structure

In the study area about 27.4% population belong to Scheduled Tribes (ST) and 12.0% Scheduled Castes (SC) indicating that about 39.4% of the population in the study area belongs to socially weaker sections. The distribution of population in the study area by social structure is shown in Table-3.10.2.

TABLE- 3.10.2

DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE

Sr. No.

Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km

0 – 10 km

1 Scheduled Castes 1164 2833 7809 11806

2 % to total population 8.9 11.6 12.8 12.0

3 Scheduled Tribes 3692 9396 13930 27018


5 Total SC and ST 4856 12229 21739 38824


7 Other castes 8255 12240 39175 59670



Source: District Primary Census Statistics of Raigarh District- 2001

3.10.4 Literacy Levels

The analysis of the literacy levels in the study area reveals an average literacy rate of 63.2% as per 2001 census data. The distribution of literates and literacy rates in the study area is given in Table-3.10.3.




TABLE- 3.10.3

DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES

Sr. No

Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km

1 Total literates 8881 15276 38061 62218

2 Average literacy (%) 67.7 62.4 62.5 63.2

3 Male literates 4890 8855 22225 35970

4 Male Litercy (%) 37.3 36.2 36.5 36.5

5 Total Male 6487 12193 30630 49310

6 % Male Literates to total Literates

55.1 58.0 58.4 57.8

7 Female literates 3991 6421 15836 26248

8 Total Female 6624 12276 30284 49184

9 Female literacy (%) 60.3 52.3 52.3 53.4

10 % Female Literates to Total literates

44.9 42.0 41.6 42.2


Source: District Primary Census Statistics of Raigarh District- 2001

The male literacy i.e. the percentage of literate males to the total males of the

study area works out to be 36.5%.The female literacy rate, which is an important indicator for social change, is observed to be 53.4% in the study area. This indicates that there is a considerable need for sociological development in the region.

3.10.5 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of residents in the study area is studied with reference to main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 4 categories of workers defined by the Census Department consisting of cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged in manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industry; and others including those engaged in household industry, construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and all other services.

The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other non-workers who do not fall under the above categories. As per 2001 census records altogether the main workers works out to be 31.4% of the total population. The marginal workers and non-workers constitute to 11.6% and 57.1% of the total population respectively. The distribution of workers by occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant population. The occupational structure of the study area is given in Table-3.10.4.




TABLE-3.10.4

OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE

Sr. No Occupation 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0 -10 km

1 Total Workers 6305 11163 24825 42293 2 Total Main Workers 4198 8631 18052 30881 3 Percentage to Total

Population (%) 32.0 35.3 29.6 31.4

4 Marginal Workers 2107 2532 6773 11412 5 Percentage to Total

Population (%) 16.1 10.3 11.1 11.6

6 Non-Workers 6806 13306 36089 56201 7 Percentage to Total

Population (%) 51.9 54.4 59.2 57.0

Total Population 13111 24469 60914 98494

Source: District Primary Census Statistics of Raigarh District-2001

Environmental Impact Assessment for the proposed 4x300 MW Coal based Thermal Power Plant at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Ggindola Villages in Kharsia Tehsil of Rraigarh District, Chhattisgarh State

Chapter-4 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures


4.0 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 Introduction

The chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts due to the

proposed power plant during construction and operational phases. The

environmental impacts are categorized as primary or secondary. Primary impacts

are those, which are attributed directly to the project and secondary impacts are

those, which are indirectly induced and typically include the associated

investment and changed pattern of social and economic activities by the proposed

action.

The mitigation measures proposed for minimizing the impacts have also been

discussed in this chapter. Environment Management Plan (EMP) is developed to

minimize adverse impacts and to ensure that the environment in and around the

project site is well protected. The EMP has been prepared for both construction

and operation phases of the proposed facilities.

The impacts have been assessed for the power plant assuming that the pollution

due to the existing activities has already been covered under baseline

environmental monitoring and continue to remain same till the operation of the

project.

The construction and operational phase of the proposed project comprises various

activities each of which may have an impact on some or other environmental

parameters. Various impacts during the construction and operation phase on the

environment have been studied to estimate the impacts on the environmental

attributes and are discussed in the subsequent sections.

4.2 Impacts during Construction Phase

This includes the following activities related to land acquisition, leveling of site,

construction of related structures and installation of related equipment.

4.2.1 Impact on Land Use

The land identified for the proposed 4x300 MW power plant is about 960-acre.

About 310-acre of the land will be used for ash disposal. Main plant facilities and

ancillary facilities will occupy 550-acre of land.

The proposed plant land is mostly barren land and dry single crop agriculture

land.

This land is under the government (18.3%) and private (81.7%) ownership and

there is no forest or ecological sensitive land within proposed site. No residential

or habitation areas are proposed to be acquired, hence no displacement of

residential areas. The agricultural area in the proposed plant site does not have

any irrigation system and is only rain-dependent. Hence, no major loss of

agricultural productivity is envisaged.




Construction of plant will lead to permanent change in land use pattern at the site

as a direct impact. The proposed project involves construction of large scale civil

works including levelling within project premises. The earthen material generated

during construction of large scale water storage reservoirs within the project

premises will be used for level rising of plant area.

The environmental pollution impacts during constructional phase would be

temporary and are expected to gradually stabilize by the time of commissioning

of proposed project.

The buffer zone of the proposed plant site is sparsely distributed villages. There

are no sensitive locations such as archaeological monuments, sanctuaries,

national parks, critical pollution zones etc within 10-km radial distance around the

proposed project site, except the reserved forest patches on hilltops. No major

changes in land use pattern of study area (region) will occur due to the project

activities.

Hence, no major impact is envisaged on land use pattern of the project site or

buffer zone.

4.2.2 Impact on Soil

All major construction activities tend to create certain changes in the soil of the

area. Excavation denudes the topsoil and makes it loose. Destruction of topsoil

leads to reduction of fertility and removal of vegetation cover with associated

hazards of the soil erosion.

During storms, some of the excavated soil and construction material such as sand

etc. would be blown up in the air and dispersed around the project site, some would

also tend to be driven into the soil and clog inter-granular spaces. However, in order

to minimise such impacts, appropriate soil conservation measures would be

undertaken. Vegetation cover would also be replaced by planting and turfing

wherever feasible. No adverse impacts on soil in the surrounding area are

anticipated.

4.2.3 Impact on Topography

The proposed project premise is a generally plain land with a general elevation of

about 230-m above MSL. Most of the buffer zone of the project is flat land.

It is proposed to level the project area and to use the earthen material excavated

from the proposed reservoir sites inside the premises. There will be no tall

structures except stacks. Also, the contours of natural drainage will not be

disturbed.

In view of the above, there will be no major adverse impact on topography of the

project site.




4.2.4 Impact on Air Quality

Particulate matter would be the predominant pollutant affecting the air quality

during the construction phase. The soil of the project area is likely to generate

considerable quantities of dust, especially during dry condition. Dust will be

generated mainly during excavation, back-filling and hauling operations along

with transportation activities. However, the wind velocity in the area is not very

high. Wind blown dust is not expected to have tangible effects. The power plant

compound to a height of about 3.0m above the ground level will act as a barrier

to wind blown dust.

Access roads will be given suitable surface treatment to minimise dust

generation. Sprinkling of water from water tankers or other suitable means would

be undertaken at the construction site for suppression of fugitive dust.

Undesirable gaseous pollutants will be generated mostly by the automobile traffic.

However, this would not lead to any tangible effect, as the expected traffic

volume is low.

It would be ensured that all vehicles plying during construction are properly

turned and maintained to keep emissions within the permissible limits.

4.2.5 Impact on Water Quality

Impact on water quality during construction phase may be due to non-point

discharges of solids from soil loss and sewage generated from the construction

workforce stationed at the site. However, due to the construction being carried out

on generally plain terrain, the soil losses will be negligible. Further, the construction

will be more related to mechanical fabrication, assembly and erection; hence the

water requirements would be small. The construction water requirement will be met

by proposed bore wells in the plant site. Temporary sanitation facilities (septic tanks

and soak pits) will be set-up for disposal of sanitary sewage generated by the

workforce.

The overall impact on water environment during construction phase due to proposed

project is likely to be short term and insignificant.

4.2.6 Impact on Noise Levels

Heavy construction traffic for loading and unloading, fabrication and handling of

equipment and materials are likely to cause an increase in the ambient noise levels.

The areas affected are those close to the site. However, the noise will be temporary

and will be restricted mostly to daytime.

The noise control measures during construction phase include provision of caps on

the equipment and regular maintenance of the equipment.

4.2.7 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

The initial construction works at the project site involves land clearance. During




construction vegetation may be disturbed. Greenbelt will be developed phase wise

during construction to improve the aesthetic value in the area and to screen out the

fugitive dust generated during construction.

The removal of vegetation from the soil and loosening of the topsoil generally

causes soil erosion. However, such impacts will be confined to the project site and

will be minimized through paving and water sprinkling.

There are not many existing matured trees in the site. However, greenbelt will be

developed surrounding the plant facilities. The existing trees will be preserved to the

extent possible. Thus, no major adverse impacts are envisaged on terrestrial

ecology.

4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase

The proposed plant operation will involve 1200 MW of power generation. The

following activities related to the operational phase will have varying impacts on

the environment and are considered for impact assessment:

• Topography and climate;

• Air environment;

• Water resources and quality;

• Land use;

• Soil quality;

• Solid waste;

• Noise levels;

• Terrestrial and aquatic ecology;

• Demography and socio-economics; and

• Infrastructural facilities.

4.3.1 Topography and Climate

Most of the area of the plant site is plain and it will be maintained even during post-

project scenario. There will not be any topographical changes during operation of

the project.

Heat loss through stack will be about 6 to 7% of the total heat input to the boiler.

The quantum of heat so lost to the atmosphere is not significant. The moderate

wind speed and rainfall in the region will mitigate the adverse impacts. The

vegetation in the region will help to manage the thermal balance.

4.3.2 Impact on Air Quality – Point Emission Sources

Being a coal based power project, Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM), Sulphur

dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) will be the important air pollutants

from the proposed project.

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out by employing

mathematical model based on a steady state gaussian plume dispersion model

designed for multiple point sources for short term. In the present case, Industrial




Source Complex [ISC3] 1993 dispersion model, designed for multiple point

sources for short term and developed by United States Environmental Protection

Agency [USEPA] has been used for simulations from point sources.

The model simulations deal with dispersion of three major pollutants viz., Sulphur

Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM)

emitted from the stacks.

4.3.2.1 Model Input Data

The air pollution modelling has been carried out representing the worst case

scenario. The stack details considered for model computations are summarized in

Table-4.1.

TABLE-4.1

PROPOSED STACK DETAILS

Sr. No. Parameters Units Stack-I Stack-II

1 Stack Height m 275 275

2 No. of flues No. 2 2

3 Top diameter of each flue m. 7.0 7.0

4 Flue gas velocity in each flue m/s 25.0 25.0

5 Flue gas temperature oK 413 413

6 Flow rate of gas in each flue Nm3/s 694.3 694.3

7 Coal Consumption TPH 760.1 760.1

a Sulphur dioxide (SO2) emission rate (Based on 0.4 of Sulphur) in each flue

g/s/flue 422.3 422.3

b

Particulate matter (SPM) emission rate in each flue

mg/Nm3 50 50

g/s/flue 34.7 34.7

c Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) g/s/flue 243.0 243.0

mg/Nm3 350 350 Source: SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited

• Meteorological Data

The hourly meteorological data recorded at site is converted to the mean

meteorological hourly data as specified by CPCB and the same has been used in

the model. In absence of site specific mixing heights, mixing heights published in

‘Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depths over Indian Region’ by

Dr. R.N.Gupta have been used.

4.3.2.2 Presentation of Results

The model simulations were carried out for summer season. For the Short-term

simulations, the Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) were estimated around 1200

receptors to obtain an optimum description of variations in concentrations over the

site in 10-km radius covering 16 directions.

The maximum incremental ground level concentrations and resultant concentrations

for SPM, SO2 and NOx are given in Table-4.2 and Table-4.3 respectively.

Similarly, the isopleths for various pollutant concentrations are enclosed. The CPCB

permissible ambient air quality standards are given in Table-4.4.




TABLE-4.2

PREDICTED 24-HOURLY SHORT TERM INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS

Season Maximum Incremental GLCs

(µµµµg/m3)

Distance

(km)

Direction

Summer-season,

2008

SPM SO2 NOx

2.3 31.5 23.9 2.8 SW

TABLE-4.3

RESULTANT CONCENTRATIONS DUE TO INCREMENTAL GLC's

(WORST CASE SCENARIO)

Pollutant Maximum

Baseline

Concentration

(µµµµg/m3)

Incremental

Concentrations

due to Proposed

Project (µµµµg/m3)

Resultant

Concentration

(µµµµg/m3)

SPM 139.6 2.3 141.9

SO2 13.4 31.5 44.9

NOx 15.6 23.9 39.5

TABLE-4.4

NAAQ/CPCB STANDARDS FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

Pollutant Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m3)

Industrial

Area

Residential, Rural &

Other Areas

Sensitive

Areas

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 120 80 30

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) 120 80 30

Suspended Particulate Matter

(SPM)

500 200 100

4.3.2.3 Discussions on Results of Assessment

A perusal of previous sub-section reveal that the maximum incremental short-term

24 hourly ground level concentrations for Particulate Matter, SO2 and NOx likely to

be encountered in the operation of the power project are 2.3, 31.5 and 23.9 µg/m3

respectively occurring at a distance of about 2.8-km in the south west direction.

The maximum resultant 24 Hourly concentrations for SPM, SO2 and NOx after

implementation of the proposed project (4X300MW power project) are 141.9, 44.9

and 39.5 µg/m3 respectively.

According to the above presented results, it can be stated that the impact of SPM

from proposed 4X300MW power plant would be negligible in core or buffer zone

of the project.

Even though, the incremental and resultant concentrations of SO2 and NOx are

significant to certain extent, they are well within the NAAQ limits and hence, the

AAQ levels after implementation of the proposed 4X300 MW power project will

remain within the permissible limits.




It is also to be noted that the above concentrations are for worst case scenario of

operations only. For indigenous fuel consumption, the concentrations will be much

lower. Hence, it can be stated that the AAQ of the area will be within the

permissible limits of respective zones.

Air dispersion modeling studies have been carried to assess the impact on forest

blocks and sensitive location in study area. The details are presented in Table-

4.5.

TABLE-4.5

DETAILS OF INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATION OF POLLUTANTS

ON FOREST BLOCKS AND SENSITIVE LOCATIONS

Pollutant Concentration (µµµµg/m3)

Base

line

Incremental Resultant Distance Direction

SPM

Rabo RF 72.0 0.2 72.2 0.8 NNE

Taraimal RF 48.7 <0.1 48.7 8.2 ENE

Lotan RF 62.9 <0.1 62.9 6.6 NNW

Urdana RF 71.2 <0.1 71.2 9.2 E

PF near Bendajhariya village 87.5 1.4 88.9 4.1 SW

Burha pahar RF 82.1 1.4 83.5 4.9 SW

Bhalunara RF 87.5 <0.1 87.5 5.4 W

PF (Daharidih village) 80.1 <0.1 80.1 9.3 NE

Bargarh RF 80.2 <0.1 80.2 5.3 WNW

Endu RF 71.2 <0.1 71.2 7.4 NW

Panikhet PF 73.7 <0.1 73.7 8.1 NNE

Suhai RF 72.0 <0.1 72.0 8.9 NNE

SO2

Rabo RF 8.1 10.0 18.1 0.8 NNE

Taraimal RF 8.2 <0.1 8.2 8.2 ENE

Lotan RF 9.8 <0.1 9.8 6.6 NNW

Urdana RF 10.9 <0.1 10.9 9.2 E


Burha pahar RF 12.2 10.0 22.2 4.9 SW

Bhalunara RF 11.6 <0.1 11.6 5.4 W

PF (Daharidih village) 9.3 <0.1 9.3 9.3 NE

Bargarh RF 8.9 <0.1 8.9 5.3 WNW

Endu RF 8.2 <0.1 8.2 7.4 NW

Panikhet PF 8.3 <0.1 8.3 8.1 NNE

Suhai RF 8.2 <0.1 8.2 8.9 NNE

Nox 0.8 NNE

Rabo RF 10.8 8.0 18.8 8.2 ENE

Taraimal RF 9.9 <0.1 9.9 6.6 NNW

Lotan RF 12.4 <0.1 12.4 9.2 E

Urdana RF 13.8 <0.1 13.8 4.1 SW


Burha pahar RF 14.3 8.0 22.3 5.4 W

Bhalunara RF 14.9 <0.1 14.9 9.3 NE

PF (Daharidih village) 11.3 <0.1 11.3 5.3 WNW

Bargarh RF 12.6 <0.1 12.6 7.4 NW

Endu RF 9.9 <0.1 9.9 8.1 NNE

Panikhet PF 12.4 <0.1 12.4 8.9 NNE

Suhai RF 11.2 <0.1 11.2 0.8 NNE




[

FIGURE-4.1

SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCs OF SPM




FIGURE-4.2

SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCs of SO2




FIGURE-4.3

SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCs of NOx




4.3.3 Impact on Air Quality - Fugitive Emissions

The fugitive dust emissions expected are from coal storage yards, coal conveyor

belt area, ash dumping areas, transportation of fuel and solid waste.

In the proposed project coal handling plant will be properly operated with EMP

suggested in this report, no major fugitive dust emissions are envisaged.

Similarly, Lean slurry disposal system of ash stacking will be practiced and hence,

no dust emissions are envisaged from ash dump areas. The fuel will be received

through rail line and the solid waste will be sent to dyke areas through pipeline.

Hence, no dust emissions from transportation are envisaged. However, internal

roads are to be asphalted to further reduce fugitive dust emissions.

The dust emissions, if any, from the above areas will be fugitive in nature and

maximum during summer season (when the wind velocities are likely to be high)

and almost nil during the monsoon season. The dust emissions are likely to be

confined to the place of generation only. The quantification of these fugitive

emissions from the area sources is difficult as it depends on lot of factors such as

dust particle size, specific gravity of dust particles, wind velocity, moisture content

of the material and ambient temperatures etc. Also, there is a high level of

variability in these factors. Hence, these are not amenable for mathematical

dispersion modelling. However, by proper usage of dust suppression measures,

dust generation and dispersions will be reduced.

4.3.4 Impact on Water Resources and Water Quality

Water is required for various power plant operations and the water balance has

been explained in Chapter-2 under Section-2.4.3 and Section-2.7.2.

No groundwater source will be tapped for meeting the water requirements during

operation of the power plant. The water requirement of the project will be met

from Mahanadi River.

4.3.4.1 Impact on Water Resources

The required water for regular operations of the plant will be about 35 MCM

Irrigation department of Chhattisgarh govt has indicated the availability of

sufficient water in the river. It is possible to fulfil the requirement of the proposed

power plant sufficiently. The copy of the letter from the Irrigation Department is

enclosed in Annexure-III.

Similarly, as no groundwater source is proposed to be tapped for meeting the

water requirements during operation of the power plant, no impacts on

groundwater resources is envisaged.

4.3.4.2 Impact on Water Quality

The water balance and wastewater generation details have been described in

Chapter-2. Total wastewater (including domestic wastewater) generation of entire

project (4X300 MW) in the project will be about 688-m3/hr, in that treated water




will used for ash handling plant, coal handling plant and green belt.

Garland drains around the ash pond site will be provided for the collection of run-

off water during monsoon season.

The storm water in the project area will be collected through storm water drains

and collected in the storm water tank, which is lined to prevent any

contamination of ground water. The stored storm water will be utilized in the

plant operation resulting in conservation of fresh water. Suitable rain water

harvesting pits will be provided along the storm water drain to recharge the

ground water table. In case the storm water tank starts overflowing, the same

will be discharged into nearby nalla.

Various types of wastewater to be generated in the proposed project with their

quantity, expected pollutants and treatment proposed are given in Table-4.6.

TABLE-4.6

TYPES OF WASTEWATER GENERATION AND TREATMENT DETAILS

All values are given in m3/hr Sr. No.

Type of Wastewater Quantity (m3/hr)

Expected Pollutants

Treatment Proposed

1 Cooling tower blow down 126 Higher TDS 278 - Sent to central

monitoring basin, CMB; 250-consumed in AHP & CHP

2 Boiler blow down 40 Higher TDS Sent to CMB after neutralisation

3 DM water treatment plant regeneration water

10 O&G, TDS, TSS, acidity

Neutralization pit and sent to CMB

4 Effluents from fuel storage areas, floor washings, runoff from Oil handling area

55 O&G, TSS Passed through Oil water separator and sent to CMB

5 Service water/HVAC 40

6 Domestic consumption

colony

224 TSS, TDS,

BOD, COD

Treated in STP and used for

greenbelt development

7 Domestic consumption plant

16 TSS, TDS, BOD, COD

Treated in STP and used for greenbelt development

8 Loss in pre treatment /evaporation

177 TSS, TDS, BOD, COD

Treated in STP and used for greenbelt development

Total 688

The expected quality of raw and treated wastewater from the power plant

including sewage water and discharge limits as specified by environment

protection rules is given in Table-4.7.




TABLE-4.7

EXPECTED QUALITY OF WASTEWATER

Sr.

No.

Parameter Unit Raw

wastewater

Treated

Wastewater

Permissible Limits as

per GSR 422 (E) for On-land Discharge

(Irrigation)

1 pH - 5.5 to 9.0 6.0 to 8.5 5.5 to 9.0

2 Suspended Solids mg/l 100 to 500 <100 200

3 Oil & Grease mg/l 10 to 200 <5 10

4 Total Dissolved

Solids

mg/l 500 to 10000 <1000 --

5 BOD mg/l 250 to 350 <30 100

6 COD mg/l 450 to 600 <100 -

Total wastewater (including domestic wastewater) generation of entire project

(4X300 MW) in the project will be about 688-m3/hr, in that treated water will

used for Ash handling plant, coal handling plant and green belt.

4.3.5 Impact on Land Use

The land identified for the proposed 4x300 MW power plant is about 960-acre.

About 310-acre of the land will be used for ash disposal. Greenbelt including

green cover will be developed in an area of about 137.5-acre, which works out to

about 1/3rd of the main plant area.

After commissioning of proposed plant, this land use will change to industry

category. The greenbelt proposed will have a positive impact on land. There will be

minimum changes in land use during the operational phase of the project. Hence,

no major impacts are envisaged during operational phase of the project.

4.3.6 Impact on Soil

Most of the impacts of power plant project on soils are restricted to the construction

phase, which will get stabilized during operational phase. The impact on the topsoil

will be confined to the proposed main plant area only. Further, the greenbelt

proposed will have a very positive impact on soil quality.

The probable sources of degradation of soil quality will be due to generation &

disposal of ash and fugitive dust emissions. However, the impacts due to disposal of

ash are covered under Section-4.3.8.

The airborne fugitive dust from the plant is likely to be deposited on the topsoil in

the immediate vicinity of the plant boundary. However, the fugitive emissions are

likely to be controlled to a great extent through proposed control measures like

water sprinkling and development of greenbelt development.

Hence, no major impact is envisaged on soil quality of the project site.

4.3.7 Impact of Solid Waste

Ash is the major solid waste to be generated from the proposed coal based power




plant. Coal consumption of 6.02 MTPA was considered for estimation of ash

generation. Ash will be generated as both forms viz. bottom ash and fly ash.

About 80% of the total ash generation will be fly ash and remaining 20% comes

as bottom ash. The fly ash is the important air pollutant, which emits to outside

environment through stacks attached to boilers. ESP’s with >99.95% efficient

shall be provided to prevent ash dispersions into ambient air. The details of the

solid waste generation are given in Table-4.8.

TABLE-4.8

EXPECTED SOLID WASTE FROM POWER PLANT

Sr. No. Plant Quantity of Generation Mode of Disposal

1 Ash Bottom ash

Fly ash

2.47 MTPA 0.49 MTPA

1.98 MTPA

Emphasis will be given for supply to potential users in dry from.

Remaining ash will be disposed into HDPE lined ash pond.

2 Used Oil 8000 KLPA Will be supplied to authorized recyclers

3 Sludge from WTP, ETP and STP

1.75 Lakh kg/annum Sent to sludge drying beds and used as manure

4 Domestic Solid

waste/Municipal Solid waste

1200 TPA Organic portion will be dried,

composted and used as manure

It is proposed to collect fly ash from ESP hoppers in dry from and provide/supply

to potential ash users depending on the demand. The balance unutilized ash will

be disposed off using Lean Slurry Disposal technology. An area of about 310

acres has been identified for ash pond within the project premises. In view of the

proposed Lean Slurry ash disposal technology, the impact of ash pond

supernatant runoff would not be expected and the impacts on surrounding

environment would be insignificant. However, it is also proposed to provide the

ash pond with an impervious HDPE layers.

The sludge from sewage treatment plant will be dried, vermi-composted and used

as manure for greenbelt maintenance. Canteen/sanitary waste will be composted

and used as manure for greenbelt development.

With the implementation of above precautionary measures, the impacts due to

solid waste disposal will be minimum.

•••• Impact of Ash Pond on Surface Water

In ash disposal, Lean Slurry Disposal method will be adopted. The bottom ash

slurry and fly ash slurry from the both the units will be led to common slurry sump

of the combined ash slurry disposal pump house. In view of the proposed Lean

Slurry ash disposal technology, the impact of ash pond supernatant run off would

not be expected. Hence, the impact of the ash pond on the surface water will be

insignificant.

•••• Impact of Ash Pond on Ground Water

The possibility of groundwater contamination due to the leaching of metals from

the ash pond will be examined based on soil investigation study. The dykes around




the pond will be constructed with proper compaction at maximum dry density. The

co-efficient of permeability will be much less than the natural deposits to further

reduce the drainability. However, with the passage of time, more and more fly ash

particles will get deposited in the pore spaces of the top soil making it essentially

non-porous and impervious and in view of the above, contamination through

leaching is not envisaged. However, it is also proposed to provide the ash pond

with an impervious bottom HDPE layers.

In view of the above mitigative measures, no surface water or groundwater

pollution is anticipated from the ash disposal area. Similarly, as the other solid

wastes also used properly, no impact of solid waste is envisaged.

4.3.8 Impacts on Ecology

Detailed flora and fauna studies were carried out during study period and the

details are presented in Section-3.8 of Chapter-3. About 251 plant species were

identified and these are commonly growing plant species of the region. As per

records of forest department of Raigarh, literature survey and also from field

studies, there are no endangered, threatened and protected plants. 82 animal

species were recorded/reported from study area during study period, out of which 3

species belongs to Sch-I, 7 species belong to Sch-II, 3 species belongs to Sch-III

and rest of the species belongs to Sch-IV and Sch-V as per Wildlife Protection Act,

1972.

It is proposed to develop greenbelt with an average width of about 50-m to 100-

m around plant site and implementation of eco development along with local

people will enhance the greenery of the area. Hence, no significant adverse

negative impact is envisaged on terrestrial ecology.

The impacts on aquatic ecology due to proposed project would be negligible as the

treated effluents from the proposed power project will meet the prescribed

standards prior to final discharge.

Similarly, as the discharge water will not have much higher temperature than the

receiving body, no thermal effects on receiving body due to discharge are

envisaged.

Hence, minimal impact is envisaged on the ecology of the area.

4.3.9 Impact on Noise Levels

The main noise generating stationary sources from the power plant will be

pumps, compressors along with cooling tower and boilers. The noise levels at the

source for these units will be in the range of 80-90 dB(A). The noise dispersion

from the plant units has been computed based on the mathematical model. The

major noise generating sources from the proposed plant are identified and listed

in Table-4.9. These are considered as input to the noise model.




TABLE-4.9

MAJOR NOISE GENERATING SOURCES

Sr. No. Sources Noise Level in dB(A)

[1-m away]

Nature of Noise

1 Turbine units 85 Continuous

2 Cooling tower 75 Continuous

3 Air compressors 85 Continuous

4 Transformer 75 Continuous

5 Boilers 85 Continuous

4.3.9.1 Presentation of Results

The incremental noise levels are computed at proposed project site at 100-

mX100-m grid intervals over an area of 10-kmX10-km study area. The predicted

results of incremental noise levels at each grid points are used to draw noise

contours. The predicted noise contours around proposed sources are shown in

Figure-4.4. As per the predicted results, noise levels at the plant boundaries are

given below in Table-4.10.

TABLE-4.10

PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS AT THE PLANT BOUNDARIES

Sr. No. Direction Incremental Noise Level in dB(A)

1 N 32

2 NE <30

3 E <30

4 SE <30

5 S <30

6 SW <30

7 W 30

8 NW 30

The predicted noise levels at the boundary due to various plant activities will be

ranging in between <30 to 32 dB (A). The incremental noise levels will be less

than 40 dB(A) at all the surrounding habitations. It is seen from the simulation

results that the incremental noise levels will be well within the CPCB standards.

4.3.9.2 Impact on Work Zone

Boilers and cooling towers are the high noise generating equipments in the

proposed power plant. However, impacts on the working personnel are not

expected to be significant on account of the high level of automation of the plant,

which means that workers will be exposed for short duration only and that too

intermittently.

The noise generation during operational phase would be at source itself through

different measures such as inspection, operation and maintenance at regular

intervals. The noise control measures as described in EMP will be fully followed.

The occupational noise exposure to the workers in the form of 8-hourly time

weighted average will be maintained well within the prescribed OSHA standards

(<90 dB(A)). Hence, the impact on occupational health of workers would be

insignificant.




FIGURE-4.4

PREDICTED NOISE DISPERSION CONTOURS

-1000.00 -800.00 -600.00 -400.00 -200.00 0.00 200.00 400.00 600.00 800.00 1000.00

-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000

-1000

-800

-600

-400

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000

-1000.00

-800.00

-600.00

-400.00

-200.00

0.00

200.00

400.00

600.00

800.00

1000.00




4.3.9.3 Impact on Community

As per the location of power plant, the minimum distance available between

proposed major noise sources and the outer periphery of the project site would

be more than 500-m. The cumulative incremental impact of all noise sources at

boundary will range in between <30dB (A) to 32 dB (A). The effective increase of

incremental noise contours at the boundary would be only about 1.5 to 2.5 dB

(A). The nearest human habitations are located at about 0.6-km from the

boundary and the cumulative noise impacts would be insignificant.

4.3.10Prediction of Impacts on Socio-Economics

No shifting of human habitations is envisaged for setting of the proposed power

plant. Hence, no Resettlement activities are required to be carried out.

The requirement of unskilled manpower will be met from nearby villages during

construction phase. The project will also help in generation of the indirect

employment apart from direct employment. This will be a positive socio-economic

development for the region. There will be a general upliftment of standard of

living in the region.

4.3.11 Impacts on Public Health and Safety

The discharge of waste materials (stack emission, wastewater and solid wastes)

from process operations may have potential impact on public safety and health.

The wastewater generated from power plant will be treated before discharging

outside. It is proposed to reuse the wastewater to the maximum extent. Since,

the adverse impacts on ambient air and soil quality are predicted to be low it is

anticipated that with effective implementation of control measures suggested for

pollution control, the impact on public health will be minimum.

4.4 Environment Management Plan during Construction Phase

During construction phase, the construction activities like site levelling, grading,

transportation of the construction material cause various impacts on the

surroundings. However, the constructional phase impacts are temporary and

localised phenomena except the permanent change in local landscape and land use

pattern of the project site.

4.4.1 Land Environment Management

Preparation of site will involve excavations and fillings. The earthen material

generated during excavations and site grading periods, shall be properly dumped

and slope stabilisation shall be taken. The topsoil generated during construction

shall be preserved and reused for plantations.

No nallas of water courses are present in the project site. The river is at about 0.5-

km from the project facilities. However, natural drainage pattern shall not be

disturbed as far as possible.




The approach road to project site shall be appropriately widened and strengthened

to facilitate vehicular movement.

The greenbelt area shall be delineated before start-up of earthwork and tree

plantation shall be taken up during construction.

4.4.2 Air Quality Management

The activities like site development, grading and vehicular traffic contribute to

increase in SPM and NOx concentration. The mitigation measures recommended to

minimize the impacts are:

• Water sprinkling in construction area;

• Asphalting the main approach road;

• Proper maintenance of vehicles and construction equipment; and

• Tree plantation in the area earmarked for greenbelt development.

4.4.3 Water Quality Management

The soil erosion at site during heavy precipitation contributes to the increase in

suspended solids. The wastewater from vehicle and construction equipment

maintenance centre will contribute to oil and grease concentration. The wastewater

from labour colony will contribute to higher BOD concentrations. The mitigation

measures recommended to minimize the impacts are:

• Sedimentation tank to retain the solids from run-off water;

• Oil and grease trap at equipment maintenance centre;

• Packaged STP/Septic tanks to treat sanitary waste at labour colony; and

• Utilizing the wastewater in greenbelt development.

4.4.4 Noise Level Management

Operation of construction equipment and vehicular traffic contribute to the increased

noise level. Recommended mitigation measures are:

• Good maintenance of vehicles and construction equipment;

• Restriction of construction activities to day time only;

• Plantation of trees around the plant boundary to attenuate the noise; and

• Provision of earplugs and earmuffs to workers.

4.4.5 Ecological Management

During construction, vegetation in the plant premises is required to be cleared. The

measures required to be undertaken to minimise the impact on the ecology are:

• The felling of trees will be kept at minimum; and

• The greenbelt having vegetation density of 2500 trees/ha will be developed.

4.5 Environment Management Plan during Operation Phase

During operation phase, the impacts on the various environmental attributes should




be mitigated using appropriate pollution control equipment. The Environment

Management Plan prepared for the proposed project aims at minimizing the

pollution at source.

4.5.1 Air Pollution Management

Fugitive and stack emissions from the power plant will contribute to increase in

concentrations of SPM, SO2 and NOx pollutants. The mitigative measures

recommended in the plant are:

• Installation of ESP of efficiency more than 99.9% to limit the SPM concentrations

below 50 mg/Nm3;

• Provision of bi-flue stack of 275-m height for wider dispersion of gaseous

emissions;

• Provision of water sprinkling system at raw material storage yard;

• Asphalting of the roads within the plant area;

• Provision of dust extraction systems at dust generating source.

• Developing of Greenbelt (100-m wide towards village areas and river course, 50

to 100-m wide towards other area) around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emissions;

• Design of control equipment to meet the standards stipulated by CREP;

• Online flue gas monitors as well as flue gas flow rates and temperature

measurement shall be provided for all stacks; and

• Usage of washed/beneficiated coal may be explored.

To control fugitive hydrocarbon emissions, the following measures shall be adopted:

• Provision and periodic inspections of mechanical seals in pumps;

• Preventive maintenance of valves, flanges, joints, roof vents of storage tanks;

and

• Submerged filling of liquid fuel storage tanks.

The fugitive dust emissions shall be controlled by installation of closed conveyor

system along with suitable dust suppression measures.

4.5.2 Water Pollution Management

Wastewater will be generated from cooling towers, boilers in the power plant.

Besides, domestic wastewater from canteen and employees wash area, township

will also be generated. The recommended measures to minimise the impacts and

conservation of fresh water are:

• Recycling of wastewater generated in cooling tower into process and ash

disposal, coal handling and service water requirements;

• The plant raw water requirement shall be optimised. The COC in cooling system

shall be maximised (such as COC=6);

• The effluent carrying oil spillage in the plant area shall be sent to oil-water

separator for removal of oil;




• Coal stock piles and ash ponds shall be provided with garland drains and water

shall be treated for suspended / floating solids;

• Adequate treatment of wastewater prior to recycling/reuse to maximum extent;

• Provision of sewage treatment plant to treat domestic sewage generated from

plant and township;

• Utilization of treated domestic wastewater in toilet flushing, greenbelt

development and dust suppression;

• Lining of effluent pond suitably to prevent any seepage into ground to avoid any

groundwater contamination;

• Provision of separate storm water system to collect and store run-off water

during rainy season and utilization of the same in the process to reduce the

fresh water requirement;

• Final disposal shall be through open channel with natural cascade aeration

arrangement to improve DO in treated effluent;

• Treated effluents from all streams should be stored in CMB/Effluent Pond /Guard

Pond having 5 to 6 days detention time and the aquaculture may be practiced

with bioassay tests on regular basis;

• The treated wastewater before disposal shall be checked for conformity of

Environment Protection rules; and

• Suitable rainwater harvesting structures to be constructed.

The wastewater from various units of the plant shall be appropriately treated and

disposed.

Type of Wastewater Treatment Proposed

Cooling tower blow down Sent to central monitoring basin, CMB

Boiler blow down Sent to CMB

DM plant regeneration waste Neutralization pit and sent to CMB

Service water Treated in ETP (flocculator, settling tank)

and sent to CMB

Effluents from fuel storage areas, floor washings, runoff from Oil handling area

Passed through Oil water separator and sent to CMB

Sewage from township and plant Treated in STP

4.5.3 Rainwater Harvesting System

Rainwater harvesting structures shall be provided to recharge the groundwater

resources in the region. The run-off water from the roof of the structures and

paved areas shall be collected through storm water drainage system and led to

rain water harvesting structure. The typical rainwater harvesting structure is

shown in Figure-4.5.




FIGURE-4.5

RAIN WATER HARVESTING STRUCTURE




4.5.3.1 Rainwater Harvesting Facilities

Groundwater Recharge with Rain Water Harvesting

There is generation of surface run-off from the plant facility during monsoon

season. The run-off will be of two types, i.e., run-off from the pervious area of

the facility site and run-off from the built-up area of the facility.

•••• Run-off from the Built-up Areas

The run-off from the paved surfaces of the proposed facility will be routed

through a carefully designed storm water drainage network and collected in storm

water collection sump and excess rainwater will be discharged to bore wells

constructed on these internal drains.

•••• Run-off from the Pervious Area

The run-off from the pervious area will be routed directly to the rainwater

harvesting structures constructed at suitable locations as per the contours.

For augmenting the ground water resources in the plant premises, number of

rainwater harvesting pits will be constructed and the internal drains where excess

rain water flowing in drain will be diverted to these pits. These structures will

facilitate percolation of water into the ground and thus augmenting the

groundwater sources. The roof top water will be routed to the storm drains. This

will result in increase in groundwater tables and to some extent the improvement

of ground water quality.

The size and the locations of rainwater harvesting pits will be decided during

detailed engineering of the project.

Run off from the proposed project site is calculated using rational formula:

Q = C x I X A

Q = Run-off in m3/hr

A = Catchment Area (ha)

C = Coefficient of Run-off

I = intensity of Rainfall in mm/hr

Total area = 388.5-ha

Intensity of Rainfall (I) = 2.5 cm/hr (1 inch/hr)

Run-off co-efficient (C) = 0.7

Q = 0.7 x (2.5/100) m/hr x (388.5 x 10000) m2

= 67987.5m3/hr

4.5.3.2 Storm Water Management

The power plant water management system will be designed to minimize the

potential for storm water contamination occurring at the site. This will be

achieved by incorporating the following features into the storm water

management system:




• Run-off from upstream areas will be diverted around the plant site;

• The quantity of contaminated run-off generated will be minimized by diverting

run-off from areas external to the plant to storm water discharge points;

• Hazardous material and fuel storage areas will be bunded and drains will be

provided to around these facilities to prevent entering of run-off water; and

• Run-off from area external to process areas of the plant will be contained

within a storage system.

4.5.4 Noise Pollution Management

In the process, various equipments like pumps, cooling tower, compressors etc

generate the noise. The recommendations to mitigate higher noise levels are:

• Equipments should be designed to conform to noise levels prescribed by

regulatory authorities;

• Provision of acoustic barriers or shelters in noisy workplaces;

• Provision of hoods to noise generating equipments like pumps;

• Provision of thick greenbelt to attenuate the noise levels;

• Provision of Personal Protective Equipments (PPE) such as earplugs, earmuffs to

the workers working in high noise level area; and

• Implementation of greenbelt, landscaping with horticulture at power block areas

to reduce noise impacts.

4.5.5 Solid Waste Management

Solid waste in the form of ash will be generated in a coal based thermal power

plant. The total ash generated in the plant will be 2.47 MTPA out of which 20%

will be bottom ash i.e. 0.49 MTPA and balance will be fly ash of 1.98 MTPA. The

following measures shall be taken for solid waste management:

• In general ash will be given to potential ash users;

• The excess ash will be disposed off using lean slurry disposal system to HDPE

lined ash pond;

• The generated waste oil shall be explored to be used in boiler furnace with HFO

or shall be given to authorized recyclers;

• The organic portion of solid waste generated in the Sewage Treatment Plant

(STP) will be used as manure in greenbelt development; and

• Maintaining the data base on solid waste generation such as quantity, quality,

treatment/management.




4.5.5.1 Literature on Fly Ash Utilization

• Fly Ash use in Cement Industries

Cement mixed with fly ash is known as Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC). As per

the Indian standards, fly ash can be used to replace 25% cement. The fly ash

cement is made by grinding with clinker. The fly ash generated from proposed

power plant will be supplied to cement plants in the region. The fly ash can be

utilized by these cement plants to manufacture PPC cement.

• Fly Ash use as Micro-Nutrient in Fertilizer

Ash is a good fertilizer due to the presence of heavy metal traces, which act as

micro-nutrients to the vegetation and give good yield of agricultural produce.

It is estimated that the application of 1 to 2 tonnes of ash per hectare of land will

increase the yield of the crops by 30%. Fly ash can be applied approximately on

2000 ha of agricultural land.

• Fly Ash use in Road Construction

Fly ash can be used as a component in a stabilized aggregate sub-base course. A

blend of 84% dense aggregate, 11% pond fly ash and 5% hydrated lime gives

maximum dry density, optimum moisture content and unconfined compressive

strength.

4.5.5.2 Prospective Ash Utilization

It is very much clear that the ash generated at the power plants can be

effectively used for various products. Though the acceptability of the ash-based

products may take a long time, it is always better to start on a small scale.

TABLE-4.11

PROGRESSIVE ASH UTILIZATION PLAN

Year Ash Generation

Ash Utilization

Ash Diverted to

Ash Storage Yard

Cumulative

Total of Disposal

MTPA % MTPA MTPA MTPA

1 0.46 20 0.0921 0.3684 0.09

2 0.46 30 0.13815 0.32235 0.14

3 0.46 40 0.1842 0.2763 0.18

4 0.46 50 0.23025 0.23025 0.23

5 0.46 60 0.2763 0.1842 0.28

6 0.46 70 0.32235 0.13815 0.32

7 0.46 80 0.3684 0.0921 0.37

8 0.46 90 0.41445 0.04605 0.41

9 0.46 100 0.4605 0 0.46

4.5.5.3 Policy on Fly Ash Utilization

Utilization of ash produced by coal based power stations as a thrust area of its

activities and all possible actions will be taken to enhance level of ash utilization.




In the proposed power plant, various avenues for ash utilization will be explored

as delineated in the above sections. In particular, supply of quality ash for

manufacture of cement will be taken as there are some cement units. Some of

the actions planned for the project are as given below:

• SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited will make efforts to motivate

and encourage entrepreneurs to set up units for manufacture of ash-based

products such as fly ash bricks, lightweight aggregates, and cellular concrete

products etc as ancillary industries in the region. SKS Power Generation

(Chhattisgarh) Limited would be providing all possible infrastructure facilities

to these entrepreneurs in accordance with its policy;

• SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited would also continue to

encourage utilization of available ash based products in all its construction

activities; and

• SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited will encourage the use of water

treated fly ash as a soil ameliorator and as a source of micro-nutrients and

secondary nutrients for improving agricultural productivity.

4.5.5.4 Conclusion

All efforts will be made for maximum utilization of ash. However, after reviewing

various proposals of the ash utilization, 40-70% of ash utilization is possible at

the initial period and same will be improved over the period of time in future. SKS

Power Generation Limited is committed to explore possibilities for ash utilization

considering new technologies and avenues and try to achieve the target fixed by

MoEF in this regard.

SKS Power Generation Limited is committed to comply with the Fly Ash

Utilization Notification, 1999 and as amended thereof.

4.5.5.5 Fly Ash Disposal

The balance ash after utilisation shall be disposed in ash ponds. Ash disposal system

proposed is Lean Slurry Disposal. Treated wastewater will be used in ash handling

plant. The ash pond will be provided with HDPE liners. The area provided for ash

pond is about 310-acre.

The major advantages of the Lean Slurry Disposal method are:

• Very low water consumption;

• The slurry can be self-setting and self limiting so that ash will deposit and dry

by itself to form a hard surface;

• Considerably less area is required for ash disposal;

• Specific energy consumption in pumping and transportation will be much

lower;

• Pipeline diameter can be much smaller and transportation velocities could also

be considerably lower due to the fact that the slurry is non-settling. This could

also reduce wear in the pipeline;




• Both bottom ash and fly ash can be disposed together if needed; and

• The trenches will be constructed along the periphery of the ash pond to collect

the run-off water during rainy days. The run-off water will be routed through

sedimentation tank before discharging into nalla.

The ash will be utilized in various construction materials to the maximum extent and

100% utilization will be achieved.

4.6 Greenbelt Development

With rapid industrialization and consequent deleterious impact of pollutants on

environment, values of environmental protection offered by trees are becoming

clear. Trees are very suitable for detecting, recognizing and reducing air pollution

effects. Monitoring of biological effects of air pollutant by the use of plants as

indicators has been applied on local, regional and national scale. Trees function as

sinks of air pollutants, besides their bio-esthetical values, owing to its large

surface area.

The greenbelt development not only functions as foreground and background

landscape features resulting in harmonizing and amalgamating the physical

structures of the plant with surrounding environment, but also acts as pollution

sink. Thus, implementation of afforestation program is of paramount importance.

It will also check soil erosion, make the ecosystem more complex and functionally

more stable and make the climate more conducive.

Greenbelt with a width of 50-m to 100-m will be developed around the plant site.

The total greenbelt around the power plant complex will be about (137.5-acre)

which works out to about 1/3rd of total project area including green belt in the

town ship.

In the proposed greenbelt about 343750 trees will be planted with a density of

2500 trees/acre. A capital cost of Rs. 1.0 Crore and an annual budget of Rs.2.0

Crore will be earmarked for this purpose. The plantation schedule will be

completed within five years from the construction period of the project. The

plantation schedule is given in Table-4.12.

TABLE-4.12

GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT SCHEDULE

Sr. No. Year Area (acre) No. Saplings

1 1st Year 27.5 68,750 2 2nd Year 27.5 68,750 3 3rd Year 27.5 68,750 4 4th Year 27.5 68,750 5 5th Year 27.5 68,750

Total 137.5 343750

The layout plan of the greenbelt and tree cover in plant area is shown in Figure-

4.6.




FIGURE-4.6

GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN

cc




4.6.1 Species for Plantation

The species proposed will have broad leaves. Trees will be selected based on the

type of pollutants, their intensity, location, easy availability and suitability to the

local climate. They have different morphological, physiological and bio-chemical

mechanism/ characters like branching habits, leaf arrangement, size, shape,

surface (smooth/hairy), presence or absence of trichomes, stomatal conductivity

proline content, ascorbic acid content, cationic peroxides and sulphite oxidize

activities etc to trap or reduce the pollutants. Species to be selected will fulfil the

following specific requirements of the area:

• Tolerance to specific conditions or alternatively wide adaptability to eco-

physiological conditions;

• Rapid growth;

• Capacity to endure water stress and climate extremes after initial

establishment;

• Differences in height and growth habits;

• Pleasing appearances; and

• Providing shade.

Based on the above, the recommended species for greenbelt and plantation are

given in Table-4.13. Further, the already existing / native species will be given

preference.

TABLE-4.13

RECOMMENDED PLANTS FOR GREENBELT

Note: S: Small, M: Medium, L: Large Sr. No.

Botanical Name of the Plant with Height

Hindi Name

Size of Plant Type and Suitable site

1 Acacia auriculaeformis (Mimosaceae) Height: 5m

Vilaiti M; Semi-evergreen fragrant white flowers; suitable in green belts and on road sides

2 Adina cordifolia (Rubiaceae) Height: 20m

Haldu

L; deciduous, a light demander, suitable on open areas & near flares

3 Aegle marmelos( Rutaceae) Height: 12m

Bael

M; deciduous, good for green belts near temples

4 Anogeissus latifolia ( Combretaceae)

Dhaura

M; deciduous suitable for green belts

5 Artabotrys hexapetaius (Annonaceae)

Height: 10m

Hara Champa

S; evergreen shrub with fragrant flowers good for gardens & inside boundary wall

and long canals

6 Averrhoa carambola (Averrhoaceae Oxalidaceae) Height: 5m

Kamrak

S; semi ever green good in narrow green belts ( green belts < 50 m width) Along channels

7 Azadirachta India (Meliaceae)

Height: 20m

Nim

L; evergreen ;

Suitable in green belts and out side office & hospital buildings

8 Bauhinia variegate (Caesalpiniaceae) Height: 5m

Kachanar

M; deciduous, good in green belts in garden and as a second row avenue tree

9 Borassus flabellifer

Height: 20m

Tad

L; a tall deciduous palm; can be used as

wind break when of different age

10 Boswellia serrata (Burseraceae)

Kundur

M; deciduous suitable on green belt on shallow soils




Sr. No.


Hindi Name


Height: 4m

11 Burera serrata (Bureraceae) Height: 4m

M; evergreen, suitable on shallow soil as a green belt or avenue tree

12 Buteas monosperma (Fabaceae; Papilionaceae)

Height: 10m

Palas

M; deciduous for green belts and as a second row avenue tree

13 Caesalpinia pulcherrima (Leguminosae) Height: 4m

Gulutora

S; a large shrub, suitable for gardens out side offices and along channels

14 Callistemon lanceolatus

(Myrtaceae) Height: 5m

M; deciduous for some time, ornamental

plant in garden

15 Careva aroborea (Lecythidaceae)

Kumbi L; deciduous, good in green belts

16 Carrisa carandas (Apocynaceae)

Height: 3m

Karaunda

S; semi evergreen. Large bushy shrub, good as a hedge to protect against noise

17 Caryota urens ( Palmae) Height: 5m

Mari

A lofty palm, good as a windbreak

18 Cassia fistula (Leguminopsaae)

Height: 12m

Amaltas

M; deciduous, good ornamental tree in green belts

19 C. Siamea Height: 10-12m

L; evergreen, good an avenue tree

20 Casuarina eguisetifolia (Casuarinaceae) Height: 10m

Jungli saru

M; evergreen, suitable for covering low lying areas & in green belt

21 Cedrela toona

(Meliaceae) Height: 5-8m

Mahanim

L; deciduous, good in open spaces, in

green belts and along ponds

22 Cestrum diurnum (solanaceae)

Height: 3m

Din-ka-raja

S; a shrub with white fragrant flowers, suitable around boilers and waste disposal

sites

23 Cleistanthus collinus (Euphorbiaceae) Height: 3-5m

Garari

S; deciduous tree suitable in green belts

24 Cocus nucifera (Palmae)

Height: 10-15m

Nariyal

A tall stately palm suitable on sea shore river banks and hill slopes

25 Dalberciasisso (Leguminosae) Height: 3-5m

Shisham

M; deciduous suitable on areas around flare sites and in green belts

26 Delomix regia (Leguninosae)

Height: 15m

Gul Mohar

M; deciduous ornamental, suitable on road sides

27 Dillenia India Height: 3-5m

Chalta

L; evergreen, white fragrant flowers, good in green belts and around waste disposal sites.

28 D. Pentagyna

Height: 5-8m

Aggai

L; deciduous , good in green belts and on

site around flare

29 Emblica officinalis (Euphorbiaceae) Height: 5m

Amla M; deciduous, good as isolated trees in gardens.

30 Ervthrina suberosa (Leguminosae)

Dauldhak

M; deciduous, good in green belts

31 E.variegata

Height: 10m

Dadap

M; deciduous, good in gardens out side

office buildings

32 Ficus bengalensis Height: 20m

Bargad

L; deciduous, widely spaced avenue tree (15 m apart)

33 F. religiosa Pipal L; deciduous, widely spaced avenue tree




Sr. No.


Hindi Name


Height: 20m also as a single tree in isolated sites

34 Gmelina arborea (Verbenaceae) Height: 3-5m

Sewan

M; deciduous , good in green belts around flare sites

35 Grewia tiloifolia

(Tiliaceae)

Height:3- 5m

Dhamim

M; good in green belts for use as timber

36 Hamelia patents (Rubiaceae) Height: 3m

S; evergreen shrub with dense attractive foliage of greenish bronze leaves; good in gardens

37 Hardwickia binata (Leguminosae) Height: 3-5m

Anjan

M; deciduous, good for green belts on shallow soils

38 Hibiscus mutabilis (Malvaceae)

Height: 3-5m

Sthal kamal

S; large bushy shrub, semi evergreen good in green belts & in gardens, along

channels

39 H. rosa sinensis Height: 3m

Jasut

S; evergreen woody showy shrub good for gardens

40 Lxora arbprea (Rubiaceae) Height: 1-2m

Nevari

S; much branched evergreen; good in green belts and in gardens

41 Lxora coccinea Height: 1-2m

Rangan

S; much branched evergreen; good in gardens and in green belts

42 Jasminum sbrahmanir (Oleaceae)

Moghra

S; much branched evergreen; good in gardens and in green belts

43 Kydia calycina (Malvaceae)

Pula

S; deciduous, good along canals and in green belts

44 Lagerstroemia speciosa

(Lythraceae) Height: 10m

Jarul

M; deciduous, good along road sides and

in garden

45 Lannea coramandelica (Anacardiaceae)

Height: 3-5m

Jhingan

L; deciduous, good on well drained green belts and around flares

46 Lawsonia alba (Lythraceae) Height: 3-5m

Mehndi

S; glabrous much branched shrub, good along canal sides

47 Madhuca indica (Sapotaceae) Height: 5-8m

Mahua

M; deciduous, good in green belts

48 Mallotus philippensis (Euphorbiaceae) Height: 5-8m

Sindur

S; small evergreen tree, good along canals

49 Melia azedarach (Meliaceae)

Height: 5-8m

Bakain M; deciduous good along small roads and canals

50 Millingtonia hortensis ( Bignoniaceae) Height: 3-5m

Akas Nim

L; semi evergreen flowers fragrant, good along road sides

51 Mimusops elengi

(Sapotaceae) Height: 10m

Maulsari

M; evergreen, good for avenues

52 Moringa oleifera (Moringaceae) Height: 10m

Sainjna

M; deciduous, with fragrant flowers

53 Murava koenigii (Rutaceae)

Height: 3-5m

Mitha

Neem

S; semi evergreen good in green belts

suitable site and along small channels

54 Oreodoxa regia (Palmae) Height: 5-8m

Royal palm

L; semi- evergreen good along medium and small road sides as an ornamental

plant




Sr. No.


Hindi Name


55 Pandanus odoratissimus (Pandanaceae) Height: 1-2m

Kewada

S; a densely branched shrub; good in gardens near sea shore

56 Peltophorum inerma

(Leguminosae, Caaesalpiniaceae) Height: 3-5m

M; Semi evergreen, suitable on road

sides, in gardens & outside office buildings

57 Pliumeria acuuminata (Apocynaceae) Height: 3-4m

Golainchi

M; semi evergreen, fragrant white flowers, good in green belts

58 Plumeria alba

(Apocynaceae) Height: 3-4m

S; semi evergreen good for gardens

59 Plumeria rubra Height: 3-4m

Golaonchi

S; semi evergreen good for gardens

60 Pterocarpus marsupium

(Leguminosae, Papilionaceae) Height: 3-5m

Bija

M; deciduous, good on open areas with

adequate light

61 Pogamia pinnata (Leguminosae, Papilionaceae)

Height: 3-5m

Karanj

M; deciduous, good along roads and canals

62 Samalia malabarica (Bombaceae)

Height: 3-5m

Semul

M; deciduous, good for avenues

63 Samanea saman (Leguminosae) Height: 20m

L; deciduous, a good tree along road sides for shade

64 Saraca indica (Leguminosae, Caesalpinaceae)

Height: 5m

Asok

M; evergreen tree good on road sides within campus

65 Spathodia campanulata (Bignoniaceae) Height: 12m

Ruugtoora

L; iin gardens and avenues and in green belts, it is deciduous

66 Syzygium cuminii (Myyrtaceae)

Height: 20m

Jaman

L; evergreen tree good in green belts,

and with in campus road sides

67 Tabernamontana coronaria (Apocynaceae) Height: 2-3m

Chandni

S; an evergreen shrub, good in gardens and along cannels

68 Tabebuia pentaphylla (Bignomiaceae)

Height: 20m

M; deciduous good in gardens

69 Tamarindus indica (Leguminosae, caesalpiniaceae) Height: 20m

Imli

L; evergreen tree good along state national highways suitable site

70 Xylia xyicarpa

(Leguminosae;Minosaceae) Height: 2m

Jambu

Good in gardens and along cannels and

streams and on waste lands

71 Zanthoxyium(Rutaceae) Height: 2m

Badrang

M; deciduous in green belts.

Note: S: Small, M: Medium, L: Large

4.7 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures

It is proposed to invest about Rs. 450 crores on pollution control, treatment and

monitoring systems for proposed power plant. In addition to this, Rs.1.9 crores

per annum will be spent on greenbelt development in and around the proposed

power plant. The break-up of the investment is given in Table-4.14.




TABLE-4.14

COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURES

Sr. No. Description of item Capital Cost (Rs in Crores)

1 Fly ash control (ESP) 120

2 SO2 control (Stacks) 80

3 Water (ETP) 60

4 Solid waste (Ash handling plant) 100

5 Ash pond 85

6 Monitoring instruments 4

7 Green Belt 1

Total 450

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed 4x300 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant at Binjkot, Darramura, Badejampali and Gindola Villages in

Kharsia Tehsil of Raigarh District, Chhattisgarh State

Chapter-5

Analysis of Alternatives for Technology and Project Site


5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES FOR TECHNOLOGY AND PROJECT SITE

5.1 Analysis of Alternative Technology

The selection of the proper steam generator technology is a critical step in the

basic design of a new power project. The fuel to be fired and the steam cycle to

be adopted dictates the type of steam generator needed to satisfy the

requirements of the project.

5.1.1 Alternatives for Boiler Technology

The following are the general options for selection of boiler technology:

For easy to burn fuels, such as bituminous coals - Suspension firing of the

pulverized fuel in horizontal, wall-mounted burners is the configuration of choice.

For low volatile, low reactivity fuels, such as anthracite and petroleum cokes, the

down-fired arch furnace is the choice adopted world-wide.

Another option for difficult fuels, as well as for waste fuels, which cannot be

properly burned with suspension firing, is the circulating fluidized bed (CFB)

boiler. Also the flywheel of circulating solids in the CFB boiler allows a wide range

of fuels to be fired in the same unit. Super critical boilers for low colorific value

coals are yet to be established with Indian coal firing.

In the proposed project, coal will be the main fuel. Hence, pulverized sub critical

boilers are considered.

5.1.2 Alternatives for Boiler Parameters

Two options, sub-critical and supercritical parameters were examined related to

power generation of thermal power plants.

As the latest supercritical boilers are new in India, Power Consultants in our

country are yet to be geared up for consultancy services to super-critical boilers

due to inadequacy of knowledge and experience base.

The advantages of super critical boilers over sub-critical boilers are the Rankine

cycle efficiency. However, the cycle efficiency is dependent on the condenser

cooling water temperature. In Indian conditions, the cooling water temperature

generally remains on higher side. Hence, the total envisaged efficiency gained by

utilizing super-critical boilers is limited by condenser cooling water temperature.

In super critical boilers for better heat transfer, the boiler tubes are made-up of

marginal section than the sub-critical boilers. With the high ash content (42%) in

Indian coal the erosion pattern envisaged is more therefore the chances of tube

failure in super critical boilers is more as compared to sub- critical boilers

designed for Indian coals. Thus, the availability will be less. The relatively lesser

thick tubes, superior metallurgy with highest cost used in the super critical boilers

can lead to fast erosion or even abrupt damage of boiler tubes, because of



Chapter-5



frequent tendency of imbalance in furnace heat absorption. This is consequent to

unpredictable raise in temperature at Super heater/ Reheater zones because of

the use of low and varying colorific value and volatile matter of coals used in

India. With the marginally designed metallurgy of tubes for super critical boilers,

the variation of temperature will have more damaging effect. The boilers of super

critical designs will be a new experience with Indian coals of inconsistent colorific

value, with high ash low volatile matter may lead forced outages. It will take

some time for stabilizing this new version with Indian coals. The availability of

more than 90% is more important for an IPP than the marginal raise in cycle

efficiency.

There is a scarcity of trained man power for operating power plants based on

super-critical technology. Further, the delivery schedule for super-critical boilers

is longer.

Hence, in view of the above, sub critical parameters are considered for the

proposed boiler configuration.

5.2 Analysis of Alternative Sites for Location of Power Plant

Four (4) probable locations were assessed for site selection:

Site1: Binjikot, Kharsia Tehsil, Raigarh District

Site2: Pandapani/ Dumarpali, Raigarh Tehsil, Raigarh District

Site3: Munund/ Barbaspur, Dharamjaigarh Tehsil, Raigarh District

Site4: Jamgaon, Raigarh Tehsil, Raigarh District

Site Selection Criteria:

Criteria Site#1 (Binjkot) Site#2

(Pandapani/ Dumarpali)

Site#3 (Munund/ Barbaspur)

Site#4 (Jamgaon)

Nearest Town/ Tehsil

Kharsia Raigarh Dharamjaigarh Raigarh

Connectivity Rail line: Main plant is 1.0 km; NH-200:

5-km

Rail line: 1-km; Rail line: 80-km; Rail line: 1.5-km

Water Source Mahanadi River: 40-km

Mahanadi River: 30-km



Coal Source Fatehpur Coal Block: 65-km

Fatehpur Coal Block: 75-km



Power Evacuation

Kotra substation : 15 km




Remarks The site is close to railway line & power evacuation line.

Sufficient plain land is available.

State Govt. is not permitting any

industry within 15 km of Raigarh.

Non-availability of sufficient land. Site is surrounded by

forests.

Uranium reserves were found and

land is not advisable for

other industries



Chapter-5



• Selection of the site

After evaluation, a site near Binjkot village, Kharsia tehsil, Raigarh district, having

major favorable features along with good environmental features has been

identified for the proposed project.

The Binjkot site has the following advantages:

• Rail connectivity is 1.0-km away from the proposed site and power

evacuation is near to the proposed site.

• Road connectivity is less than 3-Kms.

• Availability of the land.

• Close to Fathepur coal block.

• Close to PGCIL substation fpr power evacuation (about 15-kms)

• Nearest national high way (NH-200) is at about 15-Kms from the selected

site and nearest state highway (Kharsia-Raigarh) is at 1.7-km from the

proposed site.

• Nearest rail way station (Robertson RS) is at about 2.4-Km away from the

proposed site.

• Selected site is mix of barren land (40%) & dry agricultural land (60%).

• Water source from Mahanadi River at about 30-km from the selected site.

• No forest land with in the project site.

• No National Parks, Wildlife sanctuaries in 15-km radius;

• Availability of required plain land.

• There are no human settlements, habitations or forests in the project area;

and

• Least R&R issues involved in the project;

• Sufficient water is available from Mahanadi river , at a distance of 30-km

from the site;

The alternative sites considered for the proposed power plant are shown in

Figure-5.1.



Chapter-5



FIGURE-5.1

ALTERNATIVE SITES CONSIDERED FOR THE PROPOSED POWER PLANT



Chapter-6 Environmental Monitoring Program


6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.1 Introduction

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters is of immense importance to

assess the status of environment during project operation. With the knowledge of

baseline conditions, the monitoring programme will serve as an indicator for any

deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of the project, to enable

taking up suitable mitigatory steps in time to safeguard the environment.

Monitoring is as important as that of control of pollution since the efficiency of

control measures can only be determined by monitoring.

Usually, as in the case of the study, an Impact Assessment study is carried over

short period of time and the data cannot bring out all variations induced by the

natural or human activities. Therefore, regular monitoring programme of the

environmental parameters is essential to take into account the changes in the

environmental quality.

6.2 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Monitoring shall confirm that commitments are being met. This may take the

form of direct measurement and recording of quantitative information, such as

amounts and concentrations of discharges, emissions and wastes, for

measurement against corporate or statutory standards, consent limits or targets.

It may also require measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity

of a site using ecological/biological, physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring

may include socio-economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even

assessment of complaints.

6.2.1 Objectives of Monitoring

The objectives of environmental post-project monitoring are to:

• Verify effectiveness of planning decisions;

• Measure effectiveness of operational procedures;

• Confirm statutory and corporate compliance; and

• Identify unexpected changes.

6.3 Monitoring Schedule

Environmental monitoring schedules are prepared covering various phases of

project advancement, such as constructional phase and regular operational phase.

6.3.1 Monitoring Schedule during Constructional Phase

The proposed power project envisages setting up of boilers, turbines and cooling

towers, establishment of storage facilities for coal and ash. The construction

activities require clearing of vegetation, mobilisation of construction material and

equipment. The construction activities are expected to last for over three years.





The generic environmental measures that need to be undertaken during project

construction stage are given in Table-6.1.

TABLE-6.1

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING DURING PROJECT CONSTRUCTION STAGE

Sr. No.

Potential Impact

Action to be Followed Parameters for Monitoring

Frequency of Monitoring

All equipments are operated within specified design parameters.

Random checks of equipment logs/ manuals

Periodic

Vehicle trips to be minimized to the extent

possible

Vehicle logs Periodic during site clearance &

construction activities

Maintenance of DG set emissions to meet stipulated standards

Gaseous emissions (SO2, HC, CO, NOx)

Periodic emission monitoring

1 Air Emissions

Ambient air quality within the premises of the proposed unit to be

monitored.

The ambient air quality will conform to the standards for

SPM, RPM,SO2, NOx, and CO

As per CPCB/ SPCB requirement or

on monthly basis whichever is earlier

List of all noise generating machinery onsite along with age to be prepared. Equipment to be maintained in good working order.

Equipment logs, noise reading

Regular during construction activities

Night working is to be minimized.

Working hour records

Daily records

Generation of vehicular noise

Maintenance of records of vehicles

Daily records

2 Noise

Noise to be monitored in ambient air within the plant

premises.

Spot Noise recording As per CPCB/SPCB

requirement or on quarterly basis whichever is earlier

3 Wastewater Discharge

No untreated discharge to be made to surface water, groundwater or soil.

No discharge hoses shall be in vicinity of watercourses.

Periodic during construction activities

4 Soil Erosion Protect topsoil stockpile

where possible at edge of site.

Effective cover in

place.

Periodic during


5 Drainage and effluent Management

Ensure drainage system and specific design measures are working effectively. The design to incorporate existing drainage pattern and avoid disturbing the

same.

Visual inspection of drainage and records thereof


6 Waste Management

Implement waste management plan that

Comprehensive Waste Management

Periodic check during





Sr. No.

Potential Impact



identifies and characterizes every waste arising associated with proposed activities and which identifies the procedures for collection, handling &

disposal of each waste arising.

Plan should be in place and available for inspection on-site. Compliance with

MSW Rules, 1998 and Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling Rules), 2003


7 Non-routine events and accidental releases

Plan to be drawn up, considering likely emergencies and steps required to prevent/limit

consequences.

Mock drills and records of the same


8 Health Employees and migrant labour health check ups

All relevant parameters including HIV

Regular check ups

9 Environmental Management Cell/ Unit

The Environmental Management Cell/Unit is to be set up to ensure implementation and

monitoring of environmental safeguards.

Responsibilities and roles will be decided before the commencement of

work.

During construction phase

10 Loss of flora and fauna

Re-vegetation as per Forest guidelines

No. of plants, species

During site clearance Phase

6.3.2 Monitoring Schedule during Operational Phase

During operational stage, continuous air emissions from power boilers,

wastewater disposal to river, non-hazardous waste such as ash, hazardous used

oily wastes are expected.

The following attributes which merit regular monitoring based on the

environmental setting and nature of project activities are listed below:

• Source emissions and ambient air quality;

• Groundwater Levels and ground water quality;

• Water and wastewater quality (water quality, effluent & sewage quality etc);

• Solid and hazardous waste characterisation (fly ash, bottom ash, oily wastes,

ETP sludge, used and waste oil);

• Soil quality;

• Noise levels (equipment and machinery noise levels, occupational exposures

and ambient noise levels); and

• Ecological preservation and afforestation.

The following routine monitoring programme as detailed in Table-6.2 shall be

implemented at site. Besides to this monitoring, the compliances to all

environmental clearance conditions and regular permits from SPCB/MoEF shall be

monitored and reported periodically.





TABLE-6.2

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE

Sr. No.

Potential Impact



Stack emissions from power boilers to be optimized and monitored

Gaseous emissions (SPM, SO2, CO, NOx)

Continuous monitoring using on-line equipment during operation phase

Stack emissions from DG set to be optimized and monitored

Gaseous emissions (SO2, HC, CO, NOx)

Periodic during operation phase

Ambient air quality within the premises of the proposed unit and nearby habitations to be monitored. Exhaust from vehicles to be minimized by use of fuel

efficient vehicles and well maintained vehicles having PUC certificate.

SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx, CO and HC. Vehicle logs to be

maintained

As per CPCB/ SPCB requirement or on weakly basis whichever is earlier

Measuring onsite data of Meteorology

Wind speed, direction, temp., relative humidity and rainfall.

Continuous monitoring using on-line weather station during operation phase

1 Air Emissions

Vehicle trips to be minimized to the extent possible

Vehicle logs Daily records

Noise generated from operation of power boilers/cooing towers to be optimized and monitored Noise generated from operation of DG set to be

optimized and monitored DG sets to generate less than 75 dB(A) Leq at 1-m from the source DG sets are to be provided at basement with acoustic enclosures

Spot Noise Level recording; Leq(night), Leq(day), Leq(dn)


2 Noise

Generation of vehicular

noise

Maintain records

of vehicles

Periodic during

operation phase

No untreated discharge to be made to surface water, groundwater or soil.

Regular check ups Periodic during operation phase

Take care in disposal of wastewater generated such that soil and groundwater resources are protected

Discharge norms for effluents


3 Wastewater Discharge

Compliance of wastewater pH, TSS, TDS, Once in a week





Sr. No.

Potential Impact



discharge to standards BOD, COD & Temperature

during operation phase

Compliance of treated sewage to standards

Comprehensive as per GSR 422(E)

Once in a season

4 Drainage and effluent Management

Ensure drainage system and specific design measures are working effectively. Design to incorporate existing drainage pattern and avoid disturbing the same.

Visual inspection of drainage and records thereof


Monitoring used water quality, groundwater quality around ash pond and ground water levels

Comprehensive monitoring as per IS 10500 Groundwater level in meters bgl


5 Water Quality and Water Levels

River water quality downstream to discharge

As per IS 2296

Once in a week

6 Work zone air contamination

Contaminants such as VOCs to be reduced by providing adequate ventilation

Monitoring of indoor air contaminants such as CO, CO2 and VOCs.

As per CPCB/ SPCB requirement

7 Emergency preparedness, such as fire fighting

Fire protection and safety measures to take care of fire and explosion hazards, to be assessed and steps taken for their prevention.

Mock drill records, on site emergency plan, evacuation plan


8 Maintenance of flora and fauna

Vegetation, greenbelt / green cover development

No. of plants, species


9 Waste Management

Implement waste management plan that identifies and characterizes every waste arising associated with proposed

activities and which identifies the procedures for collection, handling & disposal of each waste arising.

Records of solid waste generation, treatment and disposal


10 Soil quality Maintenance of good soil quality

Physico-chemical parameters and metals.

Periodical monitoring at ash pond site

11 Health Employees and migrant labour health check ups

All relevant parameters including HIV

Regular check ups

6.4 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis of Environmental Monitoring

All environmental monitoring and relevant operational data will be stored in a

relational database and should be able to link to GIS system. This will enable

efficient retrieval and storage and interpretation of the data. Regular data

extracts and interpretive reports will be sent to the regulator.





6.4.1 Air Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis

6.4.1.1 Stack Monitoring

The emissions from all the stacks shall be monitored regularly. The exit gas

temperature, velocity and pollutant concentrations shall be measured. Any

unacceptable deviation from the design values shall be thoroughly examined and

appropriate action shall be taken. Air blowers shall be checked for any drop in exit

gas velocity. Corrections are made online and continuous basis in each hourly basis

and any deviations are controlled on the spot and on line basis.

6.4.1.2 Workspace Monitoring

The concentration of air borne pollutants in the workspace/work zone environment

shall be monitored periodically. If concentrations higher than threshold limit values

are observed, the source of fugitive emissions shall be identified and necessary

measures taken. Methane and non-methane hydrocarbons shall be monitored in

oil storage area once in a season. If the levels are high suitable measures as

detailed in EMP shall be initiated. These are controlled by the walk down checks of

the operation staff and rectify on daily basis.

6.4.1.3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

The ground level concentrations of SPM, SO2 and NOX in the ambient air shall be

monitored at regular intervals. Any abnormal rise shall be investigated to identify

the causes and appropriate action shall be initiated. Greenbelt shall be developed

for minimising dust propagation. The ambient air quality data should be transferred

and processed in a centralised computer facility equipped with required software.

Trend and statistical analysis should be done. These results are logged and

reviewed for correction on shift basis by HOD operation and reviewed periodically

during weekly and monthly reviews.

6.4.2 Water and Wastewater Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis

To ensure a strict control over the water consumption, flow meters shall be

installed for all major inlets. All leakages and excess shall be identified and

rectified. In addition, periodic water audits shall be conducted to explore further

possibilities for water conservation.

Methods prescribed in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and

Wastewater" prepared and published jointly by American Public Health

Association (APHA), American Water Works Association (AWWA) is recommended.

Regular walk down checks are made within the plant on daily basis in each area

of the plant separately and is controlled through daily planning meetings.

6.4.2.1 Monitoring of Wastewater Streams

All the wastewater streams in the project area shall be regularly analysed for flow

rate and physical and chemical characteristics. Such analysis is carried out for

wastewater at the source of generation, at the point of entry into the wastewater

treatment plant and at the point of final discharge. These data shall be properly





documented and compared against the design values for any necessary corrective

action. This is checked on a daily basis and monthly reports are submitted to the

authorities concerned.

6.4.2.2 Monitoring of Groundwater

The monitoring of groundwater is the most important tool to test the efficiency of

ash pond performance. This is indispensable as it provides detection of the

presence of waste constituents in groundwater in case of leachate migration. In

this programme, water samples are taken at a predetermined interval and analysed

for specific pollutant expected to be in the leachate. For early detection of leachate

migration, if any, it is suggested to construct piezometers around the ash pond

site.

In addition to piezometers, monitoring wells should be installed to a depth of at

least 3-m below the maximum historic groundwater depth. Based on assumptions

and data about the characteristics of leachate to be generated, approximate

permeability of soils in the zone of aeration and direction and velocities of

groundwater flow, the maximum probable aerial extent of contaminant migration

can be estimated as a basis for establishing the position of monitoring wells.

A minimum of two ground monitoring wells should be typically installed at ash

disposal facility: one up-gradient well and one down-gradient well. It is suggested

to collect water samples and analyse. Records of analysis should be maintained.

All these observations are made on a daily & weekly basis and abnormalities are

controlled immediately.

6.4.3 Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment such as boiler house, cooling tower

area, DG house shall be monitored. The frequency shall be once in three months in

the work zone. Similarly, ambient noise levels near habitations shall also be

monitored once in three months. Audiometric tests should be conducted

periodically for the employees working close to the high noise sources. Periodic

checks and walk down checks are made on shift basis and any abnormality is

attended immediately.

6.5 Reporting Schedules of the Monitoring Data

It is proposed that voluntary reporting of environmental performance with

reference to the EMP should be undertaken.

The environmental monitoring cell shall co-ordinate all monitoring programmes at

site and data thus generated shall be regularly furnished to the State regulatory

agencies.

The frequency of reporting shall be on six monthly basis to the local state PCB

officials and to Regional office of MoEF. The Environmental Audit reports shall be

prepared for the entire year of operations and shall be regularly submitted to

regulatory authorities.





6.6 Infrastructure for Monitoring of Environmental Protection Measures

A well-equipped laboratory with consumable items shall be provided for monitoring

of environmental parameters in the site. Alternatively, monitoring can be

outsourced to a recognized reputed laboratory.

The following equipment and consumable items shall be made available in the site

for environmental monitoring or alternatively the monitoring can be outsourced by

engaging a reputed authorised environmental laboratory.

Air Quality and Meteorology

High volume samplers, Stack monitoring kit, Personal Dust sampler, Central

Weather Monitoring Station, Spectrophotometer (visible range), Single pan

balance, Flame photometer, Relevant Chemicals as per IS:5182.

Water and Wastewater Quality

The sampling shall be done as per the standard procedures laid down by IS:2488.

The equipments and consumables required are:

BOD incubator, COD reflex set-up, Refrigerator, Oven, Stop watch, Thermometer,

pH meter, Distilled water plant, Pipette box, Titration set, Dissolved oxygen

analyser, Relevant chemicals.

Noise Levels

Noise monitoring shall be done utilising an integrating sound level meter to record

noise levels in different scales like A-weighting with slow and fast response options.



Chapter-7

Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan


7.0 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

7.1 Introduction

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various

hazards (unsafe conditions) that exist in the proposed power plant operations. On

the other hand, risk analysis deals with the recognition and computation of risks,

the equipment in the plant and personnel are prone to, due to accidents resulting

from the hazards present in the plant.

Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. It involves the identification and

assessment of risks the neighboring populations are exposed to as a result of

hazards present. This requires a thorough knowledge of failure probability, credible

accident scenario, vulnerability of population etc. Much of this information is difficult

to get or generate. Consequently, the risk analysis is often confined to maximum

credible accident studies.

In the sections below, the identification of various hazards, probable risks in the

proposed power plant, maximum credible accident analysis, consequence analysis

are addressed which gives a broad identification of risks involved in the plant. The

Disaster Management Plan (DMP) has been presented.

7.2 Approach to the Study

Risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accidents consisting of

an event or sequence of events. The risk assessment study covers the following:

• Identification of potential hazard areas;

• Identification of representative failure cases;

• Visualization of the resulting scenarios in terms of fire (thermal radiation) and

explosion;

• Assess the overall damage potential of the identified hazardous events and the

impact zones from the accidental scenarios;

• Assess the overall suitability of the site from hazard minimization and disaster

mitigation point of view;

• Furnish specific recommendations on the minimization of the worst accident

possibilities; and

• Preparation of broad Disaster Management Plan (DMP), On-site and Off-site

Emergency Plan, which includes Occupational and Health Safety Plan.

• Check calls on random periodicity through dummy tests and responses.

7.3 Hazard Identification

Identification of hazards in the proposed power plant is of primary significance in the

analysis, quantification and cost effective control of accidents involving chemicals

and process. A classical definition of hazard states that hazard is in fact the

characteristic of system/plant/process that presents potential for an accident.

Hence, all the components of a system/plant/process need to be thoroughly

examined to assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned



Chapter-7



event/sequence of events, which can be termed as an accident. The following two

methods for hazard identification have been employed in the study:

• Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and

Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (GOI Rules,

1989); and

• Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based

on relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).

7.3.1 Classification of Major Hazardous Units

Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes; namely flammable

substances, unstable substances and toxic substances. The ratings for a large

number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity have been given

in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M. The major hazardous materials to be stored,

transported, handled and utilized within the facility have been summarized in the

Table-7.1. The fuel storage details and properties are given in Table-7.2 and

Table-7.3 respectively.

TABLE-7.1

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROPOSED TO BE STORED/TRANSPORTED

Materials Hazardous Properties

LDO UN 1203. Dangerous Goods class 3 – Flammable Liquid

HFO Dangerous Goods class 3 - Flammable Liquid

TABLE-7.2

CATEGORY WISE SCHEDULE OF STORAGE TANKS

Sr. No. Material No. of

Tanks Design Capacity

(KL) Classification

1 LDO 1 500 (each) Non-dangerous Petroleum

2 HFO 2 1000 (each) Non-dangerous Petroleum

TABLE-7.3

PROPERTIES OF FUELS USED IN THE PLANT

FBP MP FP UEL LEL Chemical Codes/Label TLV

°c %

HFO Flammable 5 mg/m3 350 -26 66 6.0 0.5

LDO Flammable 5 mg/m3 400 - 98 7.5 0.6

TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling Point

MP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point

UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

7.3.2 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989

Following accidents in the chemical industry in India over a few decades, a specific

legislation covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Govt. of India in



Chapter-7



1989 in conjunction with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as

GOI Rules 1989. For the purpose of identifying major hazard installations the rules

employ certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and explosive properties of

chemicals.

A systematic analysis of the fuels/chemicals and their quantities of storage has been

carried out, to determine threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 and

the applicable rules are identified. Applicability of storage rules are summarized in

Table-7.4.

TABLE-7.4

APPLICABILITY OF GOI RULES TO FUEL/CHEMICAL STORAGE

Threshold Quantity (T) for

Application of Rules Sr. No.

Chemical/ Fuel

Listed in Schedule

Total Quantity (KL) 5,7-9,13-15 10-12

1 LDO 3(1) 1X500 25 MT 200 MT

2 HFO 3 (1) 1X1000 25 MT 200 MT

7.4 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation

7.4.1 Methodology

An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose of identifying

and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, major process components,

utility and support systems, environmental factors, proposed operations, facilities,

and safeguards.

7.4.2 Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)

A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the major hazards

associated with storages and the processes of the plant. This is followed by

consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally, the vulnerable zones are

plotted for which risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. Preliminary

hazard analysis for fuel storage area and whole plant is given in Table-7.5 and

Table-7.6.

TABLE-7.5

PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR STORAGE AREAS

Unit Capacity (KL) Hazard Identified

LDO 1X500 Fire/Explosion

HFO 2X1000 Fire/Explosion

TABLE-7.6

PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR THE WHOLE PLANT IN GENERAL

PHA

Category Description of

Plausible

Hazard

Recommendation Provision

Environ-

mental

If there is any

leakage and

-- All electrical fittings and

cables are provided as per



Chapter-7



PHA Category

Description of Plausible Hazard

Recommendation Provision

factors eventuality of

source of

ignition.

the specified standards.

All motor starters are

flame proof.

Environ-

mental

factors

Highly

inflammable

nature of the

liquid fuels may

cause fire hazard

in the storage

facility.

A well designed fire

protection including

foam, dry powder, and

CO2 extinguisher should

be provided.

Fire extinguisher of small

size and big size are

provided at all potential

fire hazard places. In

addition to the above, fire

hydrant network is also

provided.

7.4.3 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) Approach

Fire, Explosion and Toxicity Indexing (FE & TI) is a rapid ranking method for

identifying the degree of hazard. The application of FE & TI would help to make a

quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the hazard in these areas.

However, this does not provide precise information.

The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&EI as

per the criteria given below:

Sr. No. F&EI Range Degree of Hazard

1 0-60 Light

2 61-96 Moderate

3 97-127 Intermediate

4 128-158 Heavy

5 159 and above Severe

By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classified into one of

the following three categories established for the purpose (Table-7.7).

TABLE-7.7

FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Category Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) Toxicity Index (TI)

I F&EI < 65 TI < 6

II 65 < or = F&EI < 95 6 < or = TI < 10

III F&EI > or = 95 TI > or = 10

Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are recommended for

the three hazard categories.

7.4.3.1 Results of FE and TI for Storage/Process Units

Based on the GOI Rules 1989, the hazardous fuels used by the proposed power

plant were identified. Fire and Explosion are the likely hazards, which may occur due

to the fuel storage. Hence, Fire and Explosion index has been calculated for in plant

storage. Estimates of FE&TI are given in Table-7.8.



Chapter-7



TABLE-7.8

FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Sr. No. Chemical/

Fuel

Total Capacity

(KL)

F&EI Category TI Category

1 LDO 1X500 2.6 Light Nil -

2 HFO 2X1000 4.1 Light Nil -

7.4.4 Conclusion

Results of FE&TI analysis show that the storage of LDO and HFO falls into Light

category of fire and explosion index with a Nil toxicity index.

7.4.5 Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCAA)

Hazardous substances may be released as a result of failures or catastrophes,

causing possible damage to the surrounding area. This section deals with the

question of how the consequences of the release of such substances and the

damage to the surrounding area can be determined by means of models. Major

hazards posed by flammable storage can be identified taking recourse to MCA

analysis. MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the hazards and

calculate the consequent effects in terms of damage distances of heat radiation,

toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion etc. A host of probable or potential accidents

of the major units in the complex arising due to use, storage and handling of the

hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility. Depending upon the

effective hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect

on the surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be

assessed. The reason and purpose of consequence analysis are many folds like:

• Part of Risk Assessment;

• Plant Layout/Code Requirements;

• Protection of other plants;

• Protection of the public;

• Emergency Planning; and

• Design Criteria.

The results of consequence analysis are useful for getting information about all

known and unknown effects that are of importance when some failure scenario

occurs in the plant and also to get information as how to deal with the possible

catastrophic events. It also gives the workers in the plant and people living in the

vicinity of the area, an understanding of their personal situation.

• Selected Failure Cases

The purpose of this listing (refer Table 7.11) is to examine consequences of such

failure individually or in combination. It will be seen from the list that a vast range

of failure cases have been identified. The frequency of occurrence of failure also

varies widely.



Chapter-7



7.4.5.1 Damage Criteria

The fuel storage and unloading at the storage facility may lead to fire and explosion

hazards. The damage criteria due to an accidental release of any hydrocarbon arise

from fire and explosion. The vapors of these fuels are not toxic and hence no effects

of toxicity are expected.

Tank fire would occur if the radiation intensity is high on the peripheral surface of

the tank leading to increase in internal tank pressure. Pool fire would occur when

fuels collected in the dyke due to leakage gets ignited.

• Fire Damage

A flammable liquid in a pool will burn with a large turbulent diffusion flame. This

releases heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate of the liquid. A

part of the heat is radiated while the rest is convected away by rising hot air and

combustion products. The radiations can heat the contents of a nearby storage or

process unit to above its ignition temperature and thus result in a spread of fire.

The radiations can also cause severe burns or fatalities of workers or fire fighters

located within a certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know beforehand the

damage potential of a flammable liquid pool likely to be created due to leakage or

catastrophic failure of a storage or process vessel. This will help to decide the

location of other storage/process vessels, decide the type of protective clothing the

workers/fire fighters, the duration of time for which they can be in the zone, the fire

extinguishing measures needed and the protection methods needed for the nearby

storage/process vessels. The damage effect on equipment and people due to

thermal radiation intensity is given in Table-7.9. Similarly, the effect of incident

radiation intensity and exposure time on lethality is given in Table-7.10.

TABLE-7.9

DAMAGE DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITIES

Type of Damage Intensity Sr.

No. Incident Radiation (kW/m2)

Damage to Equipment Damage to People

1 37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% lethality in 1 min., 1% lethality in 10 sec.

2 25.0 Minimum energy required to ignite wood at indefinitely long exposure without a flame

100% Lethality in 1 min., Significant injury in 10 sec.

3 12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic tubing

1% lethality in 1 min. First degree burns in 10 sec

4 4.0 -- Causes pain if duration is longer than 20 sec, however blistering is un-likely (First degree burns)

5 1.6 -- Causes no discomfort on long exposures

Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank.



Chapter-7



TABLE-7.10

RADIATION EXPOSURE AND LETHALITY

All values are given in KW/m2

Radiation Intensity

(KW/m2) Exposure Time (seconds)

Lethality (%) Degree of Burns

1.6 -- 0 No Discomfort even

after long exposure

4.5 20 0 1st

4.5 50 0 1st

8.0 20 0 1st

8.0 50 <1 3rd

8.0 60 <1 3rd

12.0 20 <1 2nd

12.0 50 8 3rd

12.5 Inst 10 --

25.0 Inst 50 --

37.5 Inst 100 --

7.4.6 Scenarios Considered for MCA Analysis

7.4.6.1 Fuel Storage

The details of storages in the proposed power plant are given Table-7.2 above. In

case of fuel released in the area catching fire, a steady state fire will occur. Failures

in pipeline may occur due to corrosion and mechanical defect. Failure of pipeline due

to external interference is not considered as this area is licensed area and all the

work within this area is closely supervised with trained personnel.

7.4.6.2 Modeling Scenarios

Based on the storage and consumption of various fuels the following failure

scenarios for the proposed power plant have been identified for MCA analysis and

the scenarios are discussed in Table-7.11. The fuel properties considered in

modeling are given in Table-7.12.

TABLE-7.11

SCENARIOS CONSIDERED FOR MCA ANALYSIS

Sr. No.

Fuel/Chemical Total Quantity Scenarios Considered

1 Failure of LDO tank 1X500 Pool fire

2 Failure of two HFO tanks 2X1000 Pool fire

TABLE-7.12

PROPERTIES OF FUELS CONSIDERED FOR MODELING

Sr.

No.

Fuel Molecular weight

(kg/kg mol)

Boiling Point

(°°°°C)

Density

(kg/m3)

1 LDO 114.24 400 880

2 HFO 135.0 350 900



Chapter-7



7.4.7 Pool Fire Models used for MCA Analysis

Heat Radiation program ‘RADN’ has been used to estimate the steady state

radiation effect from storage of fuel at different distances. The model is based on

the equations compiled from various literatures by Prof.J.P.Gupta, Department of

Chemical Engineering, IIT Kanpur.

7.4.8 Results and Discussion

The results of MCA analysis are tabulated indicating the distances for various

damages identified by the damage criteria, as explained earlier. Calculations are

done for radiation intensities levels of 37.5, 25, 12.5, 4.5 and 1.6-kW/m2, which are

presented in Table-7.13 for different scenarios. The distances computed for various

scenarios are from the center of the pool fire.

TABLE-7.13

OCCURRENCE OF VARIOUS RADIATION INTENSITIES- POOL FIRE

Radiation Intensities (kW/m2)/

Distances (m) Radiation and Effect

37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 4.5 1.6

Failure of one LDO tank of 500 KL 12.1 15.2 17.8 22.6 40.4 72.8

Failure of two HFO tanks of 1000 KL

each

48.1 60.6 70.9 90.0 161.1 290.5

• Pool Fire Due to Failure of LDO Storage Tank (Figure-7.1)

The maximum capacity of storage of LDO in one tank will be 500 KL. The most

credible failure is the rupture of the largest pipe connecting to the storage tank.

As the worst case, it is assumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke

forming a pool, which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition.

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 kW/m2 (100% lethality)

occurs within the radius of the pool which is computed at 12.1-m tank on pool

fire. This vulnerable zone will damage all fuel storage equipment falling within the

pool radius.

Similarly, the threshold limit for first degree burns is 1.6 kW/m2, this vulnerable

zone in which the thermal fluxes above the threshold limit for first degree is

restricted to 72.8-m in case tank on pool fire.

• Pool Fire Due to Failure of HFO Storage Tanks

The maximum capacity of storage of HFO in each tank will be 1000 KL. The most

credible failure is the rupture of the largest pipe connecting to the storage tank.

As the worst case, it is assumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke

forming a pool, which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition.

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 kW/m2 (100% lethality)

occurs within the radius of the pool which is computed at 48.1-m tank on pool

fire. This vulnerable zone will damage all fuel storage equipment falling within the



Chapter-7



pool radius. Similarly, the threshold limit for first degree burns is 1.6 kW/m2, this

vulnerable zone in which the thermal fluxes above the threshold limit for first degree

is restricted to 290.5-m in case tank on pool fire.

7.4.9 Conclusions on MCA analysis

• LDO Tank Farm

There will be one LDO storage tank each of 500 KL capacity will be provided in

the LDO tank farm. The results of MCA analysis indicate that the maximum

damage distances for 12.5-Kw/m2 thermal radiations extends upto 22.6-m in the

case of one full tank of 500-KL on fire during worst meteorological conditions. As

the fire resistant dyke walls will be created, no cumulative effect of one tank form

on fire to create fire on other tank farm is envisaged. The damage contours for

tank on fire of one LDO tank is shown in Figure-7.1.

• HFO Tank Farm

The results of MCA analysis indicate that the maximum damage distances for

12.5-Kw/m2 thermal radiations extends upto 90.0-m in the case of two full tanks

on fire during worst meteorological conditions. As the fire resistant dyke walls will

be created, no cumulative effect of one tank farm on fire to create fire on other

tank farm is envisaged. The damage contours for tank on fire of two HFO tanks is

shown in Figure-7.2.

7.4.10 Coal Handling Plant - Dust Explosion

Coal dust when dispersed in air and ignited would explode. Crusher house and

conveyor systems are most susceptible to this hazard. To be explosive, the dust

mixture should have:

• Particles dispersed in the air with minimum size (typical figure is 400

microns);

• Dust concentrations must be reasonably uniform; and

• Minimum explosive concentration for coal dust (33% volatiles) is 50 gm/m3.

Failure of dust extraction and suppression systems may lead to abnormal

conditions and may increase the concentration of coal dust to the explosive limits.

Sources of ignition present are incandescent bulbs with the glasses of bulkhead

fittings missing, electric equipment and cables, friction, spontaneous combustion

in accumulated dust.

Dust explosions may occur without any warnings with Maximum Explosion

Pressure upto 6.4 bar. Another dangerous characteristic of dust explosions is that

it sets off secondary explosions after the occurrence of the initial dust explosion.

Many a times the secondary explosions are more damaging than primary ones.

The dust explosions are powerful enough to destroy structures, kill or injure

people and set dangerous fires likely to damage a large portion of the Coal

Handling Plant including collapse of its steel structure which may cripple the

lifeline of the power plant.



Chapter-7



FIGURE-7.1

DAMAGE CONTOUR FOR ONE LDO TANK (1X500 KL) ON FIRE



Chapter-7



FIGURE-7.2

DAMAGE CONTOUR FOR TWO HFO TANKS (2X1000 KL) ON FIRE



Chapter-7



Stockpile areas shall be provided with automatic garden type sprinklers for dust

suppression as well as to reduce spontaneous ignition of the coal stockpiles.

Necessary water distribution network for drinking and service water with pumps,

piping, tanks, valves etc will be provided for distributing water at all transfer

points, crusher house, control rooms etc. for nozzle dust suppression at the zones

like in the crusher chute below breaker plate and the consequent transfer points

will be provided with interlock provision for coal flow.

A centralized control room with microprocessor based control system (PLC) has

been envisaged for operation of the coal handling plant. Except for locally

controlled equipment like traveling tripper, dust extraction/ dust suppression /

ventilation equipment, sump pumps, water distribution system etc, all other in-

line equipment will be controlled from the central control room but will have

provision for local control as well. All necessary interlocks, control panels, MCC’s,

mimic diagrams etc will be provided for safe and reliable operation of the coal

handling plant.

7.4.10.1 Control Measures for Coal Yards

The total quantity of coal shall be stored in separate stockpiles, with proper drains

around to collect washouts during monsoon season.

Water sprinkling system shall be installed on stocks of coal in required scales to

prevent spontaneous combustion and consequent fire hazards. The stock

geometry shall be adopted to maintain minimum exposure of stock pile areas

towards predominant wind direction.

7.4.11 Identification of Hazards

The various hazards associated, with the plant process apart from fuel storage have

been identified and are outlined in Table-7.14.

TABLE-7.14

HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR PROCESS IN POWER PLANT

Sr. No. Blocks/Areas Hazards Identified

1 Coal storage in open yard Fire, Spontaneous Combustion

2 Coal Handling Plant including Bunker area

Fire and/or Dust Explosions

3 Boilers

Fire (mainly near oil burners), Steam Explosions, Fuel Explosions

4 Steam Turbine Generator Buildings

Fires in – a) Lube oil system b) Cable galleries c) Short circuits in: i)Control rooms ii) Switch-gears Explosion due to leakage of Hydrogen and fire following it.

5 Switch-yard Control Room Fire in cable galleries and Switch-gear/Control Room

6 LDO Tank Farms HFO Tank Farm

Fire



Chapter-7



7.4.12 Hazardous Events with Greatest Contribution to Fatality Risk

The hazardous event scenarios likely to make the greatest contribution to the risk

of potential fatalities are summarized in Table-7.15. ‘Onsite facility’ refers to the

operating site at plant site, whereas ‘offsite facility’ refers to transport and

handling systems, which are away from the operating site.

TABLE-7.15

HAZARDOUS EVENTS CONTRIBUTING TO RISK AT ON-SITE FACILITY

Hazardous Event Risk Rank Consequences of Interest

Onsite vehicle impact on

personnel

3 Potential for single fatalities, onsite impact

only

Entrapment/struck by

Machinery

3 Potential for single fatalities, onsite impact

only

Fall from heights 3 Potential for single fatalities, onsite impact

only

Electrocution 3 Potential for single fatalities, onsite impact

only

Storage tank rupture and

fire

3 Potential for multiple fatalities, onsite

impact only

7.4.13 Risk Assessment Summary

The preliminary risk assessment has been completed for the proposed power

plant and associated facilities and the broad conclusions are as follows:

• There will be no significant community impacts or environmental damage

consequences; and

• The hazardous event scenarios and risks in general at this facility can be

adequately managed to acceptable levels by performing the recommended

safety studies as part of detailed design, applying recommended control

strategies and implementing a Safety Management System. The equipment

are all provided with enough protection system to fail safe.

7.4.14 Risk Reduction Opportunities

The following opportunities shall be considered as a potential means of reducing

identified risks during the detailed design phase:

• Buildings and plant structures shall be designed for cyclone floods and seismic

events to prevent structural collapse and integrity of weather (water) proofing

for storage of dangerous goods;

• Provision for adequate water capacity to supply fire protection systems and

critical process water;

• Isolate people from load carrying/mechanical handling systems, vehicle traffic

and storage and stacking locations;



Chapter-7



• Installation of fit-for-purpose access ways and fall protection systems to

facilitate safe access to fixed and mobile plant;

• Provision and integrity of process tanks, waste holding tanks and bunded

areas as per relevant standards;

• Containment of hazardous materials;

• Security of facility to prevent unauthorized access to plant, introduction of

prohibited items and control of onsite traffic; and

• Development of emergency response management systems commensurate

with site specific hazards and risks (fire, explosion, rescue and first aid).

7.5 Disaster Management Plan

7.5.1 Disasters

A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into

helplessness and suffering and, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter,

medical and social care and other necessities of life.

Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, are disasters resulting

from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm surges,

cyclones, tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides, forest fires. The second

group includes disastrous events occasioned by man, or by man's impact upon the

environment. Examples are armed conflict, industrial accidents, radiation accidents,

factory fires, explosions and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, river

pollution, mining or other structural collapses, air, sea, rail and road transport

accidents which can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms of human loss.

There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in the abstract

since this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social

environment in which it occurs. What would be consider a major disaster in a

developing country, ill equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not mean

more than a temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their

wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the local,

national or international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes

the search for the dead and injured, medical and social care, removal of the debris,

the provision of temporary shelter for the homeless, food, clothing and medical

supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of essential services.

7.5.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan [DMP]

The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of

environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage

operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the

Disaster Management Plan, it should be widely circulated and personnel trained

through rehearsals/drills.



Chapter-7



The Disaster Management Plan should reflect the probable consequential severalties

of the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through 'Knock on' effects.

Further the management should be able to demonstrate that their assessment of

the consequences uses good supporting evidence and is based on currently

available and reliable information, incident data from internal and external sources

and if necessary the reports of out side agencies.

To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the plant or in the

immediate vicinity of the plant, a Disaster Management Plan has to be formulated.

The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the

combined resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the following:

• Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

• Safeguard other people;

• Minimize damage to property and the environment;

• Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;

• Identify any dead;

• Provide for the needs of relatives;

• Provide authoritative information to the news media;

• Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area; and

• Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the

cause and circumstances of the Emergency.

• Rescue plans to attend any emergency to be kept ready with plant within

beyond plant and conduct regular drills on that.

In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue, rehabilitate and render

medical help and to restore normalcy.

7.5.3 Emergencies

7.5.3.1 General Industrial Emergencies

The emergencies that could be envisaged in the plant and fuel storage are as

follows:

• A situation of fire at the hydrogen plant;

• A situation of fire at the tank farm of all storages;

• Slow isolated fires;

• Fast spreading fires;

• Structural failures;

• Contamination of food/water; and

• Sabotage/Social disorder.

7.5.3.2 Specific Emergencies Anticipated

• Fire and Explosion

Fire consequences can be disastrous, since they involve huge quantities of fuel

either stored or in dynamic inventory in pipelines or in nearby areas. Preliminary

hazard analysis has provided a basis for consequence estimation. Estimation can be



Chapter-7



made by using various pool fire, tank fire consequence calculations. During the

study of Risk Assessment, the nature of damages is worked out and probability of

occurrence of such hazards is also drawn up.

7.5.4 Emergency Organization

It is recommended to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive who has

control over the affairs of the plant should lead the Emergency Organization. He

shall be designated as Site Controller. General Manager [O & M] can be designated

as the Incident Controller. In the case of stores, utilities, open areas, which are not

under the control of the Production Heads, Senior Executive responsible for

maintenance of utilities would be designated as Incident Controller. All the Incident

Controllers would be reporting to the Site Controller. The actions are well defined as

to what action on the spot to be taken with what devotion in option to avert any

emergency situation.

Each Incident Controller, for himself, organizes a team responsible for controlling

the incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift-in-charge would be the

reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the Incidence

Controller and Site Controller. All major equipment will have periodic checks in each

shift and the action are to be follow with respect to each observatory during walk

down check specific to each equipment.

Apart from prevention, The Emergency Co-ordinators would be appointed. Each

Incident Controller, for him self, organizes a team responsible for controlling the

incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift-in-charge would be the

reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the Incidence

Controller and Site Controller. All major equipment will have periodic checks in each

shift and the action are to be follow with respect to each observatory during walk

down check specific to each equipment.

In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house in-charge, and

other maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of

power or communication system failure, some of staff members in the office/plant

offices would be drafted and their services would be utilized as messengers for quick

passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential

personnel.

All major equipments will have periodic checks in each shift and the to follow up

action during walk down check specific to each equipment.

7.5.4.1 Emergency Communication

Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc

should inform his immediate superior and Emergency Control Center. A place nearer

to the Gate House Complex shall be identified as Emergency Control Center. The

person on-duty in the Emergency Control Center should appraise the Site Controller.

Site Controller verifies the situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the

Shift In-charge and takes a decision about an impending On Site Emergency. This

would be communicated to all the Incident Controllers, Emergency Co-ordinators.



Chapter-7



Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the

instructions of the Site Controller.

7.5.5 Emergency Responsibilities

The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below:

7.5.5.1 Site Controller

On receiving information about emergency would rush to Emergency Control Center

(ECC) and take charge of ECC and the situation. His responsibilities would be as

indicated below:

• Assesses the magnitude of the situation on the advice of Incident Controller and

decides;

� Whether the effected area needs to be evacuated;

� Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated;

• Declares Emergency and orders for operation of emergency siren;

• Organizes announcement by public address system about location of

emergency;

• Assesses which areas are likely to be affected, or need to be evacuated or are to

be alerted;

• Maintains a continuous review of possible development and assesses the

situation in consultation with Incident Controller and other Key Personnel as to

whether shutting down the plant or any section of the plant is required and if

evacuation of persons is required;

• Directs personnel for rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire, brigade, medical and

other designated mutual support systems locally available, for meeting

emergencies;

• Controls evacuation of affected areas, if the situation is likely to go out of control

or effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory, informs the District

Emergency Authority, Police, Hospital and seeks their intervention and help;

• Informs Inspector of Factories, Deputy Chief Inspector of Factories, MSPCB and

other statutory authorities;

• Gives a public statement, if necessary;

• Keeps record of chronological events and prepares an investigation report and

preserves evidence; and

• On completion of On Site Emergency and restoration of normalcy, declares all

clear and orders for all clear warning.

• Keeping with the Union Government authorities to rend possible help in case

they are from the air force etc., as required.

7.5.5.2 Incident Controller

• Assembles the incident control team;

• Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to

personnel minimize damage to the plant, property and environment and

minimize the loss of materials;

• Directs the shutting down and evacuation of plant and areas likely to be

adversely affected by the emergency;



Chapter-7



• Ensures that key personnel help is sought;

• Provides advice and information to the Fire and Security Officer and the Local

Fire Services as and when they arrive;

• Ensures that all non-essential workers/staff of the affected areas are evacuated

to the appropriate assembly points, and the areas are searched for casualties;

• Has regard to the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any

inquiry into the causes and circumstances, which caused or escalated the

emergency;

• Co-ordinates with emergency services at the site;

• Provides tools and safety equipment to the team members;

• Keeps in touch with the team and advices them regarding the method of control

to be used; and

• Keeps the Site Controller of Emergency informed of the progress being made.

• All checks on a shift basis is done in each shift about the operation health which

ensures no emergency of the respective equipments.

7.5.5.3 Emergency Coordinator - Rescue, Fire Fighting

• On knowing about emergency, rushes to ECC;

• Helps the Incident Controller in containment of the emergency;

• Ensure fire pumps are in operating condition and instructs pump house operator

to ready for any emergency with standby arrangement;

• Guides the fire fighting crew i.e. firemen, trained plant personnel and security

staff;

• Organizes shifting the fire fighting facilities to the emergency site, if required;

• Takes guidance of the Incident Controller for fire fighting as well as assesses the

requirements of outside help;

• Arranges to control the traffic at the gate and the incident area;

• Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency

operations under his guidance and supervision;

• Evacuates the people in the plant or in the nearby areas as advised by Site

Controller;

• Searches for casualties and arranges proper aid for them;

• Assembles search and evacuation team;

• Arranges for safety equipment for the members of this team;

• Decides which paths the evacuated workers should follow; and

• Maintains law and order in the area, and if necessary seeks the help of police.

7.5.5.4 Emergency Coordinator-Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport and

Communication

• In the event of failure of electric supply and thereby internal telephone, sets up

communication point and establishes contact with the ECC;

• Organizes medical treatment to the injured and if necessary will shift the injured

to near by hospitals;

• Mobilizes extra medical help from outside, if necessary;

• Keeps a list of qualified first aid providers for the plant and seeks their

assistance;

• Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements;

• Makes sure that all safety equipment is made available to the emergency team;



Chapter-7



• Assists Site Controller with necessary data to coordinate the emergency

activities;

• Assists Site Controller in updating emergency plan, organizing mock drills,

verification of inventory of emergency facilities and furnishing report to Site

Controller;

• Maintains liaison with Civil Administration;

• Ensures availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation center.

• Liaises with Site Controller/Incident Controller;

• Ensures transportation facility;

• Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue/rehabilitation and emergency

expenditure;

• Controls rehabilitation of affected areas on discontinuation of emergency; and

• Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency

operation.

• All these equipment undergo routine/random checks on daily basis to ensure

their availability in actual emergency.

7.5.5.5 Emergency Coordinator - Essential Services

• Assists Site Controller and Incident Controller;

• Maintains essential services like Diesel Generator, Water, Fire Water,

Compressed Air/Instrument Air, power supply for lighting;

• Plans alternate facilities in the event of power failure, to maintain essential

services such as lighting, etc;

• Organizes separate electrical connections for all utilities and emergency services

so that in the event of emergency or fires, essential services and utilities are not

affected;

• Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation of

certain sections etc. to shift in-charge and electricians; and

• Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipment and other

emergency materials, spares etc. Inventory checks are done on some specific periodicity.

7.5.5.6 General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency

During an emergency, which becomes more enhanced and pronounced when an

emergency warning is raised, the workers who are in-charge of process equipment

should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend to any prescribed duty as

essential employee. If no such responsibility is assigned, he should adopt a safe

course to assembly point and await instructions. He should not resort to spreading

panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency personnel towards meeting the

objectives of DMP. In any major emergency all the employees are trained to the

minimum capability on how to work n the most emergency conditions on the major

fire retarding work etc.



Chapter-7



7.5.6 Emergency Facilities

7.5.6.1 Emergency Control Center (ECC)

The following information and equipment are to be provided at the Emergency

Control Center (ECC).

• Intercom, telephone;

• P and T telephone;

• Self contained breathing apparatus;

• Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets;

• Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indications;

• Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories (internal, P and T)

• Plant layout, site plan;

• Emergency lamp/torch light/batteries;

• Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, plant control room, sources of

safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue location vulnerable

zones, escape routes;

• Hazard chart;

• Emergency shut-down procedures;

• Nominal roll of employees;

• List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of Emergency

Coordinators;

• Duties of key personnel;

• Address with telephone numbers and key personnel, emergency coordinator,

essential employees; and

• Important address and telephone numbers including Government agencies,

neighboring industries and sources of help, outside experts, fuel fact sheets and

population details around the factory.

• Closed circuit TV covering all the prime locations of the plant viewed at 3 to 4

strategic points in addition to unit control rooms will be available.

7.5.6.2 Assembly Point

Number of assembly points, depending upon the plant location, would be identified

wherein employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management

would be assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus,

minimum facilities like water etc would be organized.

In view of the size of plant, different locations would be ear marked as assembly

points. Depending upon the location of hazard, the assembly points are to be used.

7.5.6.3 Fire Fighting Facilities

First Aid and Fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained in

each section in the plant. This would be as per statutory requirements. However,

fire hydrant line covering major areas would be laid. It would be maintained as 6-

kg/cm2 pressure. Fire alarms should be located in the bulk storage areas. Fire officer

will be the commanding officer of fire fighting services.



Chapter-7



7.5.6.4 Location of Wind Sock

Wind socks shall be installed at appropriate places in the plant to indicate direction

of wind for emergency escape.

7.5.6.5 Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first-aid materials for dealing with chemical

burns, fire burns etc would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the

emergency control room. Medical superintendent of the medical center will be the

head of the casualty services ward. Private medical practitioners help would be also

be sought. Government hospital would be approached for emergency help.

Apart from plant first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Names of

Medical Personnel, Medical facilities in the area would be prepared and updated.

Necessary specific medicines for emergency treatment of Patient’s Burns would be

maintained.

Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided

and maintained. Also, the help of nearby industries would be taken on mutual

support basis. A mini dispensary with all first aid equipment with 24 hour availability

medical attendant will be provided.

7.5.6.6 Ambulance

Availability of an ambulance with driver in all the shifts would be ensured to

transport injured or affected persons. Number of persons would be trained in first

aid so that, in every shift first aid personnel would be available. Random/Routine checks on the ambulance vehicle/driver about attention and availability will be

checked as per procedures.

7.5.7 Emergency Actions

7.5.7.1 Emergency Warning

The emergency would be communicated both to the personnel inside the plant and

the people outside. An emergency warning system shall be established for this

purpose.

7.5.7.2 Emergency Shutdown

There are number of facilities, which can be provided to help deal with hazardous

conditions, when a tank is on fire. The suggested arrangements are:

1. Stop feed;

2. Dilute contents;

3. Remove heat;

4. Deluge with water; and

5. Transfer contents.

Whether a given method is appropriate depends on the particular case.



Chapter-7



7.5.7.3 Evacuation of Personnel

There could be a number of persons in the storage area and other areas in the

vicinity. The area would have adequate number of exits, staircases. In the event of

an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly point. Operators

have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time Office shall maintain

a copy of deployment of employees in each shift at ECC. If necessary, persons can

be evacuated by rescue teams.

7.5.7.4 All Clear Signal

Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with Incident Controllers and

Emergency Co-ordinators, the Site Controller orders an all clear signal. When it

becomes essential, the Site Controller communicates to the District Emergency

Authority, Police, Fire Service personnel regarding help required or development of

the situation into an Off-Site Emergency. The on-site emergency organization chart

for various emergencies is shown in Figure-7.3.

7.5.8 General

7.5.8.1 Employee Information

During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific

pattern. Employees would be given training of escape routes and taking shelter.

Employees would be provided with information related to fire hazards, antidotes and

first aid measures. Those who would be designated as key personnel and essential

employees should be given training for emergency response.

7.5.8.2 Public Information and Warning

The industrial disaster effects related to this plant may mostly be confined to the

plant area. The detailed risk analysis has indicated that the pool fire effects would

not be felt outside. However, as an abundant precaution, the information related to

fuels in use would be furnished to District Emergency Authority for necessary

dissemination to general public and for any use during an off site emergency. Plants

of this size and nature have been in existence in our country for a long time.

7.5.8.3 Co-ordination with Local Authorities

Keeping in view of the nature of emergency, two levels of coordination are

proposed. In the case of an On Site Emergency, resources within the organization

would be mobilized and in the event extreme emergency local authorities help

would be sought.

In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local authority

and District Emergency Authority (normally the Collector) would be appraised and

under his supervision, the Off Site Disaster Management Plan would be exercised.

For this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e. medical, transport,

personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organizations etc would be mustered.

Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock drills would be organized.



Chapter-7



Operator

Shift Incharge

Safety Officer

Site ControllerRoom

Emergency Control

Emergency Coordinaror Emergency Coordinaror

(Medical,Mutual,Aid

Rehabilitation,Transportand Communication)

(Rescue,Fire Fighting)

Electrician, First Aid,

Transport-Driver

Telephone-Operator

ElectricianPump Operator

Emergency Coordinaror

(Essential Services)

Pump Operator

Shift Incharge

Incident Controller

FIGURE-7.3

ON-SITE EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION CHART



Chapter-7



7.5.8.4 Mutual Aid

Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers, special protective

equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc would be sought from the

neighboring industries.

7.5.8.5 Mock Drills

Emergency preparedness is an important part of planning in Industrial Disaster

Management. Personnel would be trained suitably and prepared mentally and

physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated procedures.

Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel would be trained in the

operations.

7.5.8.6 Important Information

Once the Plant goes on stream, important information such names and addresses of

key personnel, essential employees, medical personnel outside the plant,

transporters address, address of those connected with Off Site Emergency such as

Police, Local Authorities, Fire Services, District Emergency Authority would be

prepared and maintained.

7.6 Off-site Emergency Preparedness Plan

The task of preparing the Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the District Collector;

however the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district

authorities. The proposed plan will be based on the following guidelines.

7.6.1 Introduction

Off-site emergency plan would follow the on-site emergency plan. When the

consequences of an emergency situation go beyond the plant boundaries, it

becomes an off-site emergency. Off-site emergency is essentially the responsibility

of the public administration. However, the plant management will provide the public

administration with the technical information relating to the nature, quantum and

probable consequences on the neighboring population.

The off-site plan in detail will be based on those events, which are most likely to

occur, but other less likely events, which have severe consequence, will also be

considered. Incidents which have very severe consequences yet have a small

probability of occurrence would also be considered during the preparation of the

plan. However, the key feature of a good off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its

application to emergencies other than those specifically included in the formation of

the plan.

The roles of the various parties who will be involved in the implementation of an off-

site plan are described below. Depending on local arrangements, the responsibility

for the off-site plan would either rest with the plant management or with the local

authority. Either way, the plan would identify an emergency coordinating officer,

who would take the overall command of the off-site activities. As with the on-site



Chapter-7



plan, an emergency control center would be setup within which the emergency

coordinating officer can operate.

An early decision will be required in many cases on the advice to be given to

people living "within range" of the accident - in particular whether they should be

evacuated or told to go indoors. In the latter case, the decision can regularly be

reviewed in the event of an escalation of the incident. Consideration of evacuation

may include the following factors:

• In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage tank),

only houses close to the fire are likely to need evacuation, although a severe

smoke hazard may require this to be reviewed periodically; and

• If a fire is escalating and in turn threatening a store of hazardous material, it

might be necessary to evacuate people nearby, but only if there is time; if

insufficient time exists, people should be advised to stay indoors and shield

themselves from the fire. This later case particularly applies if the installation at

risk could produce a fireball with very severe thermal radiation effects.

Although the plan will have sufficient flexibility built in to cover the consequences of

the range of accidents identified for the on-site plan, it will cover in some detail the

handling of the emergency to a particular distance from each major hazard works.

Power plant fire fighting system do have an extra fire fighting machine which will be

on the order of the shift in charge can proceed to any fire fighting work in a

neighborhood plant or any village or town etc.

7.6.2 Aspects Proposed to be considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which should be included in the emergency plan are:

• Organization

Detail of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,

emergency control centers.

Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their deputies

and other key personnel.

• Communications

Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network, list

of telephone numbers.

• Specialized Knowledge

Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call

e.g. those with specialized fuel knowledge, laboratories.

• Voluntary Organizations

Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc



Chapter-7



• Fuel Information

Details of the hazardous substances stored and a summary of the risk associated

with them.

• Meteorological Information

Arrangements for obtaining details of weather forecasts and weather conditions

prevailing at that time

• Humanitarian Arrangements

Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first aid,

ambulances and temporary mortuaries.

• Public Information

Arrangements for (a) Dealing with the media press office; (b) Informing relatives,

etc

• Assessment of Emergency Plan

Arrangements for:

(a) Collecting information on the causes of the emergency; and

(b) Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.

7.6.3 Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer

The various emergency services would be co-ordinated by an Emergency

Coordinating Officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The ECO

would liaison closely with the site main controller. Again depending on local

arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site

consequences, the external control would be passed to a senior local authority

administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state

government. The ECO will be equipped with address and phone numbers of

important agencies.

7.6.4 Role of the Local Authority

The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency

planning officer (EPO) appointed should carry out his duty in preparing for a whole

range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO should

liaison with the plant, to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan.

This liaison should ensure that the plan is continually kept upto date.

It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations which

will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are able

to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to

cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans should be

organized by the EPO.



Chapter-7



7.6.5 Role of Police

Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property

and controlling traffic movements.

Their functions should include controlling bystanders, evacuating the public,

identifying the dead and dealing with casualties, and informing relatives of death or

injury.

7.6.6 Role of Fire Authorities

The control of a fire should be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade

officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller

on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer should also have a similar

responsibility for other events, such as explosions. Fire authorities in the region

should be apprised about the location of all stores of flammable materials, water

and foam supply points, and fire-fighting equipment. They should be involved in on-

site emergency rehearsals both as participants and, on occasion, as observers of

exercises involving only site personnel.

7.6.7 Role of Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances and so on,

should have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they should form an

integral part of the emergency plan.

For major fires, injuries should be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a

varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but extreme

cases may be generally available in most hospitals.

Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities

additional to those available locally, and a medical "mutual aid” scheme should exist

to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the event of an

emergency.

7.6.8 Role of Government Safety Authority

This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to

satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the off-site plan

has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types including

major emergencies. They may wish to see well-documented procedures and

evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.

In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory

inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close

involvement in advising on operations.

The action plan suggested for control of the off-site emergencies is given in Table-

7.16.



Chapter-7



TABLE-7.16

OFF-SITE ACTION PLAN

Sr. No.

Action Required to be taken to Mitigate Disaster by Aid giving

agency

Responsible Agencies for taking action

Equipments/Material facilities required at site to mitigate Emergency

A 1 Arrangements for evacuation/ rescue of persons from zone of influence to predetermined camps

2 Caution to public by announcement

3 Traffic and Mob control by cordoning of the area

4 Law & order

5 Request to railway authority for keeping the nearest by railway gate open & to stop the up & down trains at the nearest railway station

Police Department

Self Breathing apparatus with spare cylinder Chemical gas mask with spare canister Vehicle with PA system Transportation for evacuation of people

B Control of fire

1 Scrubbing of the flashed off gas cloud with water curtain

2 To rescue trapped persons

3 If fire is big, keep surrounding area cool by spraying water

4 Communication to State Electricity Board to continue or cut off electric supply

5 Communication to water supply department for supplying water

District Fire Brigade

Self breathing apparatus with spare cylinders Foam/water fire tenders Gas mask with spare canisters Lime water Neck to toe complete asbestos suit, PVC hand gloves, gumboots, safety goggles Mobile scrubbing system along with suction arrangement.

C Medical facilities for affected persons (first aid and treatment)

Hospital and public health

Ambulance with onboard resuscitation unit, first aid, stretchers

D Identification of concentration of gas in zone of influence

Pollution Control Board

Gas detector

E Removal of debris and damaged structures

Municipal corporation

Provide bulldozers Provide cranes

F 1 Monitor the incoming and out going transports

2 Arrange emergency shifting of affected persons and non affected person to specified area

3 Arrange diesel/petrol for needed vehicles

Transport department

Provide traffic police at site Provide emergency shifting vehicles at site Provide stock of fuel for vehicles

G 1 Give all information related to

meteorological aspects for safe handling of affected area for living beings

2 Forecast important weather changes, if any

Meteorological

Department

Provide wind direction and

velocity instruments with temperature measurements Mobile van for meteorological parameter measurements

H1 Representatives of all departments are in the local crisis group; therefore they are expected to render services available with them. Since it is a group of experts with authority, the mitigating measures can be implemented speedily. The representatives from locals are also there so that communication with local people is easy and quick.

2 The district emergency or disaster control

Local Crises Group

Must have all resources at hand, specially disaster management plan and its implementation method. All relevant information related to hazardous industry shall available with crisis group Newspaper editor shall be a part of the group so that



Chapter-7



Sr. No.

Action Required to be taken to Mitigate Disaster by Aid giving

agency

Responsible Agencies for taking action

Equipments/Material facilities required at site to mitigate Emergency

officer / collector shall be the president and he shall do mock drill etc so that action can be taken in right direction in time

right and timely media release can be done

I 1 Collector shall be the President of District Crisis Group therefore all district infrastructure facilities are diverted to affected zone

2 All other functions as mentioned for local crisis group

District Crisis Group

All necessary facilities available at district can be made available at affected zone Control of law and order situation

7.7 Occupational Health and Safety

For large industries, where multifarious activities are involved during construction,

erection, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance; the men, materials

and machines are the basic inputs. Along with the boons, industrialization generally

brings several problems like occupational health and safety.

The industrial planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take steps to minimize

the impacts of industrialization and to ensure appropriate occupational health and

safety including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under

construction and erection, and operation and maintenance.

7.7.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and erection and

operation and maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude

and variety in the above phases.

• Construction and Erection

The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to

constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to

arrangements to reduce it within TLV's, necessary protective equipments shall be

supplied to workers.

• Operation and Maintenance

Remote observations of all people into & going out of gate through CCTV.The

problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is primarily

due to noise which could affect hearing. The necessary personal protective

equipments will be given to all the workers. The working personnel shall be given

the following appropriate personnel protective equipments.

� Industrial Safety Helmet;

� Crash Helmets;

� Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;

� Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;

� Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue color glasses;

� Welders equipment for eye and face protection;



Chapter-7



� Cylindrical type earplug;

� Ear muffs;

� Canister Gas mask;

� Self contained breathing apparatus;

� Leather apron;

� Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves;

� Boiler suit;

� Safety belt/line man's safety belt;

� Leather hand gloves;

� Asbestos hand gloves;

� Acid/Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;

� Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;

� Lead hand glove;

� Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves; and

� Industrial safety shoes with steel toe.

� Remote observations of all people into & going out of gate through CCTV.

� Fire resistant suits covering complete body to walk through fire.

Full-fledged hospital facilities shall be available round the clock for attending

emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel shall be medically

examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of employment.

This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.

7.7.2 Safety Plan

Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of

concern. Safety plan shall be prepared and implemented in the proposed power

plant. The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is

known as emergency plan. The disaster in the plant is possible due to collapse of

structures and fire/explosion etc.

Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and

maintenance phases, the power plant would formulate safety policy with the

following regulations:

• To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work;

• To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in

the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and

equipment;

• To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees;

• To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and

clothing and to ensure their proper use;

• To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their

work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;

• To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making

necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and

upto date knowledge;

• To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and

illness at work;

• To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to



Chapter-7



employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is

given to these matters;

• To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate

fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this

service;

• To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness

and incident involving people injury or injury to health with a view to taking

corrective, remedial and preventive action;

• To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and

safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;

• To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language

of employees;

• To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/processes involved

in a plant; and

• To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals

of all buildings, equipments, work places and operations.

• A book with fill fledged micro- details of all safety equipment system in the plant

will be available at all vital points of the plant. The same is duplicated in control

rooms; shift in charge’s room and the O & M head as well.

7.7.3 Safety Organization

• Construction and Erection Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer shall be appointed. The responsibilities of

the safety officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts

of workers and advise on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training

programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to

occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of

Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of safety officer by

industry, every contractor, who employs more than 250 workers, shall also employ

one safety officer to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions

of contract.

• Operation and Maintenance Phase

When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers shall be in

accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and

responsibilities shall be as defined there of.

7.7.4 Safety Circle

In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of

hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be

constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from

that area. The circle normally shall meet for about an hour every week.

7.7.5 Safety Training

A full-fledged training center shall be set up at the plant. Safety training shall be



Chapter-7



provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members called from

Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular employees,

limited contractor labors shall also be provided safety training. To create safety

awareness safety films shall be shown to workers and leaflets shall be distributed.

Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent fires

are:

• Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of cable

passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and identifying the

area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and manual fire

fighting operations;

• Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops for

cable shafts;

• Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and

interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries;

• Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and

regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and

• Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.

7.7.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

The health of all employees shall be monitored once in a year for early detection of

any ailment due to exposure to heat and noise.



Chapter-8 Project Benefits


8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS

Proposed power plant will result in considerable growth of stimulating the

industrial and commercial activities in the state. Small and medium scale

industries may be further developed as a consequence.

Proposed power plant would be beneficial in reducing the existing and ever

escalating demand of electricity in eastern part of the country.

In operation phase, the proposed plant would require significant workforce of

non-technical and technical persons. Migration of persons with better education

and professional experience will result in increase of population and literacy in the

surrounding villages.

8.1 Availability of Quality Power

The proposed power plant would be generating about 1200-MW of energy and will

contribute to govt of India’s target of adding 100,000-MW power generation

capacity by 2012. The project will be beneficial in govt’s target of providing power

access to all people.

8.2 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure

The beneficial impact of proposed power plant on the civic amenities will be

substantial after the commencement of project activities. The basic requirement

of the community needs will be strengthened by extending healthcare,

educational facilities to the community, building/strengthening of existing roads in

the area. SKS Power Generation (Chhattisgarh) Limited a 100% subsidiary of SKS

Ispat and Power Ltd., amenities either by providing or by improving the facilities

in the area, which will help in uplifting the living standards of local communities.

The construction of new roads /strengthening of roads in the project area will

enhance the transportation facilities. With improved transportation facilities there

is always a scope for development.

8.3 Improvement in the Social Infrastructure

• Generation of employment: The project will create opportunities for direct and

indirect employment;

• Increase in purchasing power and improved standard of living of the area;

• Further development of small and medium scale industries may be developed

as consequence;

• Increased revenue to the state by way of royalty, taxes and duties;

• Overall Growth of the neighboring area viz.:

° Agriculture and animal husbandry;



Chapter-8 Project Benefits


° Health and family welfare;

° Watershed development;

° Sustainable livelihood and strengthening of village Self Help Groups; and

° Infrastructure development.

In addition to above, due to increase in purchasing power of local habitants:

• There shall be significant change in the socio-economic scenario of the area;

• The proposed project shall enhance the prospects of employment;

• Recruitment for the unskilled and semiskilled workers for the proposed project

will be from the nearby villages;

• The basic amenities viz. roads, transportation, electricity, proper sanitation,

educational institutions, medical facilities, entertainment etc will be developed

as far as possible; and

• Overall the proposed project will change living standards of the people and

improve the socio-economic conditions of the area.

8.4 Employment Potential

The impact of the project on the economic aspects can be clearly observed. The

proposed project activities will provide employment to persons of different skills

and trades. The local population will be given preference to employment. The

employment potential will ameliorate economic conditions of these families

directly and provide employment to many other families indirectly who are

involved in business and service oriented activities.

The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall

upgrade the prosperity of the region. This in-turn will improve the socio-economic

conditions of the area.

• During construction phase of the project, this project will provide temporary

employment to many unskilled and semi-skilled laborers in nearby villages.

This project will also help in generation of indirect employment to those

people who render their services for the personnel directly working in the

project; and

• During operational phase, considerable number of people will be benefited by

provision of services to the residents. Thus, the direct and indirect

employment generation by this project.

The trend of out migration for employment, if any, is likely to be reduced due to

better economic opportunities available in the area.

About 2000 people will be deployed temporarily during construction of the project

and about 400 people will be employed during operational stage of the project.


Chapter-9

Administrative Aspects


9.0 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS

9.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation

Environment Management will be headed by a senior manager and will constitute

environmental engineer, scientists, chemists and supervisors. The Organizational

Structure of Environment Management is presented in Figure-9.1.

The Manager (Env) will be responsible for Environment management activities in

the proposed project. Basically, this department will supervise the monitoring of

environmental pollution levels viz. source emission monitoring, ambient air quality,

water and effluent quality, noise level either departmentally or by appointing

external agencies wherever necessary.

In case the monitored results of environmental pollution found to exceed the

allowable limits, the Environmental Management Cell will suggest remedial action

and get these suggestions implemented through the concerned authorities.

The Environmental Management Cell also co-ordinate all the related activities such

as collection of statistics of health of workers and population of the region,

afforestation and greenbelt development.


Chapter-9

Administrative Aspects


FIGURE-9.1

ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT

GENERAL MANAGER

(SERVICES)

DY. GENERAL MANAGER

(SERVICES)

MANAGER

(ENVIRONMENT)

SAFETY OFFICERENVIRONMENT

ENGINEER

ECOLOGIST/

HORTICULTURIST

CHEMISTS SUPPORT STAFF


Chapter-10

Disclosure of Consultants


10.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

VIMTA LABS LIMITED is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research laboratory in India. VIMTA provides contract research and testing services in the

areas of clinical research, pre-clinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, environmental assessments and analytical testing of a wide variety of products.

The Quality Policy:

• VIMTA is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in

its testing, validation and research services. • VIMTA shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,

impartiality and integrity in its operations. • VIMTA shall provide the services in accordance with national and international

norms. • VIMTA shall implement quality system as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable

GLPs & GCPs, to generate technically valid results/data.

• VIMTA shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.

Milestones and Accreditations:

• 1984 - Registered with an initial investment of Rs.2 lakhs

• 1985 - Recognized by ISI (now known as Bureau of Indian Standards)

• 1987 - Qualified by the criteria of Ministry of Environment and was notified as one of the 14 standard Environmental Laboratories published in the Gazettee of India

• 1988 - Licensed for carrying out tests on Drugs and Pharmaceuticals

• 1990 - Cherlapally land purchased with plans of larger, more comprehensive facility

• 1991 - Accredited by NCTCF, DST, Government of India (the forerunner of NABL)

• 1992 - Laboratories shifted to new facility at Cherlapally

• 1993 - State-of-the-art equipment worth Rs.60 million procured

• 1995 - Accredited by NABL under its revised scheme, certified by Standards Australia, Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC Guide 25 and ISO 9002

• 1996 - GLP Compliance

• 1997 - Restructing of Vimta from 165 to 100 associates with same performance

• 1998 - Accreditation by GOSSTANDART and joint venture for certification of Food Exports with ROSTEST, Russia

• World Bank Recognition

• 2002 - ANVISA Brazil certification

• 2003 - USFDA accepts Vimta Bioequivalence study report. Showcased Vimta at AAPS (USA) and ICSE-CPHI (Germany)

• 2003 - Vimta VHS Research Center inaugurated at Chennai, Launched district laboratories at Visakhapatnam and Vijayawada, Patient service centers


Chapter-10



launched at 160 locations across the country

• 2003 – Vimta Labs Recognized by Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

• 2004 - Vimta increases people strength from 225 in 2003 to 400 in 2004. Vimta achieves export turnover of $ 2.5 million

• 2004 - Vimta releases its first fortnightly medical newsletter “Vaidyalekha”, Vimta enters Gulf market - bags a contract for Environmental Consultancy in

Kuwait

• 2004 - Vimta acquires 10.7 acres of land in S.P.Biotech Park – Genome Valley, Hyderabad, to create a world class Research Laboratory of 150000 sq.ft by July 2005.

• 2004 – Vimta starts a new state of the art speciality services in Molecular Diagnostics at TICEL Bio-Tech Park” at Chennai.

Services Offered:

Spread over the 70,000 Sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad (India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural facility of the Central laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated instruments backed by an excellent team of professionals. The

40,000 Sq.ft, three-storied, 120 roomed, centrally air conditioned state-of-the-art Laboratory equipped with Rs.100 million worth analytical instruments and computerized data management systems, all under one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing and research sector.

Vimta offers various services under the following divisions:

• Environment • Analytical • Clinical Reference Lab • Clinical Research

The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over India including a strong association with international consultants like Japan Bank

for International cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal Inc. - USA, BBL - UK, Rudal Blanchard – UK, E&E Solutions – Japan, NEPESCO & KNPC – Kuwait and others. Vimta Laboratory has the following credentials:

• Recognitions by BIS; • Recognitions by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India; • Recognitions by State Pollution Control Boards; • Recognitions by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL) ;

• Recognitions by Ministry of Defense, Govt. of India; • Recognitions by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India; • Recognitions by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;

• Accreditations by NCTCF; • Accreditations by GOSSTANDART; • Certification from Standard Australia; • Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;

• Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025; and • Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines


Chapter-10



VIMTA-Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural resources on earth for future generations, Vimta offers extensive research and

consultancy services in the field of Environment. With its rich experience, multi-disciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical equipment, the services offered by Vimta are wide ranging and encompasses

entire gamut of Environmental Management and Monitoring Services. With its emphasis on quality services, Vimta, over the years, has evolved itself into a single reference point in India for Comprehensive Environmental Services.

� Services Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services offered by the Division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of

industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit of a green globe. The services under Environmental Assessments include:

• Site Selection and Liability Studies; • Environmental Impact Assessments; • Environment Management Plans; • Carrying Capacity based Regional Studies;

• Environmental Audits; • Solid and Hazardous Waste Management; • Risk Assessment (MCA,HAZON,HAZOP) & DMP;

• Occupational Health and Safety, Industrial Hygiene; • Environmental Monitoring for Air, Meteorology, Water, Soil, Noise, Ecology

and Socio-Economic; • Industrial Emission Source Monitoring;

• Offshore Sampling and Analysis of Marine Water and Sediments; • Marine Ecological Studies; • Marine Impact Assessment; • Rehabilitation and Resettlement Studies;

• Forestry and Ecological Studies; • Geological and Hydro-geological Studies; • Land Use /Land Cover Studies based on Remote Sensing;

• Socio-Economic Studies; • Due Diligence Studies; • Epidemiological Studies; • Wasteland Management Studies; and

• Study on Bio-indicators. The services under Environmental Chemistry include:

� Analysis of Water, Wastewater, Soil, Solid Waste, Hazardous waste as per

Indian and International Codes; � Source Emissions and Work Zone Air/Noise quality monitoring;

� Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCB’s, TCLP metals, TOC etc; � Categorization of Hazardous Waste; and � Pesticide Residue Analysis.


Chapter-10



� Facilities

Vimta-Environment Division is located in scientifically designed Central Laboratory with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer wide range of services in indoor

and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of Environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team of professionals in the fields of Science, Engineering, Ecology, Meteorology, Social

Planning, Geo & Hydro-geology, and Environmental Planning. Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as Respirable Dust Samplers, Automatic Weather Monitoring Stations, Stack Monitoring Kits, Personal

Samplers, Noise Meters, Portable Water Kits etc, the other major specialized equipment include:

• Monostatic Sodar–Designed by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;

• Integrated Noise Level Meter–Quest, U.S.A; • Flue Gas Analyzers–Testo, Germany; • 113-A Gravimetric Dust Sampler-Casella, London;

• ICP AES– Varian, USA; • Gas Liquid Chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPD–Varian, USA; • Gas Chromatograph with Mass Detector–Varian, USA; • Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]–Varian, USA;

� Quality Systems

The fact that Environment division and its supporting Site Laboratories are accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests and by other international bodies such as Asian Development Bank (ADB) and World Bank stands testimony to its emphasis on Quality Systems.

� Achievements

Being the first laboratory to be recognized under Environment Protection (EP) Act

by GOI in 1986, Environment Division with its best mind power and industrial knowledge competency that allows it to compare with the best in the business.

• The Environment Division till date has executed about 350 Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Studies with Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plans and obtained statutory approvals.

• Supported by the strong modern laboratory support and experienced hands,

Environment division is well equipped in conducting Due Diligence, Phase-I

and Phase-II studies. • Undertaken specialized studies such as Regional Environmental Impact

Assessment on Carrying Capacity Principle; Upper Air Meteorological studies

using SODAR for major Industrial Complexes.

• Associated with prestigious studies such as Environmental Pollution monitoring around Taj Trapezium, Pre and Post Satellite launch studies for


Chapter-10



SHAR, ISRO and monitoring for offshore Oil & Gas exploration for deep-sea water and sediment sampling.

• The services offered include wide spectrum of industries covering Power,

Chemical, Cement, Mining, Steel & Alloys, Metallurgical, Dye & Intermediates, Bulk Drugs, Pesticides, Agro-Chemicals, Petro-Chemicals, Refineries, Pulp & Paper, Oil & Gas Exploration & Production, Asbestos, Infrastructure, River

valley, Foundries etc. • The Environment division has also offered its services to major infrastructure

projects such as Ports, Oil & Gas Pipelines, Green field Air Ports, Roads and

Highways. Vimta Labs Ltd have a strong team of qualified environmental engineers, scientists and planners, all of whom have worked on EIA/EMP studies and are

hence familiar with the requirements of the study. The key personnel deployed for the project are listed below.


Chapter-10 Disclosure of Consultants


DETAILS OF PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CURRENT EIA/EMP REPORT

Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience

1 Mr. M.Janardhan M.Tech (Env) Vice President (Environment)

Co-ordination About 15 years of experience in the field of air quality impacts, environmental management and environmental engineering

2 Mr. E.Shyam Sundar M.Sc., M.Phil (Chem) PGDES

Assoc. Vice President (Env. Projects)

Project Manager About 15 years of experience in the field of Water and Wastewater Quality & Impacts, Environmental Chemistry

and Monitoring

3 Dr.M.V.R.N.Acharyulu M.Sc., Ph.D (Ecology)

Group Leader Expert About 16 years of experience in the field of Terrestrial, Aquatic and Marine Ecology

4 Mr. K.V.Kishore Babu M.Tech (Env) Env. Engineer Expert About 7 years of experience in the field of Environmental Impact Assessments, Risk Assessment and Wastewater Management

5 Mr. S. Karunakar M.Tech (Env) Env. Engineer Expert About 2 years of experience in the field of Environmental Impact Assessments, Risk Assessment and Wastewater Management

6 Mr. KV Suryanarayana M.Sc., M.Tech (Env) Scientist Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environmental Chemical Analysis and Baseline Monitoring

7 Mr. Vijay Krishna M.Tech (Env) Env. Engineer Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environmental Impact Assessment studies

8 Mr. Aditya Srinivas M.Sc. (Env) Scientist Expert About 7 years of experience in the field of Environmental Chemical Analysis

9 Ms. P. Bhavna M.Tech (Env) Env. Engineer Expert About 4 years of experience in the field of Environmental Impact Assessment studies

10 Dr. Mary Sukanya M.Sc., Ph.D Scientist Expert About 6 years of experience in the field of Environmental Teaching and Quality Control

11 Mr. P.Niranjan Babu B.Com Asst Manager Secretarial About 18 years of experience in the field of Environmental Monitoring and secretarial assistance

12 Mr. P.Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Draftsman Cartography About 8 years experience in the field of Environmental

and Civil Drawings

13 Mr. J.Rama Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Draftsman Cartography About 7 years experience in the field of Environmental and Civil Drawings

14 Ms. Sireesha B.Sc. Lab Assistant Secretarial About 2 years of experience in Secretarial Assistance

15 Mr. Ram Kumar Kalyan Intermediate Lab Assistant Secretarial About 4 years of experience in Secretarial Assistance

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-1

No. J-13012/164/2007-IA.II(T)

Government of India

Ministry of Environment & Forests

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-2

Paryavaran Bhavan,

C.G.O. Complex, Lodi Road,

New Delhi-110003.

Telefax.: 2436 2434

Dated the 9th

July, 2008

To

M/s SKS Ispat and Power Ltd.

501 B, Elegant Business Park,

Andheri Kurla Road,

J.B. Nagar, Andheri (E),

Mumbai ? 400 059.

Sub: 1200 MW Coal based Thermal Power Project at Kharsia Tehsil, District

Raigarh, Chhattisgarh of M/s SKS Ispat and Power Ltd - Prescribing of

TOR - Regarding.

The undersigned is directed to refer to your communication

no.SKSIPL/IPP/TOR/RGH/005 dated 6.5.2008 regarding the subject mentioned above.

2. The proposal is for setting up of a 1200 MW (4x300 MW) coal based thermal power

project at village Binjkote, Darramura, badejampally, Gindola villages in Kharsia Tehsil,

District Raigarh, Chhattisgarh. The land requirement is 1200 acres. The coordinates of the

project area are 220 00? 06?N, 83

0 12? 10? E; 22

0 00? 26?N, 83

0 12 51? E ; 22

0 01? 32?N,

830 11? 23? E; 22

0 01? 52?N, 83

0 12? 03?E. The coal requirement is 6.02 Million TPA (90%

PLF), which will be obtained from SECL mine and transported through road/rail. Water

requirement is estimated as 4500 m3/hr and will be met from river Mahanadi. Closed circuit

cooling will be provided. Two bi-flue stack of height 275 m will be provided.

3. The Expert Appraisal Committee for environmental appraisal of Thermal Power

and Coal Mine projects considered the project during its meeting held on June 11-

12, 2008. Based on the consideration of the documents submitted and the

presentation made by the project proponent, the Committee prescribed the

following Terms of Reference (TORs) for preparing draft EIA report for the above

mentioned project:

(i) Comparison of alternate sites considered and the reasons for selecting the

proposed site. Conformity of the site with the prescribed guidelines in

terms of distance HFL of the river, highways may also be shown.

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-3

(ii) All the coordinates of the plant site as well as ash pond demarcated on the

toposheet (1:50000 Scale).

(iii) Explore the possibility of having 2x600 MW/ 2x660 MW and examine the

adoption of super critical technology.

(iv) The study area should cover an area of 10 km radius around the proposed

site.

(v) Land use of the study area as well as the project area shall be given.

(vi) Location of any National Park, Sanctuary, Elephant / Tiger Reserve

(existing as well as proposed), migratory routes, if any, within 10 km of

the project site shall be specified and marked on the map duly

authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State.

(vii) Land requirement for the project to be optimized. Item wise break up of

land requirement and its availability to be furnished. The norms

prescribed by CEA should be kept in view.

(viii) Topography of the area should be given clearly indicating whether the site

requires any filling. If so, details of filling, quantity of fill material

required, its source, transportation etc. should be given.

(ix) Impact on drainage of the area and the surroundings.

(x) Information regarding surface hydrology and water regime and impact of

the same, if any, due to the project.

(xi) One season site-specific meteorological data shall be provided.

(xii) One complete season AAQ data (except monsoon) to be given along with

the dates of monitoring. The parameters to be covered shall include SPM,

RSPM, SO2 NOx and Ozone (ground level). The location of the

monitoring stations should be so decided so as to take into consideration

the pre-dominant downwind direction, population zone and sensitive

receptors including reserved forests. There should be at least one

monitoring station in the upwind direction.

(xiii) Impact of the project on the AAQ of the area. Details of the model used

and the input data used for modelling should also be provided. The air

quality contours may be plotted on a location map showing the location of

project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any. The wind roses

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-4

should also be shown on this map. It may be kept in view that SPM

emissions are to be restricted to 50 mg/Nm3.

(xiv) Fuel analysis to be provided (sulphur, ash content and mercury). Details

of auxillary fuel, if any including its quantity, quality, storage etc should

also be given.

(xv) Quantity of fuel required, its source and transportation. A confirmed fuel

linkage should be provided.

(xvi) Source of water and its availability. Commitment regarding availability of

requisite quantity of water from the competent authority.

(xvii) Details of rainwater harvesting and how it will be used in the plant.

(xviii) Examine the feasibility of zero discharge. In case of any proposed

discharge, its quantity, quality and point of discharge, users downstream

etc. should be provided.

(xix) Optimization of COC for water conservation. Other water conservation

measures proposed in the project should also be given.

(xx) Details of water balance taking into account reuse and re-circulation of

effluents.

(xxi) Details of greenbelt i.e. land with not less than 1500 trees per ha giving

details of species, width of plantation, planning schedule etc. About 1/3rd

of the area should be covered under greenbelt.

(xxii) Detailed plan of ash utilization / management.

(xxiii) Details of evacuation of ash.

(xxiv) Details regarding ash pond impermeability and whether it would be lined,

if so details of the lining etc.

(xxv) Detailed R&R plan/compensation package for the project affected people

shall be prepared taking into account the socio economic status of the area,

homestead oustees, land oustees, landless laboureres.

(xxvi) Details of flora and fauna, with list of the schedule of the Wildlife

(Protection) Act, 1972, duly authenticated should be provided. In case of

any scheduled fauna, conservation plan should be provided.

(xxvii) Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-5

etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the

casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

(xxviii)Details of water requirement during construction phase and its availability

and source with time schedule should be provided.

(xxix) Public hearing points raised and commitment of the project proponent on

the same. An action plan to address the issues raised during public hearing

and the necessary allocation of funds for the same should be provided.

(xxx) Measures of socio economic influence to the local community proposed to

be provided by project proponent. As far as possible, quantitative

dimension to be given.

(xxxi) Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such as road

network and whether any additional infrastructure would need to be

constructed and the agency responsible for the same with time frame.

(xxxii) EMP to mitigate the adverse impacts due to the project along with item

wise cost of its implementation.

(xxxiii) Risk assessment should be carried out. It should take into account the

maximum inventory of storage at site at any point in time. The risk

contours should be plotted on the plant layout map clearly showing which

of the proposed activities would be affected in case of an accident taking

place. Based on the same, proposed safeguard measures should be

provided. Measures to guard against fire hazards should also be provided.

(xxxiv) Details of the industries existing and/or proposed within 10 Km radius of

the project boundary should also be provided.

(xxxv) Any litigation pending against the project and /or any direction /order

passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof.

4. Besides the above, the following general points will be followed:-

a) All documents to be properly referenced with index, page numbers and

continuous page numbering.

b) Where data is presented in the report especially in table, the period in which

the data was collected and the source should invariably be indicated.

c) Where the documents provided are in a language other than English, an

English translation should be provided.

d) The Questionnaire for environmental appraisal of thermal power projects as

devised earlier by the Ministry shall also be filled and submitted.

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-6

In addition to the above, information on the following may also be incorporated in the

EIA report.

1. Is the project intended to have CDM-intent?

(i) If not, then why?

(ii) If yes, then

(a) Has PIN (Project Idea Note) {or PCN (Project Concept Note)} submitted to

the ?NCA? (National CDM Authority) in the MoEF?

(b) If not, then by when is that expected?

(c) Has PDD (Project Design Document) been prepared?

(d) What is the ?Carbon intensity? from your electricity generation projected

(i.e. CO2 Tons/MWH or Kg/KWH)

(e) Amount of CO2 in Tons/year expected to be reduced from the baseline data

available on the CEA?s web-site (www.cea.nic.in)

2. Notwithstanding 1(i) above, data on (d) & (e) above to be worked out and reported.

3. After preparing the draft EIA (as per the generic structure prescribed in Appendix-III

of the EIA Notification, 2006) covering the above mentioned issues, the proponent will

get the public hearing conducted and take further necessary action for obtaining

environmental clearance in accordance with the procedure prescribed under the EIA

Notification, 2006.

(Om Prakash)

Deputy Director

Copy to:-

1. The Secretary, Department of Environment, Mantralaya Chhattisgarh, Raipur-492001.

2. The Chairman, Chhattisgarh Environment Conservation Board, Nanak Niwas, Civil

Lines, Raipur-492 001.

3. The Chief Conservator of Forests (C), Regional Office (WZ), Ministry of

Environment & Forests, Kendriya Paryavaran Bhawan, Link Road No.-3, E-5, Arera

Colony, Bhopal ? 462 016.

4. Guard File.

(Om Prakash)

Deputy Director

COMPLIANCE TO TOR ISSUED BY MOEF FOR PREPARATION OF EIA

Sr.

No

Terms Of Reference given by MoEF Compliance

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-7

Sr.

No


1. Comparison of alternate sites considered

and the reasons for selecting the

proposed site. Conformity of the site

with the prescribed guidelines in terms of

distance HFL of the river, highways may

also be shown.

Four (4) probable locations were

assessed for site selection:

Site1: Binjikot, Kharsia Tehsil, Raigarh

District.

Site2: Pandapani/ Dumarpali, Raigarh

Tehsil, Raigarh District.

Site3: Munund/ Barbaspur,

Dharamjaigarh Tehsil, Raigarh District.

Site4: Jamgaon, Raigarh Tehsil, Raigarh

District.

After evaluation, a site near Bijkot

village, Kharsia Tehsil, Raigarh district,

having major favorable features along

with good environmental features has

been identified for the proposed

project.

Refer Chapter-1,Table-1.1,

Page no: C1-5

2. All the coordinates of the plant site as

well as ash pond demarcated on the topo

sheet (1:50000) scale.

PLANT

A : 22˚01’40”N to 83˚12’09”E B : 22˚00’45”N to 83˚11’39”E C : 21˚59’58”N to 83˚12’04”E D : 22˚00’56”N to 83˚13’15”E

ASH POND

1 : 22˚01’23”N to 83˚12’36”E 2 : 22˚01’17”N to 83˚12’23”E 3 : 22˚00’26”N to 83˚12’58”E 4 : 22˚00’32”N to 83˚13’10”E

The Latitudes/ Longitudes of the

extreme boundaries of plant site and

ash pond are given above.

The map showing the plant site, ash

pond and colony is given as figure-1.2

of Chapter -1, page- C1-4

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-8

Sr.

No


3. Explore the possibility of having 2X600

MW and 2X660 MW and examine the

adoption of super critical technology

After exploration of various

technologies SKSPGCL finalized the

3X400 MW capacity sub critical boilers

based on the techno commercial

evaluation.

4. The study area should cover an area of

10 km radius around the proposed site.

10 km radius study area considered for

the EIA study.

5. Land use of the study area as well as the

project area shall be given.

Land use studies has been carried out

in the study area, and are presented in

Annexure-VIII

6. Location of any National Park, Sanctuary,

Elephant / Tiger Reserve (existing as

well as proposed), migratory routes, if

any, within 10 km of the project site

shall be specified and marked on the

map duly authenticated by the Chief

Wildlife Warden of the state.

No National Parks, Sanctuaries,

Elephant / Tiger Reserve (existing as

well as proposed), migratory routes,

ecologically sensitive areas presented in

within 10 km of the project site.

7. Land requirement for the project to be

optimized. Item wise break up of land

requirement and its availability to be

furnished. The norms prescribed by CEA

should be kept in view.

The land requirement details are

presented in Chaper-2, Section-2.4.1

Break-up of land use is presented in

Table-2.2, page-C2-5

8. Topography of the area should be given

clearly indicating whether the site

requires any filling. If so, details of

filling, quantity of fill material required,

its source, transportation etc. should be

given.

The proposed project premise is a

generally plain land with a general

elevation of about 230-m above MSL.

Most of the buffer zone of the project is

flat land.

It is proposed to level the project area

and to use the earthen material

excavated from the proposed reservoir

sites inside the premises. There will be

no tall structures except stacks. Also,

the contours of natural drainage will not

be disturbed.

9. Impact on drainage of the area and the

surroundings.

No nallas of water courses are present in

the project site. The river is at about

600-m from the project facilities.

However, natural drainage pattern shall

not be disturbed as far as possible

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-9

Sr.

No


10.Information regarding surface hydrology

and water regime and impact of the

same, if any due to the project.

Mand River, is passing through 2.3-km

away from the proposed plant site.

Ground water is not using for the

project. No impact was envisaged.

11.One season site-specific meteorological

data shall be provided

Details are Presented in Chapter-

3,section-3.3.3.2, page No: 26 and 27

12.One complete season AAQ data (except

monsoon) to be given along with the

dates of monitoring.

The parameters to be covered shall

include SPM, RSPM, SO2 NOx and Ozone

(ground level).

The location of the monitoring stations

should be so decided so as to take into

consideration the pre-dominant

downwind direction, population zone and

sensitive receptors including reserved

forests.

There should be at least one monitoring

station in the upwind direction.

Ambient air quality monitoring has been

carried out at 12 locations from 1st

March to 31st May, representing Pre-

monsoon season.

The predominant wind direction from

NE followed by SW. The monitoring

network has been designed such that

predominant downwind directions are

covered.

The summary of AAQ results are

presented in chapter-3, under section-

3.4.6. Table-3.4.5

Page No-41 to 43.

Details presented in Annexure-IV

13.Impact of the project on the AAQ of the

area. Details of the model used and the

input data used for modelling should also

be provided. The air quality contours

may be plotted on a location map

showing the location of project site,

habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if

any. The wind roses should also be

shown on this map. It may be kept in

view that SPM emissions are to be

restricted to 50 mg/Nm3

The air quality impacts are assessed

using ISCST3 air dispersion model. The

impacts has been carried out for the

entire power plant and the model

details along with results are presented

in chapter- 4 under Section- 4.3.2.

page C4-6

Air quality Contours are presented in

figure- 4.1 to 4.4

14.Fuel analysis to be provided (sulphur,

ash content and mercury). Details of

auxillary fuel, if any including its

quantity, quality, storage etc should also

be given.

The Coal sourced from SECL coal

mines.

The expected range of fuel analysis are

presented in chapter-2, section-2.4.2,

page-C2-5

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-10

Sr.

No


15.Quantity of fuel required, its source and

transportation. A confirmed fuel linkage

should be provided.

The quantity of coal required is 6.02

MTPA.

Coal for the plant would be linked to

SECL coal mines

Secondary fuels, LDO and HFO will be

brought to plant site by road/rail.

Details are presented in chapter-2,

section-2.4.2, page-C2-5.

16.Source of water and its availability.

Commitment regarding availability of

requisite quantity of water from the

competent authority.

Source of water from Mahanadi River.

Details are presented in chapter-2,

under section-2.4.3, page-C2-7.

Water allocation letter presented in

Annexure-III

17.Details of rainwater harvesting and how

it will be used in the plant.

Rain water harvesting measures

presented in chapter-4, under section-

4.5.3, page-C4-22 to 23

18.Examine the feasibility of zero discharge.

In case of any proposed discharge, its

quantity, quality and point of discharge,

users downstream etc. should be

provided

The water balance and waste water

generation details have been described

in chapter-2.

Table-2.7.page.No:C2-22.

Total waste water generated is 688

m3/hr, This water will be treated and

used for green belt.

19.Optimization of COC for water

conservation. Other water conservation

measures proposed in the project should

also be given.

It is envisaged to design the system for

6 Cycle of concentration (COC).

20.Details of water balance taking into

account reuse and re-circulation of

effluents.

The water balance and waste water

generation details have been described

in chapter-2.

Table-2.7.page.No:C2-22.

21.Details of greenbelt i.e. land with not

less than 1500 trees per ha giving details

of species, width of plantation, planning

schedule etc. About 1/3 rd of the area

should be covered under greenbelt.

Green belt details are presented in

chapter- 4 under section 4.6, page-C4-

26 to 33.

22.Detailed plan of ash utilization /

management.

Presented in chapter-4, under section-

4.5.5, page-C4-24

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-11

Sr.

No


23.Details of evacuation of ash. The total ash generated in the plant will

be 2.47 MTPA out of which 20% will be

bottom ash i.e. 0.49 MTPA and balance

will be fly ash of 1.98 MTPA

24.Details regarding ash pond

impermeability and whether it would be

lined, if so details of the lining etc.

Details are presented chapter-4 under

section-4.5.5.5, page-C4-26

25.Detailed R&R plan/compensation

package for the project affected people

shall be prepared taking into account the

socio economic status of the area,

homestead oustees, land oustees,

landless laboureres.

Details given in Annexure-IX

26.Details of flora and fauna with list of

schedule of the wild life (Protection Act

1972) duly authenticated should be

provided. In case of any scheduled

fauna, conservation plan should be

provided.

The details of flora & fauna are

presented in chapter-3 under section-

3.8, page-C3-62 to 72

27.Details regarding infrastructure facilities

such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to

be provided to the labour force during

construction as well as to the casual

workers including truck drivers during

operation phase.

For construction force temporary

sanitation facilities (septic tanks and

soak pits) will be set-up for disposal of

sanitary sewage generated by the work

force. Similarly, rest rooms and canteen

facilities will be provided for truck

drivers.

28. Details of water requirement during

construction phase and its availability

and source with time schedule should be

provided.

The construction water requirement will

be around 7 MLD. This water will be

supplied through storage reservoir and

distribution network. Water is available

at site or from near by area.

29.Public hearing points raised and

commitment of the project proponent on

the same. An action plan to address the

issues raised during public hearing and

the necessary allocation of funds for the

same should be provided.

Public hearing yet to be conducted.

Details will be incorporated in final EIA-

Report.

30.Measures of socio economic influence to

the local community proposed to be

provided by project proponent. As far as

possible, quantitative dimension to be

given.

About 2000 people will be deployed

temporarily during construction of the

project and about 400 people will be

employed during operational stage of

the project.

31.Impact of the project on local

infrastructure of the area such as road

network and whether any additional

infrastructure would need to be

constructed and the agency responsible

for the same with time frame.

The project site is located about 15.0-

km away from the nearest national

highway, NH-200. The existing road

network is adequate for the project.

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE

AI-12

Sr.

No


32.EMP to mitigate the adverse impacts due

to the project along with item wise cost

of its implementation.

The Environmental Management plan is

detailed in chapter-4 under section-4.4,

page-C4-19 to 20

33.Risk assessment should be carried out. It

should take into account the maximum

inventory of storage at site at any point

in time. The risk contours should be

plotted on the plant layout map clearly

showing which of the proposed activities

would be affected in case of accident

taking place. Based on the

same,proposed safeguard measures

should be provided. Measures to guard

against fire hazards should also be

provided.

Risk assessment and Disaster

management plan is detailed in

Chapter-7, section-7.0, page- C7-17

34.Details of industries existing and/or

proposed within 10 km radius of the

project boundary should also be

provided.

Monet ISPAT & power limited (3-km,

SE)

35.Any litigation pending against the project

and /or any direction /order passed by

any Court of Law against the project, if

so, details thereof.

No

ANNEXURE-II

ADMINISTRATIVE AND LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND

AII-1

The legal framework is covered under several legislations. Brief details of the same are given below:

Legislative Framework

This section provides a brief summary of India's environmental legislation. Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) is the nodal agency for drafting the new environmental legislations and giving the environmental clearance to the new projects. State Pollution Control Boards (SPCB) are responsible for implementing environmental legislation and issuing local Rules, Regulations and Notifications.

Regulatory Control of the Project

The proposed project is covered under the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification, 1994 and amendments promulgated under Environment (Protection) Act (EPA), 1986. The key environmental legislations pertaining to the proposed operations include: • The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980; • The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; • The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981; • The Environment Protection Act, 1986, Rules there under (with amendments); • The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules 2000; • Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006;and • Mines Legislation Pertaining to Environmental Protection. These key instruments and all subsequent and relevant amendments to them are discussed in further details as below.

• The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980

Specified activities in forest areas are controlled under the Forest (Conservation) Act 1980 and clearances are required for such activities. The diversion of forestland for non-forestry purposes is not encouraged and clearances for such activities are difficult to obtain. Seismic surveys, are however, exempted from the provisions of the Forest Act providing these activities are restricted to clearing of undergrowth and lopping of tree branches and do not involve the felling of trees.

• The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

This Act introduced the State Pollution Control Boards to grant Consent For Establishment (CFE) and Consent For Operation (CFO) to the industries. The investor intending to set up an industry is required to apply to the SPCB to obtain a CFE followed by CFO. While granting the consent, SPCB can stipulate conditions pertaining to the effluents arising from the process. The consent to operate is granted for a specific period (usually one year) after which conditions attached are reviewed by the SPCB before renewal.

ANNEXURE-II


AII-2

• The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981

This Act is very similar in scope to the Water Act, 1974. The Act stipulates the

establishment of State Boards for the Prevention and Control of Air Pollution. In States where a water pollution board had already been established under the earlier Water Act, the two boards were combined to form SPCBs. The establishment or operation of any industry cannot be undertaken without the prior consent of the SPCB. A decision on any application for consent must be made by the SPCB within four months of receipt of the application.

• Environment Protection (EP) Act and Rules, 1986

EP Act was enacted to provide for the protection and improvement of environment and for matters connected there with. A decision was taken by India to protect and improve the human environment at the United Nations Conference on Human Environment held at Stockholm in June 1972. It is considered necessary to prevent the hazards to human beings, other living creatures, plants and property.

This Act is an umbrella act and gave birth to many sub acts and rules. The EP Act

call for procedural requirements for:

o Obtaining Environmental Clearance; and o Submission of Environmental Statement.

The main Rules pertinent here are indicated below:

o The Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 (with amendments upto 2000);

o Environmental Impact Assessment Notification; and o Public Hearing Notification.

• E.I.A Notification, 2006 and Subsequent Amendments

The principal Environmental Regulatory Agency in India is the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi. MoEF formulates environmental policies and accords environmental clearance for the proposed, expansion/modernization of projects.

As per the Notification of the MoEF dated 14.09.2006 and its amendment, Environmental Clearance (EC) needs to be obtained from the MoEF for various identified industries. Any expansion or modernization of any activity shall not be undertaken in any part of India unless it is accorded environmental clearance by the central government in accordance with the procedures specified in this Notification. As per the procedure, anybody who desires to undertake any project in any part of India or expansion or modernization of any existing industry, a Detailed Project Report, which shall inter alia include an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report, needs to be submitted.

In addition to the above requirements, the MoEF can notify certain areas as ecologically sensitive/fragile and all developmental projects which are to be located in these notified areas need to obtain EC. Areas so far notified include some coastal areas identified under the Coastal Regulation Zone Notification, forests, wildlife sanctuaries, national parks, wetlands and mangroves.

ANNEXURE-II


AII-3

• The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules 2000

These rules make the occupier and the occupier of a facility responsible for proper

collection, reception, treatment, storage and disposal of hazardous wastes listed in schedule-1, 2, and 3.

This rule also recommends to obtain and renew the authorization to collection,

reception, treatment, storage and disposal of hazardous wastes from state pollution control board (SPCB) by filing Form-1.

• Mines and Marine Legislation Pertaining to Environmental Protection

The environmental protection provisions covered under different legislation pertaining to petroleum up-stream (exploration, production and transport) are defined in the following subsections:

Mines & Minerals (Regulation & Development)

The Mines & Minerals (Regulation & Development) bill recognizes the need for providing greater stability of tenure to leaseholders. As such, for the first time, a minimum period of lease of 20 years, has been made mandatory. The maximum period for grant of lease has been increased to 30 years. There is a provision of renewal of a mining lease for a period of 20 years. Further renewals are possible with approval of the Central Government. These amendments would be of particular benefit to the captive coal mines in the Power Sector, where a number of projects have been approved, and also to other mines attached to mineral processing industries like steel, cement etc. where an assured supply of raw material is essential.

The period for which prospecting licence can be granted has been increased to three years and these licences can be renewed at the discretion of the State Governments so that the total period does not exceed five years

The bill has deleted 15 minerals hitherto listed in the First Schedule of the Act requiring prior approval of the Central Government before the State Government could grant a prospecting licence or a mining lease. The minerals so deleted are Apatite and phosphatic ores, Barytes, Dolomite, Gypsum, Kyanite, Magnesite, Molybdenum, Nickel, Platinum and other precious metals. Sillimanite, Silver, Sulpher and its ores, Tin, Tungsten and Vanadium Ore. With this deletion (excepting the atomic minerals and fuel minerals) there would only be 11 minerals left for which the State Government would require prior approvals of the Central Government. These are Asbestos, Bauxite, Chrome ore, Copper Ore, Gold, Iron ore, Lead, Limestone except where it is used in Kilns for the manufacture of lime as building material, Manganese ore, Precious stones and Zinc.

Prohibition of Mining Operation in Ecologically Fragile Areas

Government of India has identified a number of areas/eco-systems as ecologically fragile areas where mining is not allowed without prior permission from Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi, by specifying interalia the details of the area and the proposed process or operation duly supported by an EIA &

ANNEXURE-II


AII-4

EMP and such other information as may be required by the Central Government. There are few ecologically sensitive areas where mining has been prohibited either by the court's order or by a MoEF Notification. • Directorate of Mines Safety

Under the Constitution of India, safety, welfare and health of workers employed in mines are the concern of the Central Government (Entry 55 - Union List; Article 246). The objective is regulated by the Mines Act, 1952 and the rules and regulations framed thereunder. These are administered by the Directorate general of Mines Safety (DGMS), under the union Ministry of Labour. Apart from administering the Mines Act and subordinate legislation thereunder, DGMS also administers a few other allied legislation, including the Indian Electricity Act

The pieces of legislation administered by DGMS are,

o The Mines Act, 1952 o Rules & Regulations framed under the Act, o Metalliferous Mines Regulations, 1961 o Mines Rules, 1955 o Mines Vocational Training Rules, 1966 o Mines Rescue Rules, 1985 o Mines Crèche Rules, 1966

Applicable Environmental Standards

The MoEF has the overall responsibility to set policy and standards for the protection of environment along with Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).

Ambient Air Quality Standards

The existing standards for National Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ), as prescribed by CPCB vide Gazette Notification S.O.384 (E) dated 11th April, 1994, which are applicable for land-based applications for onshore areas. The prescribed standards are presented below in Table-1.

TABLE-1 NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS

Concentration in Ambient Air (µµµµg/m3) Pollutant Time Weighted Average Industrial

Area Residential, Rural & Other

Areas

Sensitive Areas

Annual Average* 80 60 15 Sulphur dioxide (SO2)

24 Hours** 120 80 30

Annual Average* 80 60 15 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

24 Hours** 120 80 30

Annual Average* 360 140 70 Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) 24 Hours** 500 200 100

Annual Average* 120 60 50 Respirable Particulate Matter (Size less than 10 microns)

24 Hours** 150 100 75

Annual Average* 1.0 0.75 0.50 Lead (Pb)

24 Hours** 1.5 1.0 0.75

Carbon monoxide (CO) 8 Hours 5000 2000 1000

ANNEXURE-II


AII-5

Concentration in Ambient Air (µµµµg/m3) Pollutant Time Weighted Average Industrial

Area Residential, Rural & Other

Areas

Sensitive Areas

1 Hour** 10000 4000 2000

Annual Average* 100 100 100 Ammonia

24 Hours** 400 400 400

Note:

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken

twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

** 24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year.

However 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

Noise Limits and Guidelines for Diesel Generators

• Noise from DG set shall be controlled by providing an acoustic enclosure or by treating the room acoustically, at the users end;

• The acoustic enclosure or acoustic treatment of the room shall be designed for minimum 25 dB (A) insertion loss or for meeting the ambient noise standards, whichever is on the higher side (if the actual ambient noise is on the higher side, it may not be possible to check the performance of the acoustic enclosure/acoustic treatment. Under such circumstances the performance may be checked for noise reduction upto actual ambient noise level, preferably, in the nighttime). The measurement for Insertion Loss may be done at different points at 0.5 m from the acoustic enclosure/room, and then averaged;

• These limits shall be regulated by the State Pollution Control Boards and the State Pollution Control Committees;

• The manufacturer shall offer to the user a standard acoustic enclosure of 25 dB (A) insertion loss and also a suitable exhaust muffler with insertion loss of 25 dB (A);

• The user shall make efforts to bring down the noise levels due to the DG set, outside his premises, within the ambient noise requirements by proper siting and control measures;

• Installation of a DG set must be strictly in compliance with the recommendations of the DG set manufacturer; and

• A proper routine and preventive maintenance procedure for the DG set should be set and followed in consultation with the DG set manufacturer which would help prevent noise levels of the DG set from deteriorating with use.

Ambient Noise Standards

Ambient standards with respect to noise have been notified by the Ministry of Environment and Forests vide gazette notification dated 26th December 1989 (amended in February, 2000). It is based on the ‘A’ weighted equivalent noise level (Leq). The ambient noise standards are presented in Table-2.

ANNEXURE-II


AII-6

TABLE-2 AMBIENT NOISE STANDARDS

Noise Levels dB(A) Leq Area Code Category of Area

Day time* Night Time

A Industrial Area 75 70

B Commercial Area 65 55

C Residential Area 55 45

D Silence Zone** 50 40 Note: * Daytime is from 7 am to 10 pm. ** Silence zone is defined as area up to 100 meters around premises of hospitals, educational

institutions and courts. Use of vehicle horns, loud speakers and bursting of crackers are banned in these zones.

Permissible Standards for Vibrations During Blasting As per DGMS mines, depending on the type of structure and the dominant

excitation frequency, the peak particle velocity (ppv) on the ground adjacent to the structure shall not exceed the values given in the Table-3.

TABLE-3

PERMISSIBLE PPV AT THE FOUNDATION LEVEL

OF STRUCTURES IN MINING AREAS

Dominant excitation Frequency,

Hz Type of structure

<8 Hz 8-25 Hz >25 Hz

I. Buildings/structures not belong to the owner

A. Domestic houses/structures (Kuchha, Brick, & Cement)

5 10 15

B. Industrial buildings (R.C.C & Framed structures)

10 20 25

C. Objects of historical importance & sensitive structures

2 5 10

II. Buildings belonging to owner with limited span of life

A. Domestic houses/structures (Kuchha, Brick, & Cement)

10 15 25

B. Industrial buildings (R.C.C & Framed structures)

15 25 50

Noise Standards for Occupational Exposure

Noise standards in the work environment are specified by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA-USA) which in-turn are being enforced by Government of India through model rules framed under Factories Act. These are given in Table-4.

TABLE-4 STANDARDS FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE

Total Time of Exposure per Day in Hours (Continuous or Short term Exposure)

Sound Pressure Level in dB(A)

8 90

6 92

4 95

3 97

ANNEXURE-II


AII-7

Total Time of Exposure per Day in Hours (Continuous or Short term Exposure)

Sound Pressure Level in dB(A)

2 100

3/2 102

1 105

¾ 107

½ 110

¼ 115

Never >115

Note: 1. No exposure in excess of 115 dB(A) is to be permitted. 2. For any period of exposure falling in between any figure and the next higher or lower figure as

indicated in column (1), the permissible level is to be determined by extrapolation on a proportionate scale.

Wastewater Discharge Standards

The wastewater discharge standards as per EPA Notification (GSR 176 (E), April 1996) are given in Table-5.

TABLE-1.5 WASTE WATER DISCHARGE STANDARDS

Sr. No.

List of Parameters Units Standard (On land Irrigation)

Standard (Surface Waters)

1 Colour and Odour -- All efforts should be made to remove colour and unpleasant odour as far as practicable.

All efforts should be made to remove colour and

unpleasant odour as far as practicable.

2 Suspended Solids mg/l 200.0 100.0

3 Particle size of Suspended Solids

-- Shall pass 850 micron IS Sieve

Shall pass 850 micron IS Sieve

4 pH value -- 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0

5 Temperature -- Not Specified Shall not exceed 5 oC above the receiving water temperature.

6 Oil and grease, Max. mg/l 10.0 10.0

7 Total residual chlorine, Max.

mg/l Not Specified 1.0

8 Ammonical nitrogen (as N), Max.

mg/l Not Specified 50

9 Total Kjeldhal nitrogen (as N),Max


10 Free ammonia (as NH3), Max.


11 Biochemical oxygen demand (3 days at 27C), Max.

mg/l 100.0 30.0

12 Chemical oxygen demand, Max.


13 Arsenic (as As), Max. mg/l 0.2 0.2

14 Mercury (as Hg), Max. mg/l Not Specified 0.01

15 Lead (as Pb), Max. mg/l Not Specified 0.1

16 Cadmium (as Cd), Max. mg/l Not Specified 2.0

17 Hexavalent chromium (as Cr+6), Max.


18 Total chromium (as Cr), Max.


19 Copper (as Cu), Max. mg/l Not Specified 3.0

20 Zinc (as Zn), Max. mg/l Not Specified 5.0

21 Selenium (as Se), Max. mg/l Not Specified 0.05

22 Nickel (as Ni), Max. mg/l Not Specified 3.0

ANNEXURE-II


AII-8

Sr. No.

List of Parameters Units Standard (On land Irrigation)

Standard (Surface Waters)

23 Cyanide (as CN), Max. mg/l 0.2 0.2

24 Fluorides as F mg/l Not Specified 2.0

25 Dissolved phosphates (as P),Max


26 Sulphides as (S), Max. mg/l Not Specified 2.0

27 Phenolic compounds (as C2H5OH),


28 Radioactive Materials

A] Alpha Emitters, Max. µC/ml 10-7 10-7

B] Beta Emitters, Max. µC/ml 10-7 10-6

29 Bio-assay test -- 90% survival of fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent.

90% survival of fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent.

30 Manganese (as Mn) mg/l Not Specified 2.0

31 Iron (as Fe) mg/l Not Specified 3.0

32 Vanadium (as V) mg/l Not Specified 0.2

33 Nitrate nitrogen mg/l Not Specified 10.0

ANNEXURE-III

COPY OF WATER ALLOCATION AND AVAILABILTY LETTER

AIII-1

ANNEXURE-III


AIII-2

ANNEXURE-III


AIII-3

ANNEXURE-IV

EMISSION CALCULATIONS

AIV-1

1.0 General Calculations

• Area Calculations

4

)DiameterStackTop(x142.3=)m(Area

22 = 3.14 X (7.0)2/4 =38.49 m2

• Temperature Correction

Temperature correction is calculated based on standard ambient temperature of

25° C.

CratureStackTempe

CCorrectioneTemperatur

0

0

273

25273

+

+= = 298/413=0.7215

• Volumetric Flow Rate

CorrectioneTemperaturxsmVelocityExitxmAreas

NmflowVolumetric )/()()(

23

=

= 38.49 X 25 X 0.7215 = 694.3Nm³/s

1.1 Emission Calculations for Proposed Power Plant at 80% PLF

(a)Sulphur dioxide (SO2)

Coal Consumption = 6.02 MTPA (@ 90% PLF)

= 18242.4 TPD (330 working days) = 760101 kg/hr

Sulphur content in coal = 0.4%

Sulphur emission factor = (0.4/100) x (64/32) = 0.008

SO2 emission rate = Emission factor x consumption of coal in kg/hr = 0.008 x 760101 = 6080.8 kg/hr = 1689 g/sec

= 422.3 g/sec/flue

1.1.2 Particulate Matter Emissions

Emission rate = 50 mg/Nm3 X 694.3Nm3/s X 1/1000 = 34.7 g/s

1.1.3 NOx Emissions

1) NOx emission is calculated based on Design limit of 350 mg/Nm3

= 350 mg/Nm3 X 694.3 Nm³/s X 1/1000 = 243.0 g/s

ANNEXURE-IV


AIV-2

2) NOx emission is calculated based on of 9 kg/tonne of coal burnt basis

= 760.1tone/hr X 9 kg/tonne

= 6840.9 kg/hr

= 1900.3 g/sec

= 475 g/sec /flue

• Minimum stack height calculations

1. Based on sulphur dioxide emissions:

Stack height (m) = 14 (Q) 0.3

Where Q= emission rate of sulphur dioxide in kg/hr

2. based on particulate matter (PM) emissions

Stack height (m) = 74 (Q) 0.27

Where Q= emission rate of Particulate matter in tons/hr

When stacks are emitting both the pollutants i.e. SO2 and PM, the

stack height is calculated based on SO2 emissions

Q= 6080.8 kg/h (SO2 emission rate )

Stack height= 14 (6080)0.3

Stack height= 191.1 m

However, two twin flue stacks of 275 m height each are proposed for

4X300 MW coal based Thermal power plant.

ANNEXURE-IV


AIV-3

24 HOURLY MEAN METEOROLOGICAL DATA

Time

Wind

Direction

Wind

Speed Temp

Stability

Class

Mixing

Height

1 47 1.5 304.3 6 200

2 45 1.6 303.9 6 200

3 225 1.7 303.4 6 300

4 45 1.6 303 6 300

5 48 1.4 303 6 400

6 315 0.7 303.3 6 400

7 46 1.8 304.3 5 700

8 315 1.9 305.8 5 800

9 215 1.2 307.3 4 800

10 50 1.1 308.5 3 950

11 47 0.9 309.6 1 1100

12 225 1.8 310.8 1 1200

13 315 2.6 312 1 1800

14 45 2.4 313.4 1 1500

15 45 1.5 312.9 1 1500

16 55 1.9 311.9 1 1300

17 45 1.2 310.6 3 950

18 50 1.5 309.3 4 900

19 225 1.4 307.8 5 800

20 225 0.3 306.8 5 800

21 228 1.2 306 5 500

22 315 0.4 305.3 6 400

23 325.5 0.2 304.7 6 200

24 319 1.1 304.5 6 200

ANNEXURE-V

AMBIENT AIR QUALITY LEVELS

AAQ1 Plant Site

Sr. No. Date TSPM RPM SO2 NOX Ozone (O3)

1 03.03.2008 59.5 16.4 5.0 6.1 260 210 289 1.8

2 04.03.2008 75.6 25.2 8.9 10.2 299 304 266 1.5

3 10.03.2008 80.3 26.8 8.2 11.0 306 310 301 2.3

4 11.03.2008 72.1 27.4 9.5 10.3 290 319 261 2.9

5 17.03.2008 87.4 24.8 8.4 10.6 283 299 253 2.4

6 18.03.2008 91.2 25.6 8.9 12.3 310 293 302 2.7

7 24.03.2008 81.2 23.4 8.8 9.3 299 311 274 3.1

8 25.03.2008 64.0 19.8 9.1 10.2 294 299 279 3

9 31.03.2008 74.3 24.8 9.2 12.4 310 290 272 2.9

10 01.04.2008 55.3 26.3 5.2 12.3 291 279 299 2.4

11 07.04.2008 64.7 19.1 9.4 11.3 281 269 317 1.8

12 08.04.2008 79.8 23.8 9.0 10.9 299 302 311 1.7

13 14.04.2008 82.1 26 8.9 12.2 317 291 302 1.2

14 15.04.2008 68.0 20 9.0 9.8 287 308 282 1.6

15 21.04.2008 59.7 26.2 7.3 11.6 278 284 308 1.9

16 22.04.2008 76.4 25.4 7.4 9.8 273 292 297 2.2

17 28.04.2008 80.3 24 8.4 10.8 289 280 294 2.7

18 29.04.2008 63.0 19.2 9.2 12.2 311 u 311 2.9

19 05.05.2008 82.0 23.4 8.2 9.7 266 307 289 1.8

20 06.05.2008 85.4 26.4 8.8 12.6 262 277 280 1.5

21 12.05.2008 76.2 21.1 9.4 9.6 292 302 272 1.7

22 13.05.2008 82.6 24.7 9.5 10.7 313 283 298 2.3

23 19.05.2008 77.7 22.4 8.3 11.4 281 309 252 2.6

24 20.05.2008 84.4 24.6 9.1 12.0 288 303 264 2.8

25 26.05.2008 71.2 21.3 8.8 11.7 303 286 273 3.1

26 27.05.2008 83.4 21.3 8.5 11.6 308 300 291 2.6

Min 55.3 16.4 5.0 6.1 210 1.2

Max 91.2 27.4 9.5 12.6 319 3.1

Avg 75.3 23.4 8.5 10.9 290.1 2.3

98th 89.3 27.1 9.5 12.5 317.0 3.1

CO

All units are in µg/m3

AV-1

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ2(Near Forest Boundry)


1 03.03.2008 53.4 14.5 6.3 7.9 179 183 173 1.6

2 04.03.2008 58.3 15.3 7.0 8.4 184 187 177 2.2

3 10.03.2008 57.6 16.5 8.0 9.3 181 184 175 2.6

4 11.03.2008 59.4 14.2 7.4 8.8 187 191 181 2.9

5 17.03.2008 54.3 15.0 6.7 8.0 185 188 179 2.6

6 18.03.2008 66.8 16.8 6.8 9.0 178 182 172 1.9

7 24.03.2008 73.4 19.7 8.2 9.9 176 179 171 1.8

8 25.03.2008 72.1 18.8 7.4 8.6 185 187 181 2.4

9 31.03.2008 64.0 17.0 6.1 7.9 179 184 174 2.7

10 01.04.2008 74.7 19.2 7.2 9.0 177 181 175 2.3

11 07.04.2008 68.1 17.3 7.9 9.7 183 188 181 1.8

12 08.04.2008 76.5 27.8 7.5 8.9 185 191 182 1.9

13 14.04.2008 65.4 15.7 5.8 7.7 182 189 178 2.1

14 15.04.2008 68.4 17.5 6.6 8.4 179 184 176 2.5

15 21.04.2008 74.3 19.1 6.9 9.4 181 187 179 2.2

16 22.04.2008 66.7 17.8 6.0 7.3 185 189 181 2.3

17 28.04.2008 75.6 20.3 7.6 8.4 233 255 250 1.6

18 29.04.2008 44.4 14.5 5.8 6.4 184 189 181 1.8

19 05.05.2008 60.1 15.0 6.4 8.6 195 205 189 1.9

20 06.05.2008 75.7 18.3 7.0 9.4 202 216 223 2.4

21 12.05.2008 65.4 18.3 7.7 9.0 183 185 176 2.7

22 13.05.2008 73.4 18.7 8.2 9.2 185 191 180 2.1

23 19.05.2008 63.4 17.4 7.8 9.0 179 183 175 2.3

24 20.05.2008 72.1 18.2 7.1 8.5 185 187 178 2.6

25 26.05.2008 74.0 16.8 7.6 8.9 184 190 180 2.7

26 27.05.2008 68.1 19.3 8.1 9.4 179 186 174 2.6

Min 44.4 14.2 5.8 6.4 171 1.6

Max 76.5 27.8 8.2 9.9 255 2.9

Avg 66.4 17.7 7.1 8.7 186.1 2.3

98th 76.1 24.1 8.2 9.8 240.8 2.8

CO


AV-2

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ3 Gindola Village


1 03.03.2008 75.9 23.5 7.8 10.8 286 282 273 2.1

2 04.03.2008 89.2 25.9 8.2 11.3 292 288 285 3.0

3 10.03.2008 98.6 30.4 9.7 12.5 288 284 280 2.4

4 11.03.2008 110.2 36.4 10.1 13.8 282 276 268 1.6

5 17.03.2008 82.7 23.1 7.9 9.7 273 267 263 3.1

6 18.03.2008 104.3 30.2 10.2 13.2 280 273 269 2.9

7 24.03.2008 74.3 20.9 8.9 10.6 284 280 275 2.4

8 25.03.2008 116.5 32.8 10.1 14.5 288 284 278 2.2

9 31.03.2008 59.8 18.3 5.9 7.2 293 291 286 2.4

10 01.04.2008 112.4 35.4 9.9 13.8 298 295 288 3.0

11 07.04.2008 98.2 28.9 8.9 10.2 294 284 274 2.2

12 08.04.2008 110.5 31.5 10.8 12.4 298 292 289 2.1

13 14.04.2008 86.9 26.4 11.1 13.8 299 296 287 2.5

14 15.04.2008 98.5 28.4 9.6 10.7 295 289 284 2.3

15 21.04.2008 109.7 32.4 10.6 11.9 290 284 276 2.1

16 22.04.2008 115.4 35.6 8.9 14.9 280 275 270 1.7

17 28.04.2008 98.5 28.9 9.7 12.2 282 278 273 2.9

18 29.04.2008 86.4 26.7 8.3 11.1 282 274 266 2.6

19 05.05.2008 93.4 30.8 10.8 13.3 273 267 264 2.3

20 06.05.2008 78.6 23.5 7.6 9.8 282 275 273 2.1

21 12.05.2008 89.8 27.6 8.8 10.7 288 285 282 2.9

22 13.05.2008 107.8 32.2 11.6 12.6 302 294 290 2.1

23 19.05.2008 116.4 33.3 10.1 13.1 286 277 270 2.2

24 20.05.2008 99.7 29.8 10.1 12.8 296 290 285 2.4

25 26.05.2008 87.9 25.5 9.1 11.9 290 284 278 2.7

26 27.05.2008 106.5 34.6 9.8 13.7 297 292 286 2.8

Min 59.8 18.3 5.9 7.2 263 1.6

Max 116.5 36.4 11.6 14.9 302 3.1

Avg 96.5 29.0 9.4 12.0 282.9 2.4

98th 116.5 36.0 11.4 14.7 298.5 3.1

CO


AV-3

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ4- Nawapara Village


1 03.03.2008 106.2 38.6 9.6 10.6 303 296 312 1.5

2 04.03.2008 95.2 35.6 9.8 11.8 340 288 353 1.7

3 10.03.2008 110.1 40.2 10.2 12.6 331 315 330 2.0

4 11.03.2008 88.6 42.3 10.4 13.2 319 326 321 2.5

5 17.03.2008 100.4 38.9 9.8 11.7 299 307 309 2.8

6 18.03.2008 96.5 38.2 10.2 12.8 325 309 299 3.3

7 24.03.2008 110.6 39.2 9.8 13.6 335 355 295 1.6

8 25.03.2008 129.8 41.2 10.2 12.6 319 349 290 3.1

9 31.03.2008 115.9 36.6 9.8 12.4 342 335 335 2.4

10 01.04.2008 98.4 36.2 9.7 11.5 326 349 331 2.7

11 07.04.2008 85.2 37.2 9.8 10.8 349 362 321 1.8

12 08.04.2008 95.6 37.7 9.6 11.6 323 341 329 2.2

13 14.04.2008 120.3 38.1 10.2 13.8 299 319 327 1.8

14 15.04.2008 75.6 37.9 12.2 14.2 342 331 318 1.6

15 21.04.2008 128.5 38.4 10.9 12.9 335 329 298 2.6

16 22.04.2008 116.2 39.2 9.8 11.3 307 300 347 2.9

17 28.04.2008 122.1 37.8 11.1 14.3 335 352 375 3.1

18 29.04.2008 86.5 38.6 8.6 9.9 317 339 293 2.0

19 05.05.2008 120.2 37.8 10.0 12.8 326 317 323 2.1

20 06.05.2008 95.4 37.8 11.6 13.9 314 326 334 2.5

21 12.05.2008 127.0 39.1 10.1 12.4 301 303 320 2.8

22 13.05.2008 105.2 37.6 12.2 13.2 327 307 315 2.3

23 19.05.2008 117.5 38.8 9.8 12.8 339 352 325 1.8

24 20.05.2008 125.2 36.2 11.5 13.8 307 335 331 2.0

25 26.05.2008 97.1 38.6 10.1 12.2 342 341 314 2.6

26 27.05.2008 89.6 39.8 8.9 10.8 330 333 292 2.3

Min 75.6 35.6 8.6 9.9 288 1.5

Max 129.8 42.3 12.2 14.3 375 3.3

Avg 106.1 38.4 10.2 12.4 324.2 2.3

98th 129.2 41.8 12.2 14.3 358.2 3.2

CO


AV-4

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ5 Kurabhata village


1 03.03.2008 110.6 28.6 8.7 10.6 343 346 372 2.0

2 04.03.2008 81.4 21.3 6.5 8.7 324 314 338 2.3

3 10.03.2008 129.2 32.8 12.5 14.6 357 320 342 2.8

4 11.03.2008 120.4 30.8 7.7 10.4 318 321 351 2.6

5 17.03.2008 102.5 26.6 6.9 8.7 338 314 340 1.9

6 18.03.2008 113.8 29.2 7.3 9.9 334 348 337 2.8

7 24.03.2008 103.4 27.2 8.1 10.7 324 314 338 3.2

8 25.03.2008 128.2 31.7 10.4 12.3 357 320 342 1.7

9 31.03.2008 114.5 29.5 8.1 10.5 318 321 351 2.2

10 01.04.2008 107.2 27.1 7.7 9.4 338 314 340 2.4

11 07.04.2008 126.9 32.4 9.8 11.5 338 314 340 2.9

12 08.04.2008 96.9 25.2 6.8 10.2 378 386 346 3.1

13 14.04.2008 122.2 31.5 11.7 13.4 386 376 370 3.3

14 15.04.2008 125.2 32.2 10.6 11.2 360 366 374 2.1

15 21.04.2008 95.5 24.6 8.2 12.7 354 342 385 2.6

16 22.04.2008 106.1 26.7 7.5 10.8 373 369 395 2.4

17 28.04.2008 139.6 48.6 13.4 15.6 389 372 370 2.2

18 29.04.2008 117.8 29.4 7.8 10.9 353 394 392 3.3

19 05.05.2008 100.1 25.2 7.2 12.6 343 346 372 3.1

20 06.05.2008 110.3 28.2 7.3 11.0 337 321 359 3.4

21 12.05.2008 107.8 24.2 8.3 11.7 346 322 317 2.6

22 13.05.2008 101.4 26.6 6.7 8.8 335 316 339 3.1

23 19.05.2008 104.2 26.5 7.5 9.7 378 386 346 3.3

24 20.05.2008 113.1 29.3 8.2 10.8 360 366 374 1.9

25 26.05.2008 110.3 28.4 7.5 10.2 354 342 375 2.6

26 27.05.2008 121.1 31.1 7.8 11.3 373 369 389 2.1

Min 81.4 21.3 6.5 8.7 314 1.7

Max 139.6 48.6 13.4 15.6 395 3.4

Avg 111.9 29.0 8.5 11.1 350.3 2.6

98th 134.4 40.7 13.0 15.1 392.9 3.4

CO


AV-5

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ6 Bade Jampali Village


1 03.03.2008 60.2 18.5 5.3 7.2 296 303 290 1.7

2 04.03.2008 99.8 28.4 6.9 8.1 302 311 301 1.6

3 10.03.2008 112.5 32.6 7.5 10.6 308 315 296 2.3

4 11.03.2008 98.6 29.6 6.7 7.9 295 300 289 1.9

5 17.03.2008 110.2 32.4 7.1 8.3 302 307 295 3.0

6 18.03.2008 98.5 29.7 6.6 8.0 305 311 300 1.3

7 24.03.2008 87.5 27.1 5.8 6.9 308 318 302 2.0

8 25.03.2008 74.3 22.4 6.1 7.3 301 315 298 3.1

9 31.03.2008 89.7 26.7 6.5 8.2 296 305 292 2.7

10 01.04.2008 69.7 22.1 5.5 7.7 300 312 295 1.7

11 07.04.2008 123.7 35.4 7.6 8.7 305 313 297 3.4

12 08.04.2008 112.4 32.2 8.0 10.8 299 306 293 1.9

13 14.04.2008 126.3 36.5 10.9 12.5 303 316 290 2.8

14 15.04.2008 117.3 33.6 10.1 11.9 304 312 297 3.4

15 21.04.2008 87.6 24.7 8.8 10.4 310 322 305 2.5

16 22.04.2008 92.5 28.8 9.2 10.8 305 340 296 2.9

17 28.04.2008 78.8 26.1 7.2 9.5 290 315 281 3.4

18 29.04.2008 97.5 30.7 8.6 10.4 295 280 275 3.3

19 05.05.2008 100.5 32.4 8.9 11.1 300 336 292 2.6

20 06.05.2008 108.8 32.5 9.2 12.2 315 328 302 2.7

21 12.05.2008 95.5 28.7 8.1 11.3 299 310 293 1.7

22 13.05.2008 88.7 38.8 8.7 12.4 321 332 314 2.4

23 19.05.2008 118.6 35.4 9.2 13.8 300 306 292 1.8

24 20.05.2008 99.2 32.7 7.9 9.8 311 319 305 2.2

25 26.05.2008 86.5 25.4 8.5 10.5 324 331 310 2.3

26 27.05.2008 75.6 23.3 7.4 8.7 316 345 298 2.9

Min 60.2 18.5 5.3 6.9 275 1.3

Max 126.3 38.8 10.9 13.8 345 3.4

Avg 96.6 29.5 7.8 9.8 305.3 2.4

98th 125.0 37.7 10.5 13.2 337.8 3.4

CO


AV-6

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ-7 (Daramurra village)


1 03.03.2008 75.6 20.6 6.6 9.5 305 314 321 1.9

2 04.03.2008 51.3 15.4 5.4 10.0 275 285 292 1.7

3 10.03.2008 79.8 24.3 6.9 9.7 304 310 316 2.8

4 11.03.2008 86.5 27.4 8.8 10.3 268 281 300 2.6

5 17.03.2008 86.0 24.1 8.4 11.2 274 287 294 2.2

6 18.03.2008 85.8 26.4 8.0 9.3 271 285 303 2.6

7 24.03.2008 66.5 19.4 5.6 9.8 273 292 309 2.9

8 25.03.2008 90.1 28.4 9.0 10.9 266 281 294 3.2

9 31.03.2008 76.1 20.5 6.1 8.9 262 272 278 2.5

10 01.04.2008 81.2 22.6 6.3 7.9 305 312 319 2.6

11 07.04.2008 89.2 25.4 7.8 10.9 262 276 293 2.3

12 08.04.2008 92.4 29.5 8.4 9.6 282 288 296 3.1

13 14.04.2008 90.1 27.6 9.3 10.8 298 307 316 2.7

14 15.04.2008 87.8 25.4 7.6 10.6 272 279 286 1.9

15 21.04.2008 68.7 18.5 6.9 9.3 293 299 307 2.1

16 22.04.2008 75.4 21.4 8.2 9.5 266 279 287 1.5

17 28.04.2008 79.7 23.4 8.9 10.5 280 291 297 2.3

18 29.04.2008 82.9 24.6 7.7 9.7 299 311 317 1.7

19 05.05.2008 89.9 25.6 8.1 11.3 280 291 297 3.1

20 06.05.2008 84.2 23.4 6.5 8.3 303 314 320 3.3

21 12.05.2008 68.9 18.6 5.9 7.6 299 309 322 2.6

22 13.05.2008 87.8 25.4 7.7 10.6 292 297 306 2.5

23 19.05.2008 75.1 20.3 6.9 9.8 273 282 296 1.8

24 20.05.2008 72.1 20.4 7.6 10.0 295 307 316 2.2

25 26.05.2008 86.8 24.5 8.2 10.5 295 303 310 2.1

26 27.05.2008 81.2 25.4 7.9 8.7 287 298 305 2.8

Min 51.3 15.4 5.4 7.6 262 1.5

Max 92.4 29.5 9.3 11.3 322 3.3

Avg 80.4 23.4 7.5 9.8 293.9 2.4

98th 91.3 29.0 9.2 11.3 320.6 3.3

CO


AV-7

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ8(near Chotta Dumarpali village)


1 03.03.2008 96.2 26.9 7.0 8.9 258 251 267 2.5

2 04.03.2008 91.5 25.4 6.6 7.8 295 243 308 1.7

3 10.03.2008 85.4 23.1 6.9 7.6 286 270 285 1.8

4 11.03.2008 105.9 33.4 8.1 9.2 274 281 276 2.4

5 17.03.2008 90.4 25.6 7.2 8.5 254 262 264 2.2

6 18.03.2008 94.5 26.5 8.3 9.4 280 264 254 2.8

7 24.03.2008 98.6 28.9 7.2 8.6 290 310 250 1.7

8 25.03.2008 119.8 33.6 8.7 9.9 274 304 245 1.5

9 31.03.2008 87.6 24.5 7.2 8.7 297 290 290 2.1

10 01.04.2008 110.4 29.7 7.1 8.5 281 304 286 2.6

11 07.04.2008 59.7 16.7 7.3 8.9 304 317 276 1.4

12 08.04.2008 85.6 24.4 7.7 6.6 278 296 284 1.5

13 14.04.2008 99.7 27.4 8.3 9.9 254 274 282 3.1

14 15.04.2008 115.6 37.9 9.6 10.2 297 286 273 3.3

15 21.04.2008 96.5 28.4 8.9 10.9 290 284 253 2.1

16 22.04.2008 106.2 30.1 9.8 11.8 262 255 302 2.6

17 28.04.2008 117.1 35.4 10.2 12.2 290 307 330 2.5

18 29.04.2008 114.4 32.2 9.7 10.9 272 294 248 2.1

19 05.05.2008 86.5 24.6 7.4 9.4 281 272 278 2.4

20 06.05.2008 120.0 32.4 10.9 12.5 269 281 289 2.7

21 12.05.2008 81.2 25.1 7.5 8.6 256 258 275 2.3

22 13.05.2008 114.8 32.6 9.8 10.7 282 262 270 2.9

23 19.05.2008 78.6 21.6 7.2 8.8 294 307 280 2.2

24 20.05.2008 115.2 33.4 8.9 9.9 262 290 286 2.3

25 26.05.2008 96.4 27.5 7.5 8.7 297 296 269 2.6

26 27.05.2008 118.1 34.6 10.9 11.6 285 288 247 2.3

Min 59.7 16.7 6.6 6.6 243 1.4

Max 120.0 37.9 10.9 12.5 330 3.3

Avg 99.5 28.5 8.3 9.6 279.2 2.3

98th 119.9 36.7 10.9 12.4 313.2 3.2

CO


AV-8

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ-9 (Pamgarh Village)


1 03.03.2008 90.6 26.3 7.3 8.4 273 260 266 2.3

2 04.03.2008 107.4 31.3 8.6 9.3 278 258 263 2.6

3 10.03.2008 87.1 25.2 6.6 7.4 276 259 264 2.1

4 11.03.2008 113.5 32.1 8.9 10.2 274 261 267 1.9

5 17.03.2008 93.9 26.9 7.6 8.6 272 263 269 2.3

6 18.03.2008 110 32.3 8.3 9.4 280 266 273 3.1

7 24.03.2008 90.4 26.5 7.4 8.7 272 259 265 2.4

8 25.03.2008 102.3 29.0 7.7 8.8 269 258 262 2.6

9 31.03.2008 94.6 28.7 8.5 9.2 274 258 268 2.4

10 01.04.2008 80.3 20.1 9.2 10.4 279 257 261 1.8

11 07.04.2008 88.2 26.0 6.9 8.7 272 260 259 2.1

12 08.04.2008 108.5 30.3 8.1 9.4 273 263 263 2.6

13 14.04.2008 86.6 25.4 6.7 8.2 276 259 267 2.5

14 15.04.2008 91.1 27.2 7.1 8.8 278 258 269 2.2

15 21.04.2008 100 29.0 8 9.2 274 256 266 2.6

16 22.04.2008 90.6 26.4 9.3 9.9 275 254 263 2.4

17 28.04.2008 96.3 29.7 7.8 9.0 284 258 273 2.6

18 29.04.2008 82.6 23.4 6.9 8.5 294 269 314 2.7

19 05.05.2008 103.4 26.4 8 9.4 273 257 272 2.9

20 06.05.2008 110.4 33.3 8.9 10.6 280 249 264 2.6

21 12.05.2008 90.7 26.4 7 8.4 274 255 258 2.6

22 13.05.2008 101 28.3 8.3 9.5 276 257 259 2.4

23 19.05.2008 72.6 20.6 5.2 6.5 273 258 264 2.2

24 20.05.2008 90.2 27.4 6.8 8.6 279 260 268 2.6

25 26.05.2008 103.5 30.0 8.5 9.6 277 263 305 2.7

26 27.05.2008 94.6 26.2 9.1 10.3 271 256 261 2.9

Min 72.6 20.1 5.2 6.5 249 1.8

Max 113.5 33.3 9.3 10.6 314 3.1

Avg 95.4 27.5 7.8 9.0 267.8 2.5

98th 112.0 32.8 9.3 10.5 299.1 3.0

CO


AV-9

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ-10 (Jhinti pali village)


1 03.03.2008 91.6 27.2 5.6 6.5 256 309 269 1.8

2 04.03.2008 97.4 32.2 6.1 8.3 233 246 256 2.1

3 10.03.2008 98.9 29.7 9.0 10.7 256 234 229 2.1

4 11.03.2008 106.1 33.4 8.7 10.2 218 263 246 2.9

5 17.03.2008 82.2 27.1 7.0 10.9 235 229 246 3.3

6 18.03.2008 105.0 30.8 7.2 7.1 226 298 321 3.4

7 24.03.2008 59.9 17.6 8.6 9.1 275 286 254 2.3

8 25.03.2008 72.4 23.9 9.0 9.5 240 298 263 2.1

9 31.03.2008 92.0 30.4 7.3 8.1 269 254 247 3.1

10 01.04.2008 103.9 28.7 9.8 12.4 300 309 240 3.3

11 07.04.2008 95.4 30.4 9.4 10.2 278 236 241 2.3

12 08.04.2008 101.9 28.5 8.6 9.7 230 215 240 2.5

13 14.04.2008 93.6 29.8 7.3 8.3 275 295 321 2.6

14 15.04.2008 80.5 26.6 9.0 9.7 286 252 263 2.9

15 21.04.2008 104.6 33.4 8.9 10.1 240 221 230 3.3

16 22.04.2008 87.6 23.9 9.4 11.1 256 324 275 2.6

17 28.04.2008 81.7 25.8 8.0 8.9 235 216 226 2.3

18 29.04.2008 102.7 29.1 8.4 9.5 240 256 275 2.1

19 05.05.2008 101.6 27.6 8.7 10.1 226 259 321 2.8

20 06.05.2008 97.9 28.4 8.1 8.6 240 252 286 2.4

21 12.05.2008 97.2 31.3 8.6 10.2 265 321 309 2.8

22 13.05.2008 102.0 30.6 7.4 9.4 254 296 284 3.4

23 19.05.2008 105.9 34.9 8.5 10.1 269 309 332 3.2

24 20.05.2008 92.7 25.6 9.4 11.6 235 240 221 2.3

25 26.05.2008 64.5 17.4 7.3 9.8 265 246 275 1.8

26 27.05.2008 84.9 23.4 8.2 10.7 254 249 267 2.3

Min 59.9 17.4 5.6 6.5 215 1.8

Max 106.1 34.9 9.8 12.4 332 3.4

Avg 92.5 28.0 8.2 9.6 261.7 2.6

98th 106.0 34.2 9.6 12.0 322.4 3.4


CO

AV-10

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ11(Binjkot village)


1 03.03.2008 77.0 18.9 7.6 9.1 288 267 293 1.8

2 04.03.2008 85.0 24.2 7.9 10.3 307 257 273 2.3

3 10.03.2008 66.4 24.6 7.1 8.8 261 256 259 2.3

4 11.03.2008 78.7 19.4 8.0 9.6 295 244 265 2.5

5 17.03.2008 80.7 20.5 7.5 9.8 273 274 277 1.4

6 18.03.2008 85.3 25.4 7.7 9.3 277 257 288 1.3

7 24.03.2008 89.3 27.4 7.4 9.9 263 277 273 1.9

8 25.03.2008 70.1 26.5 7.0 9.1 287 278 278 2.5

9 31.03.2008 83.9 22.2 6.8 9.2 268 298 243 1.6

10 01.04.2008 90.2 24.5 7.2 9.3 269 273 273 2.2

11 07.04.2008 87.2 27.6 7.6 9.0 265 267 260 1.8

12 08.04.2008 74.6 24.5 7.8 10.2 257 277 283 1.8

13 14.04.2008 85.7 24.6 8.0 9.7 272 270 283 1.9

14 15.04.2008 68.5 18.9 7.0 9.4 266 273 263 2.4

15 21.04.2008 64.6 17.7 6.6 8.4 267 279 261 1.8

16 22.04.2008 88.2 26.2 6.7 9.2 308 261 265 2.6

17 28.04.2008 105.6 27.2 6.8 7.8 276 267 310 2.2

18 29.04.2008 101.9 33.6 7.9 10.0 260 248 273 2.5

19 05.05.2008 99.4 30.4 6.7 9.4 242 293 265 2.1

20 06.05.2008 97.2 28.6 7.5 8.7 293 288 293 1.8

21 12.05.2008 54.5 29.5 5.8 7.2 277 257 233 2.9

22 13.05.2008 100.9 27.5 8.1 9.9 294 249 257 2.1

23 19.05.2008 96.2 26.5 7.6 10.8 248 310 293 2.9

24 20.05.2008 62.5 29.9 7.8 9.0 254 255 259 2.7

25 26.05.2008 86.7 26.2 8.1 7.9 273 269 243 1.7

26 27.05.2008 93.8 25.4 6.7 8.2 254 283 273 1.7

Min 54.5 17.7 5.8 7.2 233 1.3

Max 105.6 33.6 8.1 10.8 310 2.9

Avg 83.6 25.3 7.3 9.2 271.2 2.1

98th 103.8 32.0 8.1 10.6 308.9 2.9


CO

AV-11

ANNEXURE-V


AAQ12(Dengurchua village)


1 03.03.2008 64.1 16.9 6.3 9.9 286 270 254 1.9

2 04.03.2008 70.4 18.7 7.0 10.6 292 260 269 1.7

3 10.03.2008 85.8 22.3 6.6 8.5 285 285 261 1.5

4 11.03.2008 80.3 24.6 6.6 9.2 280 289 260 1.7

5 17.03.2008 60.4 16.6 5.1 8.2 275 294 254 1.6

6 18.03.2008 63.8 17.2 5.4 7.6 264 296 246 1.4

7 24.03.2008 67.0 18.5 5.6 8.1 252 305 224 2.3

8 25.03.2008 70.4 19.1 5.8 8.6 248 310 226 3.6

9 31.03.2008 91.6 23.6 6.0 10.5 300 300 286 1.8

10 01.04.2008 92.8 25.5 7.3 11.2 292 290 280 1.5

11 07.04.2008 89.1 23.1 6.2 8.5 280 271 264 1.6

12 08.04.2008 90.3 24.1 6.4 7.4 275 304 262 1.5

13 14.04.2008 95.2 26.4 8.2 9.9 287 287 266 2.3

14 15.04.2008 93.9 24.3 6.5 7.6 277 283 254 1.9

15 21.04.2008 90.0 25.6 5.4 8.1 252 269 239 1.4

16 22.04.2008 103.5 29.8 8.9 10.2 246 291 300 2.5

17 28.04.2008 93.6 26.4 5.7 8.7 262 298 238 1.8

18 29.04.2008 74.4 20.4 6.9 9.4 261 305 236 1.3

19 05.05.2008 80.0 22.5 5.2 7.7 266 293 237 2.6

20 06.05.2008 82.7 23.4 6.8 8.4 246 281 238 1.9

21 12.05.2008 87.1 24.7 5.9 9.1 280 304 298 1.6

22 13.05.2008 92.6 26.4 7.5 9.8 310 292 295 1.3

23 19.05.2008 85.8 22.6 6.6 9.7 300 309 266 1.7

24 20.05.2008 80.0 20.8 5.7 8.7 290 303 260 1.3

25 26.05.2008 90.8 25.5 7.1 8.4 294 299 280 2.2

26 27.05.2008 93.7 26.4 6.3 10.6 300 302 270 2.3

Min 60.4 16.6 5.1 7.4 224 1.3

Max 103.5 29.8 8.9 11.2 310 3.6

Avg 83.4 22.9 6.4 9.0 276.3 1.9

98th 99.4 28.1 8.6 10.9 309.5 3.1


CO

AV-12

ANNEXURE-VI

METHODOLOGY FOR SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS

AVI-1

1.0 Meteorology

The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the

standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS : 8829) and India

Meteorological Department (IMD).

1.1 Methodology of Data Generation

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with continuous monitoring

equipment was installed at site at a height of about 10-m above ground level to

record wind speed, direction, relative humidity and temperature. The

meteorological monitoring station was located in such a way that it is free from

any obstructions and as per the guidelines specified under IS:8829. Cloud cover

was recorded by visual observation. Rainfall was monitored by rain gauge.

The continuous recording meteorological instrument of Dynalab, Pune (Model

No.WDL1002) has been used for recording the met data. The sensitivity of the

equipment is as given in Table-1.

TABLE-1

SENSITIVITY OF METEOROLOGY MONITORING STATION

Sr. No. Sensor Sensitivity

1 Wind speed Sensor ± 0.02 m/s

2 Wind direction Sensor ± 3 degrees

3 Temperature Sensor ± 0.2oC

Hourly maximum, minimum and average values of wind speed, direction and

temperature were recorded continuously with continuous monitoring equipment.

All the sensors were connected to filter and then logged on to datalogger. The

readings were recorded in a memory module, which was attached to datalogger.

The memory module was downloaded in computer through Dynalab software. The

storage capacity of memory module was 256 KB. Data was downloaded every

fortnight into the computer. The data was recorded continuously. The recovery of

data was about 98%. The rest of 2 % data gaps were filled by referring to IMD

data and daily weather reports in the local newspapers. However, Relative

Humidity and Rainfall were recorded manually.

1.2 Ambient Air Quality

1.2.1 Method of Analysis

The air samples were analyzed as per standard methods specified by Central

Pollution Control Board (CPCB), IS: 5184 and American Public Health Association

(APHA).

1.2.2 Instruments used for Sampling

Respirable Dust Samplers APM-451 instruments have been used for monitoring

Total Suspended Particulate Matter (TSPM), Respirable fraction (<10 microns) and

gaseous pollutants like SO2 and NOx. Charcoal filled glass tubes were deployed for

collection of carbon monoxide. Gas Chromatography techniques have been used for

the estimation of CO.

ANNEXURE-VI


AVI-2

1.2.3 Instruments used for Analysis

The make and model of the instruments used for analysis of the samples collected

during the field monitoring are given in Table-2.

TABLE-2

INSTRUMENTS USED FOR ANALYSIS OF SAMPLES

Sr. No

Instrument Name Make Model Parameters

1 Spectrophotometer HACH DR 2000; Sl. No.

911016344

SO2, NOx, O3

2 Electronic Balance Metler AE 200S; Sl. No M10774 TSPM, SPM,

RPM

3 Gas Chromatograph

With FID, pFPD,

ECD

GC-3,

VARIAN

CP- 3800-44; Sl. No.

8094

CO

1.2.4 Sampling and Analytical Techniques

1] Total Suspended Particulate Matter TSPM, RPM, SO2 and NOx

SPM (>10 µ) and RPM (<10 µ) present in ambient air is drawn through the

cyclone. Coarse and non-respirable dust (>10µ) is separated from the air stream

by centrifugal forces acting on the solid particles. These separated particulates fall

through the cyclone's conical hopper and collect in the sampling cup placed at the

bottom of the cyclone. The fine dust (<10 microns) forming the respirable

fraction passes the cyclone and is retained by the filter paper. The TSPM is

estimated by summing up the SPM and RPM fractions collected separately as

above.

A tapping is provided on the suction side of the blower to provide suction for

sampling air through a set of impingers. Samples of gases are drawn at a flow

rate of 0.2 Liters Per Minute (LPM).

TSPM and RPM have been estimated by Gravimetric method (IS: 5182, Part IV).

Modified West and Gaeke method (IS-5182 Part-II, 1969) has been adopted for

estimation of SO2. Jacobs-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 Part-VI, 1975) has been

adopted for the estimation of NOx.

Calibration:

Calibration charts have been prepared for all gaseous pollutants. The calibration is

carried out whenever new absorbing solutions are prepared. All the Resirable Dust

Samplers are calibrated as per ASTM D-4096. The rotameter is calibrated using

soap bubble meter.

2] Carbon Monoxide

Charcoal filled glass tubes have been used for collecting the samples of Carbon

monoxide. The CO levels were analyzed through Gas Chromatography techniques.

The techniques used for ambient air quality monitoring and minimum detectable

level are given in Table-3.

ANNEXURE-VI


AVI-3

TABLE-3

TECHNIQUES USED FOR AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Sr. No.

Parameter Technique Technical Protocol

Minimum Detectable Limit

(µµµµg/m3)

1 Total Suspended

Particulate Matter

Respirable Dust Sampler

(Gravimetric method)

IS-5182

(Part-IV)

5.0

2 Respirable

Particulate Matter

Respirable Dust Sampler

(Gravimetric method)

IS-5182

(Part-IV)

5.0

3 Sulphur dioxide Modified West and

Gaeke

IS-5182

(Part-II)

4.0

4 Oxide of Nitrogen Jacob & Hochheiser IS-5182

(Part-VI)

4.0

5 Carbon Monoxide Gas Chromatography IS-5182

(Part-X)

12.5

6 Ozone (O3) Spectro photo meter ASTM-D

5011-92

1.0

Analysis of Collected Matter

Analysis was carried out at central laboratory. The pH of the water was measured

by pH meter. The weight of the total un-dissolved matter was obtained after

filtration. The weight of ash was obtained by combustion of the undissolved matter.

The weight of the total dried soluble matter obtained from the residue from a

measured portion of filtrate after evaporation to dryness.

1.3 Water Analysis

Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples

collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO3. Samples for

bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physico-

chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for projecting the

existing water quality status in the study area. Parameters like temperature,

Dissolved Oxygen (DO) and pH were analyzed at the time of sample collection.

The methodology for sample collection and preservation techniques was followed as

per the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) mentioned in Table-4.

TABLE-4

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)

FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER SAMPLING

Parameter Sample Collection Sample Size Storage/ Preservation

pH Grab sampling Plastic /glass container

50 ml On site analysis

Electrical Conductivity

Grab sampling Plastic /glass container

50 ml On site parameter

Total suspended solids


100 ml Refrigeration, can be stored for 7 days

Total Dissolved Solids


100 ml Refrigeration, can be stored for 7 days

BOD Grab sampling Plastic /glass container

500 ml Refrigeration, 48 hrs

Hardness Grab sampling Plastic /glass container

100 ml Add HNO3 to pH<2, refrigeration; 6 months

ANNEXURE-VI


AVI-4

Parameter Sample Collection Sample Size Storage/ Preservation

Chlorides Grab sampling Plastic /glass container

50 ml Not required; 28 days

Sulphates Grab sampling Plastic /glass container

100 ml Refrigeration; 28 days

Sodium, Potassium

Plastic container 100 ml Not required; 6 months

Nitrates Plastic containers 100 ml Refrigeration; 48 hrs

Fluorides Plastic containers only 100 ml Not required; 28 days

Alkalinity Plastic/ glass containers 100 ml Refrigeration; 14 days

Ammonia Plastic/ glass containers 100 ml Add H2SO4 to pH>2, refrigeration, 28 days

Hexavalent Chromium, Cr+6

Plastic/ Glass rinse with 1+1 HNO3

100 ml Grab sample; refrigeration; 24 hrs

Heavy Metals (Hg, Cd, Cr, Cu, Fe, Zn, Pb etc.)

Plastic/ Glass rinse with 1+1 HNO3

500 ml Filter, add HNO3 to pH>2; Grab sample; 6 months

Source: Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, Published By APHA, AWWA, WEF 19th Edition, 1995

1.3.1 Analytical Techniques

The analytical techniques used for water and wastewater analysis is given in the

Table-5.

TABLE-5

ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES

FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER ANALYSIS

Parameter Method

pH APHA-4500-H+

Colour APHA-2120 C

Odour IS: 3025, Part-4

Temperature APHA-2550 B

Dissolved Oxygen APHA-4500 O

BOD APHA-5210 B

Electrical conductivity APHA-2510 B

Turbidity APHA-2130 B

Chlorides APHA-4500 Cl-

Fluorides APHA-4500 F-

Total dissolved solids APHA-2540 C

Total suspended solids APHA-2540 D

Total hardness APHA-2340 C

Sulphates APHA-4500 SO4-2

Arsenic APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3114 B/ APHA-3500 As

Calcium APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Ca

Magnesium APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Mg

Sodium APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Na

Potassium APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 K

Manganese APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Mn

Mercury APHA-3112 B/ APHA-3500 Hg

Selenium APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3114 B/ APHA-3500 Se

Lead APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Pb

Copper APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Cu

Cadmium APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Cd

Iron APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Fe

Zinc APHA-3120 B/ APHA-3500 Zn

Boron APHA-4500 B

Coliform organisms APHA-9215 D

Alkalinity APHA-2320 B

ANNEXURE-VI


AVI-5

1.4 Soil Quality

At each location, soil samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30

cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below the surface and are homogenized. This is in line with

IS: 2720 & Methods of Soil Analysis, Part-1, 2nd edition, 1986 of (American

Society for Agronomy and Soil Science Society of America). The homogenized

samples were analyzed for physical and chemical characteristics. The soil samples

were collected and analyzed once in each season.

The samples have been analyzed as per the established scientific methods for

physico-chemical parameters. The heavy metals have been analyzed by using

Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer and Inductive Coupled Plasma Analyzer.

The methodology adopted for each parameter is described in Table-6.

TABLE-6

ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR SOIL ANALYSIS

Parameter Method (ASTM number)

Grain size distribution Sieve analysis (D 422 – 63)

Textural classification Chart developed by Public Roads Administration

Infiltration capacity Infiltrometer

Bulk density Sand replacement, core cutter

Porosity Void ratio

Sodium absorption ratio Flame colourimetric (D 1428-82)

PH pH meter (D 1293-84)

Electrical conductivity Conductivity meter (D 1125-82)

Nitrogen Kjeldahl distillation (D 3590-84)

Phosphorus Molybdenum blue, colourimetric (D 515-82)

Potassium Flame photometric (D 1428-82)

Copper AAS (D 1688-84)

Iron AAS (D 1068-84)

Zinc AAS (D 1691-84)

Boron Surcumin, colourimetric (D 3082-79)

Chlorides Argentometric (D 512-81 Rev 85)

Fluorides Fusion followed by distillation and estimation by Ion selective electrod.

1.5 Noise Levels

1.5.1 Method of Monitoring

Noise level monitoring was carried out continuously for 24-hours with one hour

interval starting at 0030 hrs to 0030 hrs next day. The noise levels were monitored

on working days only and Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays were not

monitored. During each hour Leq were directly computed by the instrument based

on the sound pressure levels. Lday (Ld), Lnight (Ln) and Ldn values were computed

using corresponding hourly Leq of day and night respectively. Monitoring was

carried out at ‘A’ response and fast mode.

Parameters Measured During Monitoring

For noise levels measured over a given period of time interval, it is possible to

describe important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated

using the percent of the time certain noise levels exceeds the time interval. The

notation for the statistical quantities of noise levels is described below:

ANNEXURE-VI


AVI-6

• Hourly Leq values have been computed by integrating sound level meter.

• Lday: As per the CPCB guidelines the day time limit is between 07:00 hours to

22.00 hours as outlined in Ministry of Environment and Forest Notification S.O.

123 (E) dated 14/02/2000.

• Lnight: As per the CPCB guidelines the night time limit is between 22:00 hours to

07.00 hours as outlined in Ministry of Environment and Forest Notification S.O.

123 (E) dated 14/02/2000.

A rating developed by Environmental Protection Agency, (US-EPA) for specification

of community noise from all the sources is the Day-Night Sound Level, (Ldn).

Ldn: It is similar to a 24 hr equivalent sound level except that during night time

period (10 pm to 07 am) a 10 dB (A) weighting penalty is added to the

instantaneous sound level before computing the 24 hr average. This nighttime

penalty is added to account for the fact that noise during night when people usually

sleep is judged as more annoying than the same noise during the daytime.

The Ldn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly Leq’s,

by the following equation.

24

1010

10

15

1

9

1

101010

∑ ∑= =

++

=i i

iLiL

dn

eqeq

LogL

][)/()/(

ANNEXURE-VII

FLORA AND FAUNA

AVII-1

TABLE-1

PLANT SPECIES RECORDED IN STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Technical Name Family Life form

I. Agricultural crops

II. Commercial crops

1. Hordium vulgare Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

2. Sorghum vulgare Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

3. Triticum vulgare Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

4. Zea mays Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

5. Oryza sativa Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

6. Pennisetum typhoideum Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

II Commercial crops( including vegetables) 7. Abelomoschus indicus Malvaceae Therophyte

8. Allium cepa Liliaceae Geophyte

9. Allium sativum Liliaceae Geophyte

10. Annona squamosa Annonaceae Phanerophyte

11. Arachis hypogia Fabaceae Geophyte

12. Beta vulgaris Chenopodiaceae Geophyte

13. Brassica oleracea var botrydis Cruciferae Therophyte

14. Brassica oleracea var capitata Cruciferae Therophyte

15. Cajanus cajan Fabaceae Therophyte

16. Carica papaya Caricaceae Therophyte

17. Catharanthes pusillus Compositae Therophyte

18. Cicer arietinum Fabaceae Hemicryptophyte

19. Citrus lemon Ruataceae Therophyte

20. Colacasia esculenta Areaceae Geophyte

21. Coreandrum sativum Umbelliferae Hemicryptophyte

22. Daucus carota Umbelliferae Geophyte

23. Lycopersicum esculentus Solanaceae Therophyte

24. Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Phanerophyte

25. Memordia charantia Cucurbitaceae Therophyte

26. Psidium guava Myrtaceae Phanerophyte

27. Raphanus sativa Cruciferae Geophyte

28. Solanum tuberosum Solanaceae Geophyte

III. Plantations

29. Acacia nilotica Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

30. Albizia lebbeck Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

31. Albizia odorattissima Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

32. Albizia procera Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

33. Bauhinia variegata Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

34. Bauhinia purpuria Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

35. Bambusa arundanaceae Poaceae Phanerophyte

36. Butea superba Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

37. Eucalyptus sp Myrtaceae Phanerophyte

38. Delonix regia Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

39. Pongamia pinnata Ceasalpinaceae Phanerophyte

Natural Vegetation/Forest Tyepe

40. Abutilon indicum Malvaceae Phanerophyte

41. Acacia Arabica Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

42. Acacia auriculiformis Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

43. Acacia leucophloe Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

44. Acanthospermum hispidum Compositae Therophyte

45. Achras sapota Sapotaceae Phanerophyte

46. Achyranthes aspera Amaranthaceae Therophyte

47. Adina cordifolia Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

ANNEXURE-VII

FLORA AND FAUNA

AVII-2


48. Aegle marmelos Rutaceae Phanerophyte

49. Agave wightii Agavaceae Phanerophyte

50. Ageratum conyzoides Compositae Therophyte

51. Ailanthes excela Simaroubaceae Phanerophyte

52. Aloe barbedensis Agavaceae Geophyte

53. Alstonia scholaris Apocyanaceae Phanerophyte

54. Alysicarpus hamosus Fabaceae Therophyte

55. Alysicarpus monilifer Fabaceae Therophyte

56. Ammania baccafera Lytharaceae Therophyte

57. Antidesma diandrum Euphorbiaceae Hemicryptophyte

58. Argemone mexicana Papevaraceae Phanerophyte

59. Asparagaus racemosus Liliaceae Therophyte

60. Atalantia monophylla Rutaceae Therophyte

61. Azadirachta indica Meliaceae Phanerophyte

62. Barleria prionoites Acanthaceae Therophyte

63. Bidens biternata Compositae Therophyte

64. Blepharis asperima Acanthaceae Phanerophyte

65. Blepharis madaraspatens Acanthaceae Therophyte

66. Blumea lacera Compositae Therophyte

67. Boerheavia chinensis Nycataginaceae Therophyte

68. Boerheavia diffusa Nyctaginaceae Therophyte

69. Borreria hispida Rubiaceae Therophyte

70. Borreria stricta Rubiaceae Therophyte

71. Caesalpina pulcherima Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

72. Calotropis gigantia Asclepiadaceae Phanerophyte

73. Calotropis procera Asclipiadaceae Phanerophyte

74. Canna indicda Cannaceae Therophyte

75. Cannabis sativa Cannabinaceae Hemicryptophyte

76. Canthium diddynum Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

77. Careya arborea Palmae Phanerophyte

78. Carissa carandus Apocyanaceae Phanerophyte

79. Cassia absus Caesalpinaceae Therophyte

80. Cassia auriculata Caesalpinaceae Therophyte

81. Cassia obtuse Caesalpinaceae Therophyte

82. Cassia occidentalis Caesalpinaceae Therophyte

83. Cassia pumella Caesalpinaceae Therophyte

84. Cassia tora Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

85. Cayratia terifolia Vitaceae Phanerophyte

86. Ceiba pentandra Bombacaceae Phanerophyte

87. Cestrum diurnum Rubiaceae Theophyte

88. Cestrum noctrunum Rubiaceae Therophyte

89. Chloris varigata Poaceae Therophyte

90. Chrysanthemum sp Compositae Therophyte

91. Cissus quadrangularis Vitaceae Therophyte

92. Citrus liminoites Rutaceae Phanerophyte

93. Citrus media Rutaceae Phanerophyte

94. Cleome gynandra Capparidaceae Therophyte

95. Cleome viscose Capparidaceae Therophyte

96. Clitoria ternate Fabaceae Therophyte

97. Cocculus villosa Cucurbiataceae Phanerophyte

98. Combretum ovalifolium Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

99. Commelina benghalensis Commelinaceae Therophyte

100. Cordia dichotoma Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

101. Crotalaria medicagenia Fabaceae Therophyte

102. Croton bonplandinum Amaryllidaceae Therophyte

ANNEXURE-VII

FLORA AND FAUNA

AVII-3


103. Cuscuta reflexa Cuscutaceae Epiphyte

104. Daemia extensa Fabaceae Therophyte

105. Datura alba Solanaceae Therophyte

106. Datura metal Solanaceae Therophyte

107. Dendrophthe falcate Loranthaceae Hemicryptophyte

108. Desmodium triflorum Asclepiadaceae Therophyte

109. Eichhornia cressipes Pontederiaceae Hydrophyte

110. Emblica officinale Euphorbiaceae Phanerophyte

111. Erythrina indica Papillionaceae Phanerophyte

112. Euphorbia geniculata Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

113. Euphorbia hirta Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

114. Euphorbia hyperocifolia Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

115. Euphorbia nerifolia Euphorbiaceae Phanerophyte

116. Euphorbia nivula Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

117. Euphorbia piluliflora Euphorbiaceae Hemicryptophyte

118. Euphorbia tricauli Euphorbiaceae Hemicryptophyte

119. Evolvulus alsinoides Convolvulaceae Therophyte

120. Fagonia cretica Zygophyllaceae Phanerophyte

121. Feronia elephantum Rutaceae Phanerophyte

122. Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Phanerophyte

123. Ficus carica Moraceae Phanerophyte

124. Ficus glomerata Moraceae Phanerophyte

125. Ficus hispida Moraceae Phanerophyte

126. Ficus racemosus Moraceae Phanerophyte

127. Ficus relisiosa Moraceae Phanerophyte

128. Ficus gibbosa Moraceae Phanerophyte

129. Flacourtia indica Flacourtiaceae Phanerophyte

130. Flacourtia Montana Flacourtiaceae Phanerophyte

131. Fumaria indica Papillionaceae Hemicryptophyte

132. Gardenia latifolia Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

133. Garuga pinnata Burseraceae Phanerophyte

134. Gmelina arborea Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

135. Grewia abutifolia Tiliaceae Phanerophyte

136. Grewia subinaqualis Tiliaceae Phanerophyte

137. Haplanthus tentaculatus Acanthaceae Therophyte

138. Helictris isora Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

139. Heliotropium indicum Rubiaceae Hemicryptophyte

140. Hemidesmus indicus Asclepiadaceae Phanerophyte

141. Hibiscus gibbosa Malvaceae Therophyte

142. Hibiscus micronthus Malvaceae Therophyte

143. Hibiscus ovalifolia Malvaceae Therophyte

144. Hibiscus rosa-cianensis Malvaceae Therophyte

145. Hibsicus caesus Malvaceae Hemicryptophyte

146. Hyptis suavalens Labiatae Therophyte

147. Ipomea aquatica Convolvulaceae Hydrophyte

148. Ipomea carnea Convolvulaceae Phanerophyte

149. Ixora parviflora Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

150. Ixora singapuriens Rubiaceae Phanerophyte

151. Jacarandra jacquimontii Bignoniaceae Therophyte

152. Jasmimum arborens Oleaceae Phanerophyte

153. Jatropha gossypifolia Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

154. Justia simplex Acanthaceae Therophyte

155. Jussiaea suffraticosa Onagraceae Hydrophyte

156. Justia diffusa Acanthaceae Therophyte

157. Justicia diffusa Acanthaceae Therophyte

ANNEXURE-VII

FLORA AND FAUNA

AVII-4


158. Kyllinga trceps Cyperaceae Hemicryptophyte

159. Lannea grandis Anacardiaceae Phanerophyte

160. Lantana camara Verbinacaee Phanerophyte

161. Lathyrus sativus Papillionaceae Hemicryptophyte

162. Lawsonia inermis Lythraceae Phanerophyte

163. Lemna minor Lemnaceae Hydrophyte

164. Leucas aspera Labiatae Therophyte

165. Leucas longifolia Labiatae Therophyte

166. Leucas stelligera Labiatae Therophyte

167. Lycopersicum esculentus Solanaceae Therophyte

168. Madhuca latifolia Sapotaceae Phanerophyte

169. Mallotus philippinus Euphorbiaceae Phanerophyte

170. Malvastrum coramandalicum Malvaceae Therophyte

171. Marselia quadrifolia Marseliaceae Phanerophyte

172. Medicago aureus Papillionaceae Phanerophyte

173. Memordica diocea Cucurbitaceae Therophyte

174. Memycelon edule Melastonellaceae Phanerophyte

175. Mentha piperata Labiatae Hemicryptophyte

176. Merremia emerginata Convolvulaceae Therophyte

177. Mesua ferrea Guttiferae Phanerophyte

178. Millingtonia hartensis Bignoniaceae Phanerophyte

179. Mimosa hamata Mimosaceae Therophyte

180. Moringa olerifera Moringaeae Phanrophyte

181. Murraya exotica Rutaceae Phanerophyte

182. Murraya koenigii Rutaceae Phanerophyte

183. Musa paradisica Musaceae Therophyte

184. Nelumbium nuciferum Magnoliaceae Hydrophyte

185. Nerium indicum Apocyanaceae Phanerophyte

186. Nicotiana plubigera Solanaceae Hemicryptophyte

187. Nymphia sp Magnoliaceae Hydrophyte

188. Ocimum americanum Labiatae Therophyte

189. Ocimum basillum Labiatae Therophyte

190. Ocimum sanctum Labiatae Therophyte

191. Oldenlandiua corymbosa Rubiaceae Therophyte

192. Opuntia dillinii Opuntiaceae Therophyte

193. Oxalis corniculata Oxalidaceae Therophyte

194. Panicum milliria Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

195. Panicum notatum Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

196. Parthenium hysterophorus Compositae Therophyte

197. Passiflora foetida Passifloraceae Phanerophyte

198. Peltophorum ferrusinum Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

199. Peristrophe bicalculata Acanthaceae Therophyte

200. Phoenix aculis Palmae Phanerophyte

201. Phyllanthes asperulatus Euphorbiaceae Phanerophyte

202. Phyllanthes emblica Euphorbiaceae Phanerophyte

203. Phyllanthes nirurii Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

204. Phyllanthes reticulates Euphorbiaceae Therophyte

205. Physalis minima Solanaceae Therophyte

206. Pithocolobium dulce Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

207. Polyalthia longifolia Annonaceae Phanerophyte

208. Polygala ererptera Polygalaceae Therophyte

209. Prosopis cineraria Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

210. Prosopis juliflora Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

211. Prosopis spicegera Mimosaceae Phanerophyte

212. Saccharum munja Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

ANNEXURE-VII

FLORA AND FAUNA

AVII-5


213. Salmalia malabarica Salmaliaceae Phanerophyte

214. Sapindus emerginatus Sapindaceae Phanerophyte

215. Schleichera oleosa Sapindaceae Phanerophyte

216. Sesamum indicum Pedaliaceae Hemicryptophyte

217. Shorea robusta Dipterocarpaceae Phanerophyte

218. Sida cordifolia Malvaceae Phanerophyte

219. Sida vernanifolia Malvaceae Hemicryptophyte

220. Solanum nigrum Solanaceae Therophyte

221. Solanum suratensis Solanaceae Phanerophyte

222. Solanum xanthocarpum Solanaceae Therophyte

223. Sterculia villosa Tiliaceae Therophyte

224. Sygygium cumini Myrtaceae Phanerophyte

225. Tamarindus indica Caesalpinaceae Phanerophyte

226. Tecomella undulate Bignoniaceae Therophyte

227. Tectona grandis Verbinaceae Phanreophyte

228. Tephrosia purpuria Fabaceae Therophyte

229. Thespesia populanea Malvaceae Phanrophyte

230. Thespesia lampas Malvaceae Phanerophyte

231. Tinospora cordifolia Rhamnaceae Therophyte

232. Tragus biflorus Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

233. Trapa bispinosa Trapaceae Hydrophyte

234. Trapa natans Trapaceae Hemicryptophyte

235. Tridax procumbens Compositae Therophyte

236. Trigonella cornuculata Fabaceae Hemicryptophyte

237. Vicoa indica Compositae Phanerophyte

238. Vitex negungo Verbinaceae Therophyte

239. Wrightia tomentosa Apocyanaceae Phanerophyte

240. Yucca gloriosa Agavaceae Therophyte

241. Zizyphus jujube Rhamnaceae Phanerophyte

242. Zizyphus mauritiana Rhamanaceae Phanrophyte

243. Zornia gobbosa Compositae Therophyte

Grasslands 244. Cenchurus ciliaris Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

245. Apluda mutica Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

246. Chloris dolichosta Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

247. Cyanodactylon sp Poaceae Geophyte

248. Dichanthium annulatum Poaceae Hemicryptophyte

249. Cyperus aristatus Cyperaceae Therophyte

250. Eragrostis japonica Poaceae Therophyte

251. Themeda ciliata Cyperaceae Hemicryptophyte

Endangered plants No endangered plant species observed

during study period and also from

records of Botanical Survey of India(

Red data of Books of Indian Plants)

ANNEXURE-VIII

LANDUSE PATTREN

Village Name AreaForest

land

Total

Irrigation

Land

Un-

Irrigated

land

Cultivable

waste land

Area not

avilable for

cultivationDist - Raigarh

0-3km Tehisil - KHARSIA

Pamgarh 268 0 18 135 54 61

Jabalpur 350 0 12 171 107 60

Chhote Dumarpali 198 0 3 128 43 24

Bade Dumarpali 349 0 4 188 94 63

Jhinti Pali 174 0 10 111 15 38

Darramuda 260 0 3 181 18 58

Gindola 262 0 10 193 30 29

Bade Jampali 218 0 13 144 12 49

Kurru Bhantha 303 0 7 181 54 61

Binjkot 536 59 14 327 24 112

Bhagoradih 43 0 1 20 3 19

Naharpali 591 27 21 412 39 92

Chaple 434 0 4 258 99 73

Sendripali 151 0 3 87 17 44

Tehsil-Gharghoda

Tharakpur 361 19 1 260 54 27

Darama 339 19 0 229 68 23

Sub Total 4837 124 124 3025 731 833

3-7Km Tehsil - UDAIPUR

Baheramuda 481 128 9 199 86 59

Adukala 650 173 7 323 97 50

Tehsil-Kharsia

Kukricholi 214 37 0 91 41 45

Gurda 449 0 0 268 53 128

Tendumudi 378 2 0 196 81 99

Adpathra 299 0 1 89 111 98

Chodha 289 0 4 186 69 30

Banipathar 208 0 3 125 46 34

Bhalunara 244 22 0 85 93 44

Bhelwadih 258 0 5 192 29 32

Nawagaon 165 0 0 111 39 15

Kunkuni 923 0 20 332 363 208

Kukri Jhariya 63 0 9 27 9 18

Rajghata 218 0 6 128 56 28

Ranisagar 229 0 3 124 88 14

Karranara Alias Naurangpur 424 157 1 100 72 94

Rasiyamuda 90 0 1 36 20 33

Bendo Jhariya 163 0 0 101 42 20

Temtema 195 0 1 129 43 22

Kanmura 228 0 6 95 61 66

Amapali 131 0 0 92 17 22

Khairpali 164 0 0 113 33 18

Singhanpur 178 11 0 139 15 13

Saliha Bhantha 164 0 0 117 37 10

Raksapali 336 0 5 250 43 38

Mura 384 0 20 240 52 72

Lodhajhar 317 0 0 247 46 24

Bilaspur 207 21 11 133 12 30

Rajpur 72 0 0 57 9 6

Ful Bandhiya 164 0 18 97 29 20

Pandripani 258 0 0 171 46 41

Tehsil- Gharghoda

Bagchaba 427 0 4 200 178 45

Amapali 491 7 6 244 191 43

Jamchunwa 80 0 1 49 20 10

Jevri 481 0 1 324 123 33

Bagbuda 99 0 0 87 4 8

Sub Total 10121 558 142 5497 2354 1570

AVIII-1

ANNEXURE-VIII

LANDUSE PATTREN

7-10 KmTehsil - Udaipur

Chitapali 406 86 6 299 10 5

Khedapali 174 9 27 131 3 4

Chandrasekharpur 479 75 62 272 50 20

Puslda 967 460 11 491 2 3

Kataipali See 495 0 29 279 163 24

Lotan 517 271 30 111 73 32

Tehsil-Kharsia

Kharsia 2000 - - - - 2000

Agasmar 164 16 0 83 45 20

Dehjari 358 0 0 144 131 83

Barbhauna 347 9 0 161 122 55

Jamjhor 201 0 2 136 41 22

Dusekela 336 0 10 261 34 31

Bansmuda 83 0 4 58 13 8

Telikot 321 0 4 244 50 23

Bramhanpali 222 0 1 162 23 36

Mauhapali 280 0 4 202 21 53

Adajhar 174 8 8 131 10 17

Karpipali 275 0 26 169 24 56

Karumauha 193 0 28 118 27 20

Gidha 336 2 25 249 13 47

Bhainapara 356 29 47 237 15 28

Sonbarsa 233 10 20 162 24 17

Basnajhar 371 0 52 224 33 62

Bhaluchuwa 123 0 2 63 49 9

Jaimuda 265 0 20 166 30 49

Darri 186 0 8 147 15 16

Bhupdeopur 147 3 74 21 31 18

Kiritmal 253 0 0 214 24 15

Nawapara 175 0 0 150 10 15

Basanpali 183 0 11 119 39 14

Sondka 286 0 0 225 35 26

Jaimura 432 0 2 291 61 78

Tayang 225 0 2 121 47 55

Tehsil - Raigarh

Kushwabahari 157 8 60 63 5 21

Kodtarai 313 0 141 131 13 28

Garhkurri 248 35 19 70 39 85

Dongitarai 207 0 89 88 14 16

Kachhar 734 0 35 540 50 109

Charbhatha 191 0 10 152 15 14

Hardijhariya 184 0 10 141 11 22

Bayang 469 0 44 280 72 73

Dist - JANJGIR - CHAMPA

Tehsil - Dabhra

Kanwali 656 0 30 511 84 31

Badadarha 459 0 13 311 93 42

Tundri 1076 0 19 860 64 133

Sub Total 16257 1021 985 8988 1728 3535

TOTAL(0-10 Km) 31215 1703 1251 17510 4813 5938

Source: District Primary Census Statistics of Raigarh-2001

AVIII-2

ANNEXURE-IX

DEMOGRAPHIC DETAILS

NAME No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_06 M_06 F_06 P_SC M_SC F_SC P_ST M_ST F_ST P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT

TOT_W

ORK_P

MAINW

ORK_P

MAIN

WORK_

M

MAINW

ORK_F

MARG

WORK_

P

MARGW

ORK_M

MARGW

ORK_F

NON_W

ORK_P

Dist - Raigarh

Pamgarh 214 1029 529 500 165 99 66 36 19 17 176 92 84 675 387 288 570 443 253 190 127 40 87 459

Chhote Dumarpali 136 669 325 344 107 47 60 212 102 110 170 81 89 442 250 192 249 215 149 66 34 22 12 420

Bade Dumarpali 228 1176 564 612 186 100 86 164 75 89 240 103 137 839 425 414 425 376 255 121 49 25 24 751

Kurru Bhantha 130 710 344 366 123 67 56 30 14 16 169 84 85 463 249 214 271 23 20 3 248 159 89 439

Gindola 130 651 306 345 120 53 67 106 47 59 326 149 177 453 230 223 398 296 166 130 102 19 83 253

Jabalpur 135 588 292 296 108 60 48 36 19 17 199 94 105 371 209 162 312 257 146 111 55 17 38 276

Jhinti Pali 73 326 160 166 57 32 25 23 12 11 178 86 92 207 113 94 143 62 53 9 81 38 43 183

Darramuda 172 857 437 420 129 67 62 14 6 8 42 21 21 536 318 218 382 261 213 48 121 21 100 475

Bade Jampali 106 534 259 275 85 36 49 75 34 41 151 76 75 398 213 185 260 189 142 47 71 15 56 274

Binjkot 196 1006 511 495 172 92 80 53 22 31 435 228 207 660 374 286 519 445 268 177 74 18 56 487

Bhagoradih 40 172 89 83 27 18 9 65 37 28 73 33 40 113 60 53 81 40 37 3 41 7 34 91

Naharpali 278 1195 591 604 198 96 102 115 50 65 610 302 308 740 432 308 667 404 251 153 263 79 184 528

Chaple 468 2366 1188 1178 356 162 194 119 63 56 195 101 94 1790 994 796 982 549 463 86 433 187 246 1384

Sendripali 109 566 276 290 91 44 47 14 9 5 5 2 3 420 218 202 280 143 122 21 137 30 107 286

Tehsil-Gharghoda

Tharakpur 99 522 253 269 106 58 48 60 30 30 203 100 103 366 181 185 316 247 133 114 69 21 48 206

Darama 160 744 363 381 145 63 82 42 25 17 520 245 275 408 237 171 450 248 224 24 202 7 195 294

Sub Total 2674 13111 6487 6624 2175 1094 1081 1164 564 600 3692 1797 1895 8881 4890 3991 6305 4198 2895 1303 2107 705 1402 68063-7Km Tehsil - UDAIPUR

Baheramuda 172 852 426 426 174 87 87 5 2 3 797 396 401 407 262 145 346 299 229 70 47 17 30 506

Adukala 184 826 394 432 132 66 66 8 5 3 404 190 214 513 281 232 363 363 218 145 0 0 0 463

Tehsil-Kharsia

Kukricholi 46 220 107 113 38 20 18 6 4 2 190 92 98 131 78 53 116 27 14 13 89 45 44 104

Gurda 158 808 404 404 140 75 65 48 19 29 527 267 260 537 316 221 438 153 124 29 285 92 193 370

Tendumudi 131 534 246 288 101 44 57 13 6 7 398 184 214 377 195 182 288 267 143 124 21 0 21 246

Adpathra 122 492 243 249 80 45 35 46 23 23 394 192 202 233 163 70 268 89 70 19 179 62 117 224

Chodha 181 975 471 504 195 97 98 118 59 59 551 261 290 651 345 306 479 442 238 204 37 10 27 496

Banipathar 324 1453 749 704 324 168 156 118 60 58 350 177 173 729 465 264 801 784 437 347 17 10 7 652

Bhalunara 115 540 267 273 108 58 50 83 35 48 275 142 133 311 180 131 236 232 141 91 4 1 3 304

Bhelwadih 200 1012 518 494 186 100 86 21 11 10 37 18 19 683 392 291 366 309 193 116 57 54 3 646

Nawagaon 132 710 358 352 141 72 69 91 47 44 257 131 126 396 254 142 360 295 192 103 65 7 58 350

Kunkuni 295 1593 793 800 276 137 139 272 141 131 870 431 439 789 502 287 794 638 406 232 156 55 101 799

Kukri Jhariya 23 136 87 49 11 3 8 2 2 0 49 37 12 110 78 32 68 35 20 15 33 16 17 68

Rajghata 185 898 451 447 167 91 76 19 12 7 242 115 127 432 298 134 496 493 244 249 3 0 3 402

Ranisagar 147 755 361 394 156 75 81 64 29 35 138 62 76 354 210 144 301 276 188 88 25 13 12 454

Karranara Alias Naurangpur 83 395 190 205 55 26 29 37 16 21 257 127 130 239 144 95 129 106 95 11 23 3 20 266

Rasiyamuda 14 71 33 38 9 4 5 8 3 5 48 23 25 44 26 18 22 21 17 4 1 0 1 49

Bendo Jhariya 91 411 202 209 74 40 34 101 52 49 99 45 54 267 145 122 117 106 95 11 11 3 8 294

Temtema 101 494 238 256 88 39 49 56 21 35 105 50 55 307 173 134 247 145 131 14 102 12 90 247

Kanmura 84 440 225 215 74 40 34 5 3 2 86 46 40 265 156 109 191 132 120 12 59 5 54 249

Amapali 59 247 115 132 28 17 11 0 0 0 61 31 30 186 90 96 76 67 59 8 9 1 8 171

Khairpali 126 632 322 310 114 67 47 23 11 12 0 0 0 446 242 204 192 145 133 12 47 18 29 440

Singhanpur 107 545 251 294 96 39 57 91 38 53 262 123 139 378 187 191 277 118 104 14 159 42 117 268

Saliha Bhantha 115 560 304 256 85 35 50 119 64 55 280 147 133 405 260 145 244 149 86 63 95 38 57 316

Raksapali 202 949 479 470 132 68 64 219 107 112 292 153 139 703 377 326 397 246 170 76 151 81 70 552

Mura 298 1325 677 648 192 107 85 52 28 24 184 93 91 922 518 404 606 247 181 66 359 171 188 719

Lodhajhar 209 1176 590 586 140 75 65 238 118 120 94 50 44 806 462 344 440 381 244 137 59 16 43 736

Bilaspur 289 1236 620 616 179 93 86 292 155 137 286 137 149 924 495 429 423 346 284 62 77 17 60 813

Rajpur 105 416 212 204 51 29 22 10 3 7 40 21 19 327 175 152 206 200 106 94 6 3 3 210

Ful Bandhiya 130 630 318 312 106 50 56 316 167 149 185 93 92 444 256 188 284 149 124 25 135 25 110 346

Pandripani 139 697 351 346 88 42 46 104 52 52 146 74 72 409 236 173 194 182 168 14 12 12 0 503

Tehsil- Gharghoda

Bagchaba 117 530 255 275 85 43 42 61 30 31 368 178 190 322 187 135 291 291 152 139 0 0 0 239

Amapali 180 772 380 392 117 51 66 25 12 13 555 271 284 458 287 171 464 392 202 190 72 41 31 308

Jamchunwa 32 145 76 69 18 11 7 0 0 0 145 76 69 97 56 41 89 66 41 25 23 9 14 56

Jevri 183 789 391 398 114 58 56 97 43 54 416 204 212 511 291 220 433 319 195 124 114 32 82 356

Bagbuda 46 205 89 116 28 12 16 65 31 34 8 3 5 163 73 90 121 121 54 67 0 0 0 84

Sub Total 5125 24469 12193 12276 4102 2084 2018 2833 1409 1424 9396 4640 4756 15276 8855 6421 11163 8631 5618 3013 2532 911 1621 13306

0-3km Tehsil - KHARSIA

AIX-1

ANNEXURE-IX

DEMOGRAPHIC DETAILS

7-10 KmTehsil - Udaipur

Chitapali 148 673 335 338 129 69 60 77 41 36 432 223 209 405 235 170 346 136 108 28 210 82 128 327

Khedapali 190 909 475 434 200 111 89 476 241 235 49 25 24 598 343 255 234 232 198 34 2 2 0 675

Chandrasekharpur 382 1675 896 779 311 153 158 361 195 166 684 341 343 1059 668 391 506 405 390 15 101 69 32 1169

Puslda 246 1259 589 670 195 83 112 29 10 19 1053 503 550 589 366 223 529 367 285 82 162 64 98 730

Kataipali See 216 1047 541 506 195 114 81 31 15 16 765 393 372 490 322 168 615 439 276 163 176 21 155 432

Lotan 105 443 229 214 75 37 38 11 6 5 169 85 84 285 171 114 241 148 121 27 93 11 82 202

Tehsil-Kharsia

Kharsia (NP) 3196 17388 8874 8514 2406 1268 1138 1806 890 916 753 396 357 12234 6919 5315 5512 5346 4477 869 166 79 87 11876

Agasmar 82 344 160 184 80 41 39 9 0 9 291 136 155 242 116 126 177 104 61 43 73 27 46 167

Dehjari 157 714 361 353 132 72 60 149 71 78 134 73 61 516 275 241 252 188 137 51 64 28 36 462

Barbhauna 157 741 369 372 130 70 60 39 19 20 296 140 156 387 247 140 396 372 207 165 24 9 15 345

Jamjhor 88 439 199 240 107 48 59 29 12 17 274 126 148 249 131 118 230 202 115 87 28 0 28 209

Dusekela 441 1896 945 951 310 144 166 279 121 158 307 153 154 1166 685 481 687 477 398 79 210 116 94 1209

Bansmuda 138 653 327 326 131 66 65 231 124 107 284 139 145 447 240 207 213 162 140 22 51 19 32 440

Telikot 516 2633 1299 1334 422 205 217 601 309 292 134 65 69 1367 856 511 992 407 312 95 585 297 288 1641

Bramhanpali 166 736 347 389 130 60 70 43 19 24 265 123 142 455 236 219 313 66 61 5 247 115 132 423

Mauhapali 461 2354 1201 1153 408 205 203 585 301 284 500 253 247 1510 904 606 827 705 577 128 122 41 81 1527

Adajhar 110 537 265 272 88 38 50 14 7 7 0 0 0 360 199 161 286 184 122 62 102 31 71 251

Karpipali 129 598 301 297 86 50 36 48 24 24 24 15 9 363 207 156 274 9 6 3 265 125 140 324

Karumauha 106 589 304 285 98 53 45 110 58 52 149 79 70 329 214 115 284 122 114 8 162 30 132 305

Gidha 338 1577 793 784 322 164 158 170 90 80 520 253 267 754 500 254 755 385 300 85 370 88 282 822

Bhainapara 241 1259 635 624 247 126 121 76 40 36 152 76 76 593 379 214 594 368 292 76 226 20 206 665

Sonbarsa 71 302 153 149 49 26 23 78 34 44 134 69 65 143 93 50 153 68 43 25 85 36 49 149

Basnajhar 267 1349 675 674 213 120 93 174 86 88 498 244 254 710 438 272 747 487 268 219 260 107 153 602

Bhaluchuwa 117 529 260 269 85 49 36 84 39 45 221 111 110 299 174 125 226 66 56 10 160 77 83 303

Jaimuda 125 571 288 283 70 35 35 75 38 37 112 54 58 308 181 127 330 117 113 4 213 55 158 241

Darri 149 713 366 347 97 57 40 57 27 30 275 141 134 473 280 193 341 209 161 48 132 38 94 372

Kiritmal 201 925 451 474 149 84 65 232 114 118 48 22 26 588 329 259 258 252 221 31 6 5 1 667

Bhupdeopur 112 554 275 279 77 34 43 62 27 35 39 23 16 390 221 169 250 227 144 83 23 15 8 304

Nawapara 141 644 337 307 96 51 45 43 22 21 151 73 78 447 254 193 361 282 172 110 79 16 63 283

Basanpali 113 514 260 254 59 26 33 60 33 27 149 71 78 324 200 124 195 171 131 40 24 10 14 319

Sondka 217 993 492 501 141 61 80 192 101 91 123 60 63 688 395 293 272 197 179 18 75 46 29 721

Jaimura 289 1287 634 653 212 115 97 189 95 94 243 126 117 889 465 424 533 426 254 172 107 79 28 754

Tayang 145 640 316 324 81 37 44 56 30 26 230 108 122 470 261 209 221 211 146 65 10 6 4 419

Tehsil - Raigarh

Kushwabahari 118 515 263 252 78 33 45 55 26 29 250 123 127 372 217 155 297 297 153 144 0 0 0 218

Kodtarai 290 1255 637 618 150 80 70 54 28 26 196 100 96 746 446 300 682 483 310 173 199 58 141 573

Garhkurri 91 378 190 188 51 28 23 99 48 51 165 80 85 232 142 90 211 188 98 90 23 13 10 167

Dongitarai 164 799 393 406 113 51 62 113 52 61 188 96 92 458 273 185 469 361 220 141 108 19 89 330

Kachhar 393 1692 829 863 242 120 122 110 58 52 534 252 282 1053 615 438 898 564 327 237 334 151 183 794

Charbhatha 85 412 199 213 66 42 24 99 48 51 0 0 0 256 132 124 221 185 101 84 36 9 27 191

Hardijhariya 113 603 294 309 109 51 58 44 18 26 136 70 66 371 205 166 336 332 170 162 4 1 3 267

Bayang 345 1711 866 845 254 145 109 251 124 127 429 220 209 980 584 396 734 357 328 29 377 102 275 977

Dist - JANJGIR - CHAMP

Tehsil - Dabhra

Kanwali 449 2059 1019 1040 376 195 181 163 90 73 1173 582 591 1122 670 452 955 599 436 163 356 111 245 1104

Badadarha 230 1140 554 586 189 90 99 135 62 73 200 96 104 619 375 244 565 346 245 101 219 62 157 575

Tundri 655 2865 1434 1431 409 211 198 210 115 95 1201 598 603 1725 1062 663 1307 803 531 272 504 226 278 1558

Sub Total 12493 60914 30630 30284 9568 4918 4650 7809 3908 3901 13930 6916 7014 38061 22225 15836 24825 18052 13504 4548 6773 2516 4257 36089

TOTAL(0-10 Km) 20292 98494 49310 49184 15845 8096 7749 11806 5881 5925 27018 13353 13665 62218 35970 26248 42293 30881 22017 8864 11412 4132 7280 56201

Source: District Primary Census Statistics of Raigarh-2001

AIX-2

ANNEXURE-XR&R PLAN

AX-1

Government of ChhattisgarhMinistry of Commerce & Industries

S.No. F11-1 / 2008 / 11 / (6) Raipur, Dated

To:

Commissioner of Industries, LIC Commercial Complex, Pandari, Raipur.

Subject: In principal consent for acquisition of personal land in Raigarh Districtto M/S S.K.S. Ispat & Power Ltd.

Reference: Your letter No.47/ Adhovik / Bhu.A. / 07 / 19697 dated 31.12.08

The State Government hereby accords its in principal consent to M/S S.K.S. Ispat & PowerLimited for acquisition of 258.521 hectare personal land situated at Bade Jampani,Darramuda & Binjkot villages (P.H.N. -14 Tehsil Kharasiya, Disrict Raigarh) for thepurpose of installation of 600 MW Power Plant under Land Acquisition Act, 1894.

The list of the account holders of the said land is attached in Appendix-1.

(S.K. Behar)Secretary

Government of ChhattisgarhDepartment of Commerce & Industries

S.No. F11-1 / 2008 / 11 / (6) Raipur, Dated: 29.02.08

Copy forwarded for information & necessary action to:1. Coordinator, State Investment Promotion Board, Raipur2. Collector, Raigarh District3. M.D., C.S.I.D.C., Raipur4. G.M., District Commerce & Industry Centre5. M/S S.K.S. Ispat & Power Ltd., Raipur.

SecretaryGovernment of Chhattisgarh

Department of Commerce & Industries

2

S.K.S. ISPAT AND POWER LIMITEDDistrict – Raipur (Chhattisgarh)

Rehabilitation Scheme

Presented under Model Rehabilitation Scheme (as amended -2007) of Government of Chhattisgarh

For

Rehabilitation of displaced people affected due to land acquisitionFor the proposed Power Plant at

Badejam Pali, Darramuda & Binjkot villages Tehsil-Kharasiya, District-Raigarh

3

INDEX

ChapterNo.

List as per points prescribed in Appendix Two of theModel Rehabilitation Scheme of the Government

PageNo.

1. Introduction 42. Short profile of the development project along with

purpose of the scheme, basic concept and time scheduleof implementation

5

3. Drawing of the Project Area along with details of thesurroundings

6

4. Details of direct and indirect benefits of the scheme 75. Area and type of land (Whether Government, Forest,

Government Revenue, Service Land or Personal Land )of the project as per land records

8

6. Details of existing agricultural, business and othereconomic activities in the area

9

7. Details of the owner and lease holders of the proposedland for acquisition

10

8. Effect on Environment (Zoological as well as effect onforest, water and atmosphere) due to implementation ofthe project

11

9. Action plan for implementation of Model RehabilitationPolicy for providing employment to the people affecteddue to land acquisition

a. Employment & other facilitiesb. Compensation for proposed land, buildings, trees

& other movable & immovable assets

12-14

10. Action plan for increasing proficiency of the peopleeligible for employment due to land acquisition for theproject

15-16

11. Details of the Social and Welfare activities to beundertaken by the company in the area

17-18

12. 2.1 Clear Statement on necessity of Migration2.2 Details of the migrated families2.3 Action-plan for rehabilitation of the migrated people

19

13. 2.4 Details of such persons, for whom re-migration isassessed along with clear statement for their migration

20

4

CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited, Raipur is a well-established popular company ofthe state. At present its area of function is our State. It is a well-known PublicLimited Company of the area engaged in steel production.

Looking into positive industrial policy of the Government of Chhattisgarh, thepeaceful and cordial and favorable industrial environment, the S.K.S. Ispat andPower Limited, Raipur has decided to expand its function by installation of aPower Plant. In this connection, the company has identified the site and executedan MOU on 24.01.2007 with Government of Chhattisgarh for investment ofRs.2400 Crore.

The existing plant of the company is situated at village Siltara in Raipur District.The company has identified the proposed site for extension of their project andinstallation of steel plant in Raigarh District. The proposed land at Badejanpali,Darramuda and Binjkot villages is situated 1.20 K.M. away from the StateHighway-200. The company also proposes to install an integrated power plant innear future. The company for requirement of land surrounding the plant area hassubmitted this proposal. The project will contribute in industrial development ofthe area as well as facilitate the local people to participate in the main stream of thedevelopment and uplift the economic, educational and social status of their family.

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited, Raipur has identified the site with a view tominimize the use of Government & Personal land and in terms of the ModelRehabilitation Policy (As amended-2007) of the Government of Chhattisgarh.The basic concept of the proposed Rehabilitation Scheme is to uplift the livingstandard of the affected account holders and their dependents as per Governmentpolicy. Special emphases have been given on optimum utilization of the land anddevelop the land as per requirements of the project. To protect the area fromadverse effects on its zoology as well as atmosphere and to promote greenery, thelocal resources will be utilized with best efforts and all requirements regardingwaste material management, residential accommodation, and water resources willbe fulfilled. S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited, Raipur is committed to whole-heartedly cooperate in all social welfare activities as and when it requires.

5

CHAPTER-2

Short profile of the development project along withpurpose of the scheme, basic concept and time schedule of

implementation

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited, Raipur is a well-established popular companyof the state. The company has attained goodwill within the industrial sector ofIndia. The company has expertise in production of steel. Now the company islooking forward for expansion of its area of function.

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited, Raipur has identified a site for installation ofPower Plant in the State after appreciating the positive geological condition ofChhattisgarh. The company plans to utilize the natural resources available inthe state and establish a plant with the help of modern technology. In thisconnection, the company has formulated a scheme for the development of thestate.

The production capacity of the proposed Power Plant of S.K.S. Ispat and PowerLimited, Raipur will be 600 MW. The installation of the Plant will ensure thesocio-economic development of the area.

The project will take 2 years to complete. The Rehabilitation Scheme &Package have been derived in terms of the Model Rehabilitation Policy (asamended in 2007) of the Government of Chhattisgarh, which describes thevarious provisions of compensation, training deployment and socialdevelopment.

6

CHAPTER-3

Drawing of the Project AreaAlong with details of the surroundings

Though S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur will require hugeland in Raigarh District for installation of the proposed Power Plant, yet thecompany has identified relatively small area at Bade Jampali, Darramuda andBinjkot villages of Raigarh District due to limited alternate options. Howeverspecial emphases have been given on optimum utilization of the land anddevelop the land as per requirements of the project.

Almost 283.604-hectare land has been identified for installation of plant, water-plant, wastewater management and residential needs, out of which 258.521hectare is a personal land and 25.083 hectare belongs to the Government. Themaximum portion of the identified land is non-irrigated personal land and doesnot comprise any service land. Drawing of the proposed land is attached withthe Rehabilitation Scheme in which Personal Land as well as Government Landhas been marked separately.

7

CHAPTER-4

Details of direct and indirect benefits of the scheme

The proposed Power Plant of S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipurwill bring positive impact on socio-economic environment of the area. Anamount worth Rs.2400 Crore will be invested for installation of the proposedplant, which will generate employment in the area. About 1000 persons will getdirect employment, while other 1450 persons will also be benefited indirectly.

As a result of the integrated effect of the project, the area will be benefited interms of infrastructure and social development. The general public residearound the site will automatically be able to utilize various facilities belong toeducation, health, communication, transfer and other basic infrastructures. Thiswill uplift the economic and social status of the people of the area and their lifewill become happy, easy and smoother.

In terms of fulfillment of its social obligation under Model Rehabilitation Policy(as amended in 2007) of the Government of Chhattisgarh, the company willdedicate 3% of its annual profit towards social activities undertaken underguidance of the state level rehabilitation committee.

8

CHAPTER-5

Area and type of land (Whether Government, Forest,Government Revenue, Service Land or Personal Land) of

the project as per land records

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur has identified 283.604-hectare land for installation of plant, water-plant, wastewater management andresidential needs, out of which 258.521 hectare is a personal land and 25.083hectare belongs to the Government. Drawing of the proposed land is attachedwith the Rehabilitation Scheme in which Personal Land as well as GovernmentLand has been marked separately.

The personal land proposed for acquisition is very marginally utilized foragricultural purpose. Drawing of the proposed land is attached with theRehabilitation Scheme in which Personal Land as well as Government Land hasbeen marked separately.

9

CHAPTER-6

Details of existing agricultural, business and othereconomic activities in the area

Agriculture is the main occupation of the people located in the proposed area ofBade Jampali, Darramuda and Binjkot villages. Rice is the single crop, whichthey grow. Industrial labors and people engaged in small business also resides.Undertaking of traditional economic activities is the main source of their living.Though emerging as an industrially developed area of Chhattisgarh state, it iseconomically backward also. Large portion of its population belongs toScheduled Tribe Category. Various small and large units are established in thearea.

The Personal Land of the proposed project belongs to all communities of thesociety. The company will make efforts to uplift the condition of its accountholders as well as of the general public residing in the area.

10

CHAPTER-7

Details of the owner and leaseholders of the proposed landfor acquisition

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur has undertaken a study on thebasis of Land Record, Poverty Line and Initial Regional Survey foridentification of the affected people due to installation of the project. Thedetails are given below:

S.No. Name of the Village Proposedarea of landacquisition

Numbers ofaffectedaccountholders

Details ofaccount

holders andtheir

dependents1 Bade Jampali,

Darramuda,BinjkotDistrict- Raigarh

258.521Hectare

238 accountholders (310dependentfamilies)

As attachedin Appendix-1

11

CHAPTER-8

Effect on Environment(Zoological as well as effect on forest, water and atmosphere) due

to implementation of the project

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur will strictly adhere to theGovernment Guidelines in terms of environment prevention. In this connectionan effective valuation system has formulated, which will facilitate theestimation of the environment effect on any activity and implementation ofsolutions. This valuation system is utilized to study the affect of any activity onall human being including trees, plants, birds and animals. The valuationsystem also includes qualitative study of affects on social, economic, culturaland biophysical front.

Special attention will be given to protect the biological entity of the affectedpeople and to promote the greenery. In this connection, local resources will beutilized with best efforts and all requirements regarding waste materialmanagement, residential accommodation, and water resources will be fulfilled.S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur is committed to follow allnorms and rules regarding environmental protection.

12

CHAPTER-9

Action plan for implementation of Model RehabilitationPolicy for providing employment to the people affected

due to land acquisition

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur is committed to rehabilitatethe affected people in terms of Para 3 to 8 of the Model Rehabilitation Policy(as amended in 2007) of the State Government.

1. Proposed employment and other facilitiesa) Permanent employment will be provided to each affected account

holder and one member of eligible dependent family, who havebeen living jointly or as a member of the joint family of the owneror lease holder of the land under acquisition for a period of 3 ormore years as on date of the publication of notification as persection-4 (1) of the Land Acquisition Act.

b) In terms of Model Rehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007) ofthe State Government, priority will be given to the affected peoplein the following serial order while giving employment in otheractivities of the Project:

A) Displaced families whose 100% agriculture land and residencehave been acquired.B) Displaced families whose 100% agriculture land has been acquired.C) Displaced families whose more than 75% agriculture land has been

acquired.D) Displaced families whose more than 50% agriculture land has been

acquired.E) Displaced families whose 25% agriculture land has been acquired.F) Other displaced families

In terms of Model Rehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007) of the StateGovernment, if the number of opportunities to the displaced families for regularemployment in the Project and its allied activities is less than the numbereligible displaced families, then a permanent shop will be constructed andawarded to one member of each displaced families in the area of their choicenear project site or at concerned sub-divisional area or Panchayat / Corporationat the cost of company and in addition to the regular compensation amount.For the displaced families, who opts for self employment as an alternatearrangement by way of transportation of the raw material and products or publictransportation, priority will be given to them while awarding contract for the

13

said purpose. Moreover assistance will be provided to them for arrangement ofthe transport vehicles.

Special training through training facilities of the Government or throughindependent agencies will be provided to such members of the displacedfamilies who do not posses the required skill though eligible for theemployment.

In case of failure of the institutions engaged in implementation of Industrial &Mining Project to provide employment (initially in the construction work andlater in the project itself) within a period of 2 years, then an amount equivalentto the regular income from the employment or payable under EmploymentGuarantee Scheme, whichever is more, will be paid without work till the date ofarrangement of regular employment by the institution.

2. Compensation for LandIn terms of section-4(i) of the Land Acquisition Act, 1964, the compensation ascalculated (A) or (B) or (C) {Whichever is more} will be provided to eachaffected account holder and one member of eligible dependent family, who havebeen living jointly or as a member of the joint family of the owner or leaseholder of the land under acquisition for a period of 3 or more years as on date ofthe publication of notification:

(A) The calculated market value of the acquired land under landacquisition act + 30%

Or(B) The Value calculated as per guidelines of the collector

regarding payment of the Stamp fee + 50% additional amount.Or

(C) Rates prescribed for different types of land as under:Type of Land Total CompensationNon-irrigated Barren Land Rs.50,000/- per acreSingle Crop Non-Irrigated Land Rs.75,000/- per acreDouble-Crop Irrigated Land Rs.1,00,000/- per acre

In addition to the above, additional subsidy amount decided by the stategovernment of chhatisgarh will also be paid.

3. Compensation for Housei. Rough / un-constructed house (Kachcha Makaan) :

Market Price or Minimum Rs. 25,000/-

14

ii. Constructed House (Pakka Makaan): Market Price orMinimum Rs. 50,000/-.

iii. If the affected person wants compensation, then thelocal authority in consultation of District Collector willdo the same.

iv. The definition of Kachcha Makaan & Pakka Makaanwill be decided as per guidelines issued by theGovernment of Chhattisgarh in this regard.

v. A subsidy of Rs. 1 Lac for the construction of the houseand Rs. 10,000/- towards construction of the shade forCattle.

vi. An amount of Rs.11,000/- will be paid to each displacedfamily due for rehabilitation at the time of their transfer.

vii. An amount of Rs.1000/- will be paid to each displacedfamily for transportation of household articles andcattle.

viii. In case of encroacher-displaced families, compensationwill be given only for the house constructed on theencroached land.

4. Compensation for trees and other assets

For trees As per prevailing rates approved andapplied by the Government ofChhattisgarh & Central ValuationCouncil

For other assets excluding house As per rates approved by theGovernment of Chhattisgarh

15

CHAPTER-10

Action plan for increasing proficiency of the peopleeligible for employment due to land acquisition for the

project

The proposed expansion of the S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company,Raipur will bring immense opportunities for employment generation. Theopportunities will take place immediately after availability of the site. Manyskilled, semi-skilled and un-skilled persons (men as well as women) will getjobs during construction period.

Some of the skills required during construction will be Head Artisan,concreting, fabrication and erecting of steel framework, Piping, EquipmentInstallation, Electric fittings and Electronic Works, etc.

Sufficient manpower will be required immediately after the acquisition of landfor construction of residence and plant. The first face of construction of plantwill take almost 5 years to complete. After commencement of the plant, newemployment opportunities will be available in operational work, ancillary units,maintenance of houses, etc. STD PCO, Hotels, Dhabas, Motor Garrages, etc.will be established near plant.

Services of specialist contractors will be taken during various stages of theconstruction. In case of changing needs, some manpower may be transferredfrom one contractor to the other. In that case, necessary training will be givento the affected people. Efforts will be made to provide training opportunities tothe affected people. The training programmes will be designed to suiteducational qualification, efficiency, experience and interest of the affectedpeople. Training requirements will be determined through assessment process.

The affected people will be given various types of technical training, such as:1. Construction of Plant: steel structure, Civil Work: Electrical welding,

masonry work.2. Equipment handlings like pump, compressors, construction

equipments, heavy vehicles, etc.3. Maintenance services, Material handling work, etc.4. Public health and civil services.5. Gardening, agriculture, etc.The Training Programmes will be arranged at ITIs of the state and othercenters identified by the company.

16

In terms of Model Rehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007) of the stateGovernment, training programmes will be arranged for every account holderas well as one member of each dependent family to enable them to gainnecessary skill for the employment they deserve.

17

CHAPTER-11

Details of the Social and Welfare activities to beundertaken by the company in the area

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur will undertake varioussocial and welfare activities in the area as per details below:

11.1 Basic infrastructure in Primary SchoolsCompany will make arrangements for furniture, stainless steel utensils,carpet (Dari/Chatai), Chairs, Cupboards, etc. in the Primary School locatedin the area for the development of the school as well as students. In additionto the above, the company will also make arrangements for repairs andmaintenance of doors, windows, etc. of the premises of the school.

11.2 Basic Infrastructure in High SchoolCompany will organize Personality Development, Road Safety andComputer Training Programmes for the students of the High School situatedin the area. The students will be imparted training for identification of theemployment in the area. Company will promote the sports activities in theschool and at the same time suitable award / facilitation will be given tomeritorious students so as to motivate the students and the teachers.

11.3 Handicraft and cultural developmentThe company will identify various handicrafts like woodwork, drawing,painting and other cultural activities and provide financial assistance formotivation of such activities to protect cultural heritage of the area.

11.4 Assistance for Physically handicapped persons, old people,widows and the poor people below poverty line

The company will identify the physically handicapped persons, old people,widows and the poor people below poverty line and provide them financialassistance and guidance with the help and coordination from the localauthorities.

11.5 Self-help Groups of WomenWomen are the backbone of their family and they must be motivated to earnthemselves and gain confidence. Making of Self-help groups for suchwomen may be proved to be an effective step in this direction. Company

18

will help in making of such groups and provide necessary assistance in sucha manner that they may be able to earn money through making of Papad andPickles, Tailoring, embroidery and other activities.

11.6 Agriculture DevelopmentAt present, most of the farmers of the affected area are engaged in traditionalsingle crop activities. It leads them to do outside work / job duringremaining 9 months of the year. The company will make arrangements fortube well irrigation and sprinkle irrigation with the help of moderntechnology to increase the output and enable the farmers to grow pulses, oilseeds and other cash crops.

11.7 Adequate use of Pond WaterAt present, the pond water is being used only during rainy season to growcrops. Company will develop the water storage areas to facilitate irrigationthroughout the year. The same quantity of water may be utilized for morethen a single crop by using new technology. The Ground Water Level mayalso be increased. Company will provide necessary training to the farmers inthis direction.

11.8 Medical CampThe company will organize Medical Camps to provide artificial parts of thebody for physically handicapped persons, eye examination, diabetes test, etc.

19

CHAPTER-12

2.1 Clear Statement on necessity of Migration2.2 Details of the migrated families

2.3Action-plan for rehabilitation of the migrated people

Though not a single person is being migrated due to proposed extension ofscheme in terms of paragraph 12 of the rehabilitation scheme, however the unitis committed for rehabilitation of the affected family in terms of section 3 to 8of the Model Rehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007).

In this connection the whole necessary financial burden will be borne by theunit.

20

CHAPTER-13

Details of such persons for whom re-migration is assessedalong with clear statement for their migration and the

programme proposed

Though not a single person is being migrated due to proposed extension ofscheme in terms of paragraph 12 of the rehabilitation scheme, however the unitis committed for rehabilitation of the affected family in terms of section 3 to 8of the Model Rehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007).

In this connection the whole necessary financial burden will be borne by theunit.

21

Affidavit

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur hereby declares that it willfulfill all social obligations as enumerated in various provisions, paragraphs andsections of the Model Rehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007).

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur will implement the schemeregarding development of the living standard of the people located in andaround the area as well as account holders and their dependent families.

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur will give special attention forprotection of biological entity of the affected area and promotion of thegreenery.

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company, Raipur will give special emphases onoptimum utilization of the land and develop the land as per requirements of theproject and in a manner to minimize its needs.

(K. Hariharan)Authorized Representative

DECLARATION

I, K. Hariharan, authorized representative of S.K.S. Ispat and Power LimitedCompany, Raipur hereby undertake in the presence of witness without anypressure that the company will follow all paragraphs and sections of the ModelRehabilitation Policy (as amended in 2007).

(K. Hariharan)Authorized Representative

S.K.S. Ispat and Power Limited Company

22

Total Number of Dependent Families

310

(Bade Jampali, Darramuda & Binjkot)

environmental impact assessment ... impact assessment for the proposed 4x300 mw coal based thermal...

Documents